You are on page 1of 814

NI Multisim

TM

User Manual

NI Multisim User Manual

January 2009
374483D-01

Support

Worldwide Technical Support and Product Information
ni.com

National Instruments Corporate Headquarters
11500 North Mopac Expressway Austin, Texas 78759-3504 USA Tel: 512 683 0100

Worldwide Offices
Australia 1800 300 800, Austria 43 662 457990-0, Belgium 32 (0) 2 757 0020, Brazil 55 11 3262 3599,
Canada 800 433 3488, China 86 21 5050 9800, Czech Republic 420 224 235 774, Denmark 45 45 76 26 00,
Finland 358 (0) 9 725 72511, France 01 57 66 24 24, Germany 49 89 7413130, India 91 80 41190000,
Israel 972 3 6393737, Italy 39 02 41309277, Japan 0120-527196, Korea 82 02 3451 3400,
Lebanon 961 (0) 1 33 28 28, Malaysia 1800 887710, Mexico 01 800 010 0793, Netherlands 31 (0) 348 433 466,
New Zealand 0800 553 322, Norway 47 (0) 66 90 76 60, Poland 48 22 328 90 10, Portugal 351 210 311 210,
Russia 7 495 783 6851, Singapore 1800 226 5886, Slovenia 386 3 425 42 00, South Africa 27 0 11 805 8197,
Spain 34 91 640 0085, Sweden 46 (0) 8 587 895 00, Switzerland 41 56 2005151, Taiwan 886 02 2377 2222,
Thailand 662 278 6777, Turkey 90 212 279 3031, United Kingdom 44 (0) 1635 523545

For further support information, refer to the Technical Support and Professional Services appendix. To comment
on National Instruments documentation, refer to the National Instruments Web site at ni.com/info and enter
the info code feedback.

© 2006–2009 National Instruments Corporation. All rights reserved.

Important Information
Warranty
The media on which you receive National Instruments software are warranted not to fail to execute programming instructions, due to defects in
materials and workmanship, for a period of 90 days from date of shipment, as evidenced by receipts or other documentation. National Instruments
will, at its option, repair or replace software media that do not execute programming instructions if National Instruments receives notice of such defects
during the warranty period. National Instruments does not warrant that the operation of the software shall be uninterrupted or error free.
A Return Material Authorization (RMA) number must be obtained from the factory and clearly marked on the outside of the package before any
equipment will be accepted for warranty work. National Instruments will pay the shipping costs of returning to the owner parts which are covered by
warranty.
National Instruments believes that the information in this document is accurate. The document has been carefully reviewed for technical accuracy. In
the event that technical or typographical errors exist, National Instruments reserves the right to make changes to subsequent editions of this document
without prior notice to holders of this edition. The reader should consult National Instruments if errors are suspected. In no event shall National
Instruments be liable for any damages arising out of or related to this document or the information contained in it.
EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED HEREIN, NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. CUSTOMER’S RIGHT TO RECOVER DAMAGES CAUSED BY FAULT OR NEGLIGENCE ON THE PART OF NATIONAL
INSTRUMENTS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT THERETOFORE PAID BY THE CUSTOMER. NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF DATA, PROFITS, USE OF PRODUCTS, OR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF. This limitation of
the liability of National Instruments will apply regardless of the form of action, whether in contract or tort, including negligence. Any action against
National Instruments must be brought within one year after the cause of action accrues. National Instruments shall not be liable for any delay in
performance due to causes beyond its reasonable control. The warranty provided herein does not cover damages, defects, malfunctions, or service
failures caused by owner’s failure to follow the National Instruments installation, operation, or maintenance instructions; owner’s modification of the
product; owner’s abuse, misuse, or negligent acts; and power failure or surges, fire, flood, accident, actions of third parties, or other events outside
reasonable control.

Copyright
Under the copyright laws, this publication may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying,
recording, storing in an information retrieval system, or translating, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of National
Instruments Corporation.
National Instruments respects the intellectual property of others, and we ask our users to do the same. NI software is protected by copyright and other
intellectual property laws. Where NI software may be used to reproduce software or other materials belonging to others, you may use NI software only
to reproduce materials that you may reproduce in accordance with the terms of any applicable license or other legal restriction.
BSIM3 and BSIM4 are developed by the Device Research Group of the Department of Electrical Engineering and Computer Science, University of
California, Berkeley and copyrighted by the University of California.
The ASM51 cross assembler bundled with Multisim MCU is a copyrighted product of MetaLink Corp. (www.metaice.com).
MPASM™ macro assembler and related documentation and literature is reproduced and distributed by Electronics Workbench under license from
Microchip Technology Inc. All rights reserved by Microchip Technology Inc. MICROCHIP SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE AND LITERATURE
IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
MICROCHIP BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE OR THE USE OF OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE.
Anti-Grain Geometry - Version 2.4
Copyright (C) 2002-2004 Maxim Shemanarev (McSeem)
Permission to copy, use, modify, sell and distribute this software is granted provided this copyright notice appears in all copies. This software is
provided "as is" without express or implied warranty, and with no claim as to its suitability for any purpose.
Anti-Grain Geometry - Version 2.4
Copyright (C) 2002-2005 Maxim Shemanarev (McSeem)
1. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
2. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
3. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Trademarks
National Instruments, NI, ni.com, and LabVIEW are trademarks of National Instruments Corporation. Refer to the Terms of Use section
on ni.com/legal for more information about National Instruments trademarks.
Electronics Workbench, Multisim and Ultiboard are trademarks of National Instruments.
Portions of this product obtained under license from Bartels Systems GmbH.
Other product and company names mentioned herein are trademarks or trade names of their respective companies.
Members of the National Instruments Alliance Partner Program are business entities independent from National Instruments and have no agency,
partnership, or joint-venture relationship with National Instruments.

Patents
For patents covering National Instruments products/technology, refer to the appropriate location: Help»Patents in your software,
the patents.txt file on your media, or the National Instruments Patent Notice at ni.com/patents.
Some portions of this product are protected under United States Patent No. 6,560,572.

WARNING REGARDING USE OF NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS
(1) NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS ARE NOT DESIGNED WITH COMPONENTS AND TESTING FOR A LEVEL OF
RELIABILITY SUITABLE FOR USE IN OR IN CONNECTION WITH SURGICAL IMPLANTS OR AS CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN
ANY LIFE SUPPORT SYSTEMS WHOSE FAILURE TO PERFORM CAN REASONABLY BE EXPECTED TO CAUSE SIGNIFICANT
INJURY TO A HUMAN.
(2) IN ANY APPLICATION, INCLUDING THE ABOVE, RELIABILITY OF OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE PRODUCTS CAN BE
IMPAIRED BY ADVERSE FACTORS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO FLUCTUATIONS IN ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY,
COMPUTER HARDWARE MALFUNCTIONS, COMPUTER OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE FITNESS, FITNESS OF COMPILERS
AND DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE USED TO DEVELOP AN APPLICATION, INSTALLATION ERRORS, SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE
COMPATIBILITY PROBLEMS, MALFUNCTIONS OR FAILURES OF ELECTRONIC MONITORING OR CONTROL DEVICES,
TRANSIENT FAILURES OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS (HARDWARE AND/OR SOFTWARE), UNANTICIPATED USES OR MISUSES, OR
ERRORS ON THE PART OF THE USER OR APPLICATIONS DESIGNER (ADVERSE FACTORS SUCH AS THESE ARE HEREAFTER
COLLECTIVELY TERMED “SYSTEM FAILURES”). ANY APPLICATION WHERE A SYSTEM FAILURE WOULD CREATE A RISK OF
HARM TO PROPERTY OR PERSONS (INCLUDING THE RISK OF BODILY INJURY AND DEATH) SHOULD NOT BE RELIANT SOLELY
UPON ONE FORM OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DUE TO THE RISK OF SYSTEM FAILURE. TO AVOID DAMAGE, INJURY, OR DEATH,
THE USER OR APPLICATION DESIGNER MUST TAKE REASONABLY PRUDENT STEPS TO PROTECT AGAINST SYSTEM FAILURES,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BACK-UP OR SHUT DOWN MECHANISMS. BECAUSE EACH END-USER SYSTEM IS
CUSTOMIZED AND DIFFERS FROM NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS' TESTING PLATFORMS AND BECAUSE A USER OR APPLICATION
DESIGNER MAY USE NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS IN COMBINATION WITH OTHER PRODUCTS IN A MANNER NOT
EVALUATED OR CONTEMPLATED BY NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS, THE USER OR APPLICATION DESIGNER IS ULTIMATELY
RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING AND VALIDATING THE SUITABILITY OF NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS WHENEVER
NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS ARE INCORPORATED IN A SYSTEM OR APPLICATION, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THE APPROPRIATE DESIGN, PROCESS AND SAFETY LEVEL OF SUCH SYSTEM OR APPLICATION.

Conventions

The following conventions are used in this manual:

» The » symbol leads you through nested menu items and dialog box options
to a final action. The sequence File»Page Setup»Options directs you to
pull down the File menu, select the Page Setup item, and select Options
from the last dialog box.

This icon denotes a tip, which alerts you to advisory information.

This icon denotes a note, which alerts you to important information.

This icon denotes a caution, which advises you of precautions to take to
avoid injury, data loss, or a system crash.

bold Bold text denotes items that you must select or click in the software, such
as menu items and dialog box options. Bold text also denotes parameter
names.

italic Italic text denotes variables, emphasis, a cross-reference, or an introduction
to a key concept. Italic text also denotes text that is a placeholder for a word
or value that you must supply.

monospace Text in this font denotes text or characters that you should enter from the
keyboard, sections of code, programming examples, and syntax examples.
This font is also used for the proper names of disk drives, paths, directories,
programs, subprograms, subroutines, device names, functions, operations,
variables, filenames, and extensions.

monospace bold Bold text in this font denotes the messages and responses that the computer
automatically prints to the screen. This font also emphasizes lines of code
that are different from the other examples.

monospace italic Italic text in this font denotes text that is a placeholder for a word or value
that you must supply.

Contents

Chapter 1
User Interface
Introduction to the Multisim Interface ..........................................................................1-1
Toolbars ........................................................................................................................1-1
Standard Toolbar ............................................................................................1-2
Main Toolbar ..................................................................................................1-3
Simulation Toolbar .........................................................................................1-4
View Toolbar...................................................................................................1-5
Components Toolbar .......................................................................................1-6
Virtual Toolbar ................................................................................................1-7
Graphic Annotation Toolbar ...........................................................................1-7
Instruments Toolbar.........................................................................................1-8
Locking Toolbars ............................................................................................1-11
Toolbar Behavior When Multisim Size is Reduced .......................................1-12
Pop-up Menus ...............................................................................................................1-12
Pop-up From Circuit Window, with no Component Selected ........................1-12
Pop-up From a Selected Component or Instrument ........................................1-15
Pop-up From a Selected Wire .........................................................................1-17
Pop-up From a Selected Text Block or Graphic ............................................1-17
Pop-up From a Title Block .............................................................................1-18
Pop-up from a Comment or Measurement Probe............................................1-19
Setting Schematic Capture Preferences ........................................................................1-19
Using the Preferences Dialog Box ..................................................................1-20
Preferences - Paths Tab ....................................................................1-20
Preferences - Save Tab .....................................................................1-21
Preferences - Parts Tab ....................................................................1-22
Preferences - General Tab ................................................................1-23
Preferences - Simulation Tab ...........................................................1-23
Using the Sheet Properties Dialog Box ..........................................................1-24
Sheet Properties - Circuit Tab ..........................................................1-25
Sheet Properties - Workspace Tab ....................................................1-26
Sheet Properties - Wiring Tab ..........................................................1-27
Sheet Properties - Font Tab ..............................................................1-27
Sheet Properties - PCB Tab .............................................................1-28
Sheet Properties - Visibility Tab ......................................................1-29
Design Toolbox..............................................................................................................1-29
Visibility Tab...................................................................................................1-29
Hierarchy Tab..................................................................................................1-30

© National Instruments Corporation vii NI Multisim User Manual

Contents

Customizing the Interface.............................................................................................. 1-32
Commands tab ................................................................................................ 1-33
Toolbars tab .................................................................................................... 1-33
Keyboard tab .................................................................................................. 1-34
Menu tab ........................................................................................................ 1-34
Options tab ..................................................................................................... 1-35
Customization Pop-up Menus......................................................................... 1-35

Chapter 2
Schematic Capture - Basics
Introduction to Schematic Capture................................................................................ 2-1
Working with Multiple Circuit Windows...................................................................... 2-1
Selecting Components from the Database .................................................................... 2-2
Placing Components...................................................................................................... 2-2
Using the Place Component Browser ............................................................ 2-3
Placing Resistors, Inductors or Capacitors ...................................... 2-5
Multi-section Components ............................................................... 2-8
Rotating/flipping a part during placement........................................ 2-10
Other Buttons ................................................................................... 2-11
Placing Virtual Components ........................................................................... 2-11
Virtual component toolbars .............................................................. 2-13
Using the In Use List ...................................................................................... 2-14
Drop-Placing Two-Pinned Components ......................................................... 2-15
Selecting Placed Components......................................................................... 2-15
Moving a Placed Component .......................................................................... 2-16
Copying a Placed Component......................................................................... 2-18
Replacing a Placed Component ...................................................................... 2-18
Controlling Component’s Color ..................................................................... 2-19
Wiring Components....................................................................................................... 2-19
Wiring Components Automatically ................................................................ 2-20
Autowire of Touching Pins............................................................... 2-22
Wiring Components Manually........................................................................ 2-22
Combining Automatic and Manual Wiring .................................................... 2-23
Marking Pins for No Connection .................................................................... 2-23
Placing Wires Directly Onto Workspace ........................................................ 2-24
Setting Wiring Preferences ............................................................................. 2-24
Modifying the Wire Path................................................................................. 2-25
Controlling Wire Color .................................................................................. 2-26
Moving a Wire ................................................................................................ 2-26
Virtual Wiring ................................................................................................. 2-27
Manually Adding a Junction ......................................................................................... 2-27
Rotating/Flipping Placed Components.......................................................................... 2-28
Finding Components in Your Circuit ............................................................................ 2-29

NI Multisim User Manual viii ni.com

Contents

Labeling .........................................................................................................................2-31
Modifying Component Labels and Attributes.................................................2-31
Modifying Net Names ....................................................................................2-32
Adding a Title Block .......................................................................................2-33
Entering the Title Block Contents ....................................................2-33
Adding Miscellaneous Text.............................................................................2-35
Adding a Comment..........................................................................................2-36
Graphic Annotation ........................................................................................2-38
Capturing Screen Area ....................................................................................2-41
Circuit Description Box ................................................................................................2-42
Formatting the Circuit Description Box ..........................................................2-43
Formatting Circuit Description Box Text .........................................2-44
Paragraph Dialog Box ......................................................................2-44
Tabs Dialog Box ..............................................................................2-45
Date and Time Dialog Box ..............................................................2-45
Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................2-46
Insert Object Dialog Box ..................................................................2-46
Scrolling with Events During Simulation........................................................2-47
Scrolling Text During Simulation.....................................................2-47
Playing a Video Clip .........................................................................2-49
Description Label Dialog Box .........................................................2-50
Edit Labels Dialog Box ....................................................................2-51
Other Actions ....................................................................................2-52
Description Edit Bar ........................................................................................2-52
Linking a Form to a Circuit ...........................................................................................2-54
Creating Forms ................................................................................................2-54
Linking to Questions ......................................................................................2-56
Setting Form Submission Options...................................................................2-56
Completing Forms ...........................................................................................2-57
Printing the Circuit ........................................................................................................2-58

Chapter 3
Schematic Capture - Advanced Functions
Placed Component Properties ........................................................................................3-1
Displaying Identifying Information about a Placed Component ....................3-1
Viewing a Placed Component’s Value/Model ...............................................3-2
Real Components ..............................................................................3-2
Resistors, Inductors and Capacitors .................................................3-3
Edit Model Dialog Box ....................................................................3-4
Edit Footprint Dialog Box ................................................................3-5
Virtual Components ..........................................................................3-5
Controlling How a Placed Component is Used in Analyses ..........................3-6
Editing a Placed Component’s User Fields ....................................................3-7

© National Instruments Corporation ix NI Multisim User Manual

Contents

Assigning Faults to Components .................................................................................. 3-8
Setting a Placed Component’s Faults ............................................................. 3-8
Using the Auto Fault Option .......................................................................... 3-9
Spreadsheet View .......................................................................................................... 3-10
Spreadsheet View Results Tab........................................................................ 3-10
Spreadsheet View Nets Tab ............................................................................ 3-10
Spreadsheet View Components Tab ............................................................... 3-12
Spreadsheet View PCB Layers Tab ................................................................ 3-14
Spreadsheet View Simulation Tab ................................................................. 3-14
Spreadsheet View Buttons .............................................................................. 3-15
Title Block Editor .......................................................................................................... 3-16
Enter Text Dialog Box .................................................................................... 3-19
Placing Fields.................................................................................................. 3-19
Field Codes ...................................................................................... 3-21
Title Block Editor Spreadsheet View.............................................................. 3-22
Title Block Editor Menus................................................................................ 3-23
File Menu ......................................................................................... 3-23
Edit Menu ........................................................................................ 3-23
View Menu ...................................................................................... 3-24
Fields Menu ..................................................................................... 3-25
Graphics Menu ................................................................................ 3-27
Tools Menu ...................................................................................... 3-28
Help Menu ....................................................................................... 3-28
Pop-up Menus .................................................................................. 3-28
Title Block Editor Toolbars ............................................................................ 3-28
Standard Toolbar - Title Block Editor .............................................. 3-29
Zoom Toolbar - Title Block Editor................................................... 3-30
Draw Tools Toolbar - Title Block Editor ......................................... 3-30
Drawing Toolbar - Title Block Editor .............................................. 3-32
Electrical Rules Checking ............................................................................................. 3-34
ERC Options Tab ........................................................................................... 3-37
Clearing ERC Markers ..................................................................... 3-38
ERC Rules Tab................................................................................................ 3-39
Component’s Pins Tab .................................................................................... 3-41

Chapter 4
Working with Larger Designs
Flat Multi-Sheet Design ................................................................................................ 4-1
Delete Multi-Page Dialog Box........................................................................ 4-2
Hierarchical Design ....................................................................................................... 4-2
Nested Circuits................................................................................................ 4-3
Component Numbering in Nested Circuits..................................................... 4-4
Net Numbering in Nested Circuits.................................................................. 4-5

NI Multisim User Manual x ni.com

Contents

Global Nets......................................................................................................4-5
Adding a Hierarchical Block ...........................................................................4-7
Placing a HB from an Existing File ..................................................4-8
Replacing Components with an HB..................................................4-9
Adding a Subcircuit ........................................................................................4-10
Replacing Components with an SC ..................................................4-10
Viewing a Parent Sheet ...................................................................................4-11
Renaming Component Instances ...................................................................................4-11
Reference Designator Prefix Setup Dialog .....................................................4-13
Buses ..............................................................................................................................4-15
Placing a Bus ...................................................................................................4-18
Placing a Bus across Multi-Pages .....................................................4-18
Connecting Buses to HB/SCs ...........................................................4-19
Bus Properties..................................................................................................4-21
Adding Buslines to a Bus .................................................................4-21
Deleting Buslines from a Bus ...........................................................4-21
Renaming Buslines in a Bus ............................................................4-21
Merging Buses ................................................................................................4-22
Wiring to a Bus................................................................................................4-23
Bus Vector Connect.........................................................................................4-26
Variants ..........................................................................................................................4-37
Setting Up Variants ........................................................................................4-38
Placing Parts in Variants .................................................................................4-41
Assigning Variant Status to Components ........................................4-42
Assigning Variant Status to Nested Circuits.....................................4-47
Setting the Active Variant for Simulation ........................................4-47
Project Management and Version Control.....................................................................4-50
Setting up Projects ..........................................................................................4-50
Working with Projects.....................................................................................4-51
Working with Files Contained in Projects ......................................................4-52
Version Control ..............................................................................................4-53

Chapter 5
Components
Structure of the Component Database ..........................................................................5-1
Database Levels ..............................................................................................5-2
Classification of Components in the Database ...............................................5-2
Locating Components in the Database .........................................................................5-3
Browsing for Components ..............................................................................5-3
Searching for Components .............................................................................5-3
Types of Information Stored for Components ..............................................................5-4
Pre-Defined Fields ..........................................................................................5-5
User Fields ......................................................................................................5-5

© National Instruments Corporation xi NI Multisim User Manual

Contents

Managing the Database ................................................................................................ 5-6
Filtering Displayed Components ................................................................... 5-6
Deleting Components ..................................................................................... 5-7
Copying Components ..................................................................................... 5-7
Exporting Components .................................................................................. 5-8
Saving Placed Components ............................................................................ 5-8
Moving Components Between Databases ...................................................... 5-9
Resetting Master dB User Fields ................................................................... 5-9
Managing Families ......................................................................................... 5-9
Modifying User Field Titles and Content ...................................................... 5-10
Modifying User Field Content for RLC Components ..................... 5-11
Displaying Database Information ................................................................... 5-12
Editing Components........................................................................................ 5-12
Converting Databases ................................................................................................... 5-12
Updating Components from Databases ........................................................................ 5-14
Merging Databases ....................................................................................................... 5-16

Chapter 6
Component Editing
Introduction to Component Editing............................................................................... 6-1
Creating Components with the Component Wizard ..................................................... 6-3
Creating an Analog Component...................................................................... 6-3
Creating a Digital Component ........................................................................ 6-7
Creating a VHDL Component ........................................................................ 6-11
Using a Symbol File Created in the Symbol Editor........................................ 6-15
Editing Components ...................................................................................................... 6-16
Editing a Component’s General Properties .................................................................. 6-17
Editing a Component’s Symbol .................................................................................... 6-17
Copying a Component’s Symbol .................................................................... 6-19
Copying a Multi-Section Component’s Symbol .............................. 6-19
Creating and Editing a Component’s Symbol with the Symbol Editor .......... 6-19
Symbol Editor Spreadsheet View..................................................... 6-21
Working with the Symbol Editor ..................................................... 6-23
Enter Text Dialog Box...................................................................... 6-27
In-Place Edit Mode ........................................................................... 6-28
Symbol Editor Menus ....................................................................... 6-28
Symbol Editor Toolbars.................................................................... 6-33
Editing a Component’s Model....................................................................................... 6-39
Adding a Model to a Component ................................................................... 6-41
Component List Dialog Box............................................................. 6-42
Creating a SPICE Model for a Component..................................................... 6-42
Creating a Model Using a Model Maker .......................................... 6-42
Creating a Primitive Model .............................................................. 6-42
Creating a SPICE Subcircuit ........................................................... 6-44

NI Multisim User Manual xii ni.com

Contents

Loading an Existing Model .............................................................................6-45
Modify a Model’s Data ...................................................................................6-46
Copying the Model of One Component to Another .......................................6-46
Analog Behavioral Modeling and Controlled Source Syntax ......................................6-47
Accessing net voltages and branch currents in ABM expressions .................6-47
Editing a Component Pin Model ..................................................................................6-48
Editing a Component’s Footprint .................................................................................6-49
Select a Footprint dialog box ..........................................................................6-49
Filter dialog box ................................................................................6-51
Add a Footprint dialog box..............................................................................6-52
Advanced Pin Mapping Dialog ......................................................................6-53
Editing a Component’s Electronic Parameters ..............................................................6-56
Editing User Fields .......................................................................................................6-56
Creating a Component Model Using the Model Makers ...............................................6-57
AC Motor ........................................................................................................6-57
BJT Model Maker ...........................................................................................6-58
Converters........................................................................................................6-69
Boost Converter ...............................................................................6-70
Buck Boost Converter ......................................................................6-71
Buck Converter ................................................................................6-71
Cuk Converter ..................................................................................6-71
Diode Model Maker .......................................................................................6-72
Transformers....................................................................................................6-75
Ideal Transformer (Multiple Winding) ............................................6-75
Linear Transformer (Multiple Winding) ..........................................6-76
Linear Transformer with Neutral Terminal .....................................6-76
Two Winding Linear Transformer ...................................................6-76
Non-linear Transformer (Multiple Winding) ...................................6-77
MOSFET (Field Effect Transistor) Model Maker ..........................................6-78
Operational Amplifier Model Maker...............................................................6-84
Silicon Controlled Rectifier Model Maker......................................................6-87
Zener Model Maker.........................................................................................6-91
Creating a Model Using Code Modeling ......................................................................6-94
What is Code Modeling? .................................................................................6-94
Creating a Code Model ...................................................................................6-95
The Interface File (Ifspec.ifs) .........................................................................6-99
Name Table .......................................................................................6-99
Port Table..........................................................................................6-101
Parameter Table ................................................................................6-103
Example Interface File ......................................................................6-104
The Implementation File (Cfunc.mod) ...........................................................6-106
Implementation File C Macros .........................................................6-106
Example Implementation File...........................................................6-113

© National Instruments Corporation xiii NI Multisim User Manual

Contents

Chapter 7
Multisim SPICE Reference
Documentation Conventions ........................................................................................ 7-1
General Purpose Syntax ............................................................................................... 7-2
Primitive Device Declarations ....................................................................... 7-2
SPICE Subcircuits .......................................................................................... 7-4
Circuit Parameters .......................................................................................... 7-7
Number Format .............................................................................................. 7-8
Comments and Line Continuation ................................................................. 7-9
Mathematical Expressions ............................................................................................ 7-10
Introduction .................................................................................................... 7-10
Supported Mathematical Functions, Operators and Constants ...................... 7-11
User-Defined Functions ................................................................................. 7-17
Analog Devices ............................................................................................................ 7-18
Resistor ........................................................................................................... 7-19
Capacitor ........................................................................................................ 7-20
Inductor .......................................................................................................... 7-22
Coupled (Mutual) Inductor ............................................................................ 7-23
Diode ............................................................................................................... 7-24
Lossless Transmission Line ............................................................................ 7-26
Lossy Transmission Line ................................................................................ 7-27
Uniform R.C. Line (Lumped-approximation R.C. line) ................................. 7-28
JFET ................................................................................................................ 7-29
MESFET ......................................................................................................... 7-31
Voltage-Controlled Switch ............................................................................ 7-34
Smooth Transition Voltage-Controlled Switch ............................... 7-35
Current-Controlled Switch ............................................................................. 7-36
BJT .................................................................................................................. 7-37
MOSFET......................................................................................................... 7-42
Independent Voltage Source .......................................................................... 7-47
Pulse Source ..................................................................................... 7-50
Sinusoidal Source ............................................................................. 7-51
Single Frequency FM Source ........................................................... 7-51
Exponential Source........................................................................... 7-52
Piecewise Linear Source................................................................... 7-52
Piecewise Linear File Source ........................................................... 7-53
Modulation Source ........................................................................... 7-53
AM Modulation Source .................................................................... 7-54
FM Modulation Source..................................................................... 7-54
FSK Modulation Source ................................................................... 7-55
BST Modulation Source ................................................................... 7-55
SWP Modulation Source .................................................................. 7-56
Noise Source..................................................................................... 7-57

NI Multisim User Manual xiv ni.com

Contents

XARB Source ...................................................................................7-57
Independent Current Source ...........................................................................7-58
Arbitrary Source .............................................................................................7-60
Voltage Controlled Voltage Source ................................................................7-61
Polynomial Specifications.................................................................7-62
Current Controlled Voltage Source ................................................................7-63
Voltage Controlled Current Source ................................................................7-64
Current Controlled Current Source ................................................................7-65
Temperature Parameters ...............................................................................................7-66
Global Temperature Parameters .....................................................................7-66
Instance/Model Temperature Parameters .......................................................7-67
XSPICE Syntax Reference ...........................................................................................7-68
XSPICE Code Model .....................................................................................7-68
Unusual Forms of Device Syntax .................................................................................7-69
Compatibility Modes ....................................................................................................7-70

Chapter 8
Simulation
Introduction to Simulation .............................................................................................8-1
Using Multisim Simulation............................................................................................8-2
Interactive Components ..................................................................................8-3
Component Tolerances in Multisim ...............................................................8-3
Start/Stop/Pause Simulation ............................................................................8-4
Simulation Running Indicator ...........................................................8-5
Simulation Speed ..............................................................................8-5
Circuit Consistency Check ..............................................................................8-6
Simulation from Netlist Without Schematic ...................................................8-6
Multisim SPICE Simulation: Technical Detail..............................................................8-6
Circuit Simulation Mechanism........................................................................8-7
Four Stages of Circuit Simulation ...................................................................8-7
Equation Formulation......................................................................................8-9
Equation Solution ............................................................................................8-10
User Setting: Maximum Integration Order......................................................8-10
DC Convergence Assistance Algorithms ........................................................8-11
Digital Simulation ...........................................................................................8-13
RF Simulation ................................................................................................................8-14
MultiVHDL ...................................................................................................................8-15
Circuit Wizards ..............................................................................................................8-15
555 Timer Wizard............................................................................................8-16
Filter Wizard ...................................................................................................8-18
Common Emitter BJT Amplifier Wizard .......................................................8-20
Op-amp Wizard ..............................................................................................8-21

© National Instruments Corporation xv NI Multisim User Manual

Contents

Netlist and Simulation Errors ....................................................................................... 8-22
Netlist Errors and Warnings ........................................................................... 8-22
Simulation Errors ........................................................................................... 8-24
Simulation Error Log/Audit Trail ................................................................................. 8-24
Simulation Error Help ................................................................................................... 8-26
Convergence Assistant ................................................................................................ 8-26
Saving/Loading Simulation Profiles ............................................................................. 8-27
Saving a Simulation Profile ............................................................................ 8-28
Loading a Simulation Profile .......................................................................... 8-28

Chapter 9
Instruments
Introduction to the Multisim Instruments...................................................................... 9-1
Saving Simulation Data with Instruments ...................................................... 9-2
Adding an Instrument to a Circuit .................................................................. 9-2
Using the Instrument ...................................................................................... 9-3
Working with Multiple Instruments ............................................................... 9-4
Saving Instrument Data................................................................................... 9-4
Printing Instruments ..................................................................................................... 9-5
Interactive Simulation Settings ..................................................................................... 9-5
Troubleshooting Simulation Errors ................................................................ 9-6
Multimeter ..................................................................................................................... 9-7
Multimeter Settings......................................................................................... 9-8
Function Generator ....................................................................................................... 9-11
Function Generator Settings ........................................................................... 9-12
Wattmeter ...................................................................................................................... 9-13
Connecting the Wattmeter .............................................................................. 9-14
Oscilloscope ................................................................................................................. 9-15
Oscilloscope Settings ...................................................................................... 9-16
Viewing Oscilloscope Results ........................................................................ 9-19
Bode Plotter .................................................................................................................. 9-19
Bode Plotter Settings....................................................................................... 9-21
Viewing Bode Plotter Results ......................................................................... 9-22
Word Generator ............................................................................................................ 9-23
Word Generator Settings ................................................................................ 9-24
Logic Analyzer ............................................................................................................. 9-26
Logic Analyzer Settings.................................................................................. 9-28
Logic Converter ............................................................................................................ 9-31
Logic Converter Settings ............................................................................... 9-32
Distortion Analyzer ...................................................................................................... 9-34
Distortion Analyzer Settings ........................................................................... 9-35
Spectrum Analyzer ....................................................................................................... 9-36
Network Analyzer ......................................................................................................... 9-36

NI Multisim User Manual xvi ni.com

Contents

Measurement Probe ......................................................................................................9-37
Measurement Probe Settings ..........................................................................9-37
Dynamic Probe Settings....................................................................9-37
Static Probe Settings ........................................................................9-38
Using the Dynamic Measurement Probe ........................................................9-40
Using the Static Measurement Probe .............................................................9-41
Four-Channel Oscilloscope ...........................................................................................9-43
Four-channel Oscilloscope Settings ................................................................9-44
Viewing Four-channel Oscilloscope Results...................................................9-47
Connecting the Four-channel Oscilloscope.....................................................9-50
Frequency Counter.........................................................................................................9-50
Using the Frequency Counter..........................................................................9-51
IV Analyzer....................................................................................................................9-53
Using the IV Analyzer.....................................................................................9-54
Simulate Parameters Dialog Box .....................................................9-57
Reviewing IV Analyzer Data ..........................................................................9-61
Agilent Simulated Instruments ......................................................................................9-63
Agilent Simulated Function Generator............................................................9-63
Supported Features............................................................................9-63
Features Not Supported.....................................................................9-64
Using the Agilent Function Generator .............................................9-64
Agilent Simulated Multimeter.........................................................................9-65
Supported Features............................................................................9-65
Features Not Supported.....................................................................9-65
Using the Agilent Multimeter ...........................................................9-66
Agilent Simulated Oscilloscope ......................................................................9-66
Supported Features............................................................................9-66
Features Not Supported.....................................................................9-68
Using the Agilent Oscilloscope ........................................................9-68
Tektronix Simulated Instruments ..................................................................................9-69
Tektronix Simulated Oscilloscope .................................................................9-69
Supported Features............................................................................9-69
Features Not Supported.....................................................................9-71
Using the Tektronix Oscilloscope.....................................................9-72
Voltmeter ......................................................................................................................9-72
Using the Voltmeter ........................................................................................9-72
Ammeter .......................................................................................................................9-73
Using the Ammeter .........................................................................................9-74
Current Probe ................................................................................................................9-74
Current Probe Properties ................................................................................9-75
LabVIEW Instruments ..................................................................................................9-78
System Requirements .....................................................................................9-79
Sample LabVIEW Instruments .......................................................................9-80
Microphone ......................................................................................9-80
Speaker .............................................................................................9-81

© National Instruments Corporation xvii NI Multisim User Manual

.............................................................................................................. 10-24 Selecting Variables to Save ...................................................... 10-23 Filtering the Variable Lists ..... 10-22 Output Tab .............................................................. 9-83 Building a LabVIEW Instrument ..................... 10-15 Cut...... 10-11 Axes ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10-19 Adding Traces from the Latest Simulation Results ................................................................................................................ 10-28 Summary Tab ................................................................................ 9-86 Guidelines for Successfully Creating a LabVIEW Instrument ................................................. 9-81 Signal Generator .................................................... 10-2 Working with Pages on the Grapher ........................................................................... 10-16 Opening Files ........................ 10-7 Cursors ................. 10-7 Grids and Legends ........................................... 10-13 Merging Traces .............................................. 10-23 Choosing How to Handle Output Variables ............. 10-11 Title .............................. 10-20 Working with Analyses ................................................................................ 10-17 Saving Files................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-29 NI Multisim User Manual xviii ni..........................................................................................................................................................................com ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-14 Select Pages dialog box .................................................................................................................... 9-82 LabVIEW Instruments Toolbar ......................................... 10-24 Adding Parameters to the Variable List ...........................................................................................................................Contents Signal Analyzer ..................... 10-12 Traces ............. 10-25 Adding Analysis Expressions .......... 9-83 Creating a LabVIEW Instrument ........ 9-82 Streaming Signal Generator ......................................... 10-26 Analysis Options Tab ............................... 10-15 Viewing Charts .............................................................................................................................................. 9-86 Installing a LabVIEW Instrument.......... Copy and Paste ... 10-29 Incomplete Analyses .......................... 10-6 Working with Graphs .... 10-21 General Instructions ......... 10-14 Graph Pop-up Menu ......... 9-86 Chapter 10 Analyses Introduction to Multisim Analyses ....................................................................................................... 10-1 Viewing the Analysis Results: Grapher .............................................. 10-22 Analysis Parameters Tab ............................................................................... 10-10 Zoom and Restore................ 10-17 Print and Print Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 10-8 Cursor Pop-up Menu ....................

..................................................................10-48 Distortion Analysis .....................................................10-51 Understanding the Distortion Analysis Options .10-32 Circuit Failure Example .......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-30 Sample Circuit ...............................10-51 Preparing the Circuit for Distortion Analysis ................................10-62 Sensitivity Analysis Parameters ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-59 DC and AC Sensitivity Analyses .......................10-77 Examples of Transfer Function Analysis .............................10-90 Setting Pole Zero Analysis Parameters ...............10-31 Troubleshooting DC Operating Point Analysis Failures..........10-30 Setting DC Operating Point Analysis Parameters ...........................10-70 Temperature Sweep Analysis .........................................................................10-44 Setting Noise Analysis Parameters................................10-52 Distortion Analysis for Harmonic Distortion ................................................................................................10-74 Setting Temperature Sweep Analysis Parameters ..10-55 DC Sweep Analysis ......................................... Contents DC Operating Point Analysis ........10-45 Noise Analysis Example...............................................................10-83 Setting Worst Case Analysis Parameters ..................10-84 Worst Case Analysis Example ...........10-37 Setting Transient Analysis Parameters ..................................10-38 Troubleshooting Transient Analysis Failures ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-30 Setting up and Running DC Operating Point Analysis .............................................................................................................................10-36 Transient Analysis ......................................................10-82 Setting Tolerance Parameters ..............10-40 Setting Fourier Analysis Parameters ..........................................................................10-53 Distortion Analysis for Intermodulation Distortion ................................................................................................................................................................................10-57 DC Sweep Analysis Examples ................10-87 Multisim Approach........10-91 © National Instruments Corporation xix NI Multisim User Manual ......................................................10-40 Fourier Analysis....10-33 Trouble-shooting Techniques .........................................................................................................................................................10-79 Worst Case Analysis ...................................................................................10-75 Transfer Function Analysis..........................................................................................................................................................................10-64 Parameter Sweep Analysis..........................................................................................10-76 Setting Transfer Function Analysis Parameters ....................................10-41 Noise Analysis .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-34 AC Analysis .............10-57 Setting DC Sweep Analysis Parameters..................................................................................................................................................10-62 Setting Up and Running Sensitivity Analysis ..................................................10-67 Parameter Sweep Analysis – Example .10-67 Setting Parameter Sweep Analysis Parameters ...........................................................................................................10-85 Pole Zero Analysis .................................10-35 Setting AC Analysis Frequency Parameters ...........10-50 Multisim Approach....................................................................................

............................................................................................................. 10-117 Custom Analysis Options Dialog Box .......................................... 10-115 Importing the SPICE netlist into Multisim ... 10-122 Device Tab .............................. 10-96 Entering a Component Tolerance ................ 10-109 Sample Trace Width Analysis..................................................................................................................................... 11-7 Creating Multiple Traces ................................................................................................................................................. 10-112 Nested Sweep Analyses ................................................................................................................................. 10-96 Specifying Monte Carlo Analysis Parameters ........................ 10-99 Setting up the Sample Monte Carlo Analysis ................................................................... 10-125 Chapter 11 Postprocessor Introduction to the Postprocessor ............................ 10-93 Uniform Distribution...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-9 Available Postprocessor Functions ..................................................................................................... 11-8 Working with Pages....................................................... 10-118 DC Tab ........ 10-117 Global Tab ................................... 10-120 Transient Tab .................................................................. 10-92 Monte Carlo Analysis .............. 10-94 Setting Up and Running Monte Carlo Analysis .......................... 11-2 Basic Steps ......................................................................... 11-9 NI Multisim User Manual xx ni............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10-104 Trace Width Analysis .................................................. 10-113 User Defined Analyses .................. 10-124 Advanced Tab .......... 11-8 Postprocessor Variables............................ 11-1 Using the Postprocessor ......................com .............................................................................................................................................................Contents Running Pole Zero Analysis ... Graphs and Charts ............................ 10-115 Creating and Simulating a SPICE Netlist ............................................................................................................................ 10-97 Monte Carlo Analysis Example ............................................................................... 11-2 Using the Default Analysis.............................................. 10-116 Plotting Two Nodes Using the Tran Statement ........................ Traces..................... 10-100 Simulation Results ................................................... 10-113 Batched Analyses ..................................................................................................................................................... 10-94 Gaussian Distribution........................................... 10-107 Multisim Approach ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10-111 RF Analyses............................................................

.........12-9 Model Data Report ................13-9 Importing a SPICE or Cadence® PSpice® Netlist .........................................................................13-1 Transferring from Multisim to Ultiboard for PCB Layout...................................................................................12-9 Using the Spare Gates Report...............................................................................................................................................................................................................12-5 Using the Component Detail Report ......13-3 Forward Annotation ................12-11 Variants Filter Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................................................................13-8 Opening an Electronics Workbench 5 File ................................12-5 Netlist Report .........................................................................................................................................13-10 © National Instruments Corporation xxi NI Multisim User Manual .................................................13-1 Exporting to PCB layout ...............................................................................12-6 Using the Netlist Report ...........................................12-6 Schematic Statistics Report .................................................................................................... Contents Chapter 12 Reports Bill of Materials .................................................................................................................................................13-5 Exporting Simulation Results .....................................................................................................13-2 Transfering to Other PCB Layout Packages ..........................................................................................................................................................................13-6 Saving to a Measurement File ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................12-10 Cross Reference Report ..............................................................................................13-4 Back Annotation .......................12-12 Chapter 13 Transfer/Communication Introduction to Transfer/Communication .......................13-8 Importing Files with Other Formats ............................................................12-10 Using the Model Data Report...............................................12-3 Component Detail Report ......................................................12-1 Using the BOM Report.....13-5 Exporting to Excel..................................................................................................................13-5 Exporting to MathCAD ........................12-8 Spare Gates Report ...................................13-7 Exporting a Netlist ...........................12-11 Using the Cross Reference Report ...12-7 Using the Schematic Statistics Report.......................................................................................................................13-9 Opening an Ulticap File .............................................

......................................... 14-37 Stripline Bend .................................................................................................................................................................... 14-17 Marker Controls................................................ 14-36 Strip Line Model .................................. 14-13 Frequency Resolution ......................................................Contents Chapter 14 RF Introduction to the Multisim RF Module ...................... 14-31 Noise Figure Analysis Tabs......................................................................................................................................................................... 14-11 Amplitude Range .................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-32 RF Model Makers.......... 14-1 RF Components ............................ 14-23 Noise Figure Analysis ............................................................ 14-9 Using Multisim’s Spectrum Analyzer ............................................................................... 14-19 Format Controls ......... 14-28 Multisim Approach ...................................................... 14-36 RF Spiral Inductor..................................................................................................................................... 14-33 Waveguide ........................ 14-12 Reference Level ............................................................................................................................................................. 14-13 Examples ....... 14-6 RF Inductors ............................com ........................................ 14-19 Data Controls .............................................. 14-2 Multisim’s RF Components ......................................................................................................... 14-11 Frequency Spans................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-38 NI Multisim User Manual xxii ni........... 14-14 Network Analyzer ...................................................................................................... 14-34 Microstrip Line ........................................................................................................ 14-17 Using the Network Analyzer ............................................ 14-20 Matching Network Analysis ............................................................ 14-20 RF Analyses .... 14-11 Frequency Analysis . 14-35 Open End Microstrip Line ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-9 Spectrum Analyzer ........................................................................................ 14-8 RF Instruments ............. 14-10 Frequency Range ...................................... 14-3 Theoretical Explanation of the RF Models ............................................... 14-20 RF Characterizer Analysis ........................................ 14-18 Trace Controls ....................................... 14-7 Devices ................................................................................................................................................................ 14-19 Mode Controls .................. 14-3 Striplines/Microstrips/Waveguides ............................................................. 14-31 Sample Noise Figure Analysis ..................... 14-5 RF Capacitors ......................................................................................... 14-3 RF Resistors...............................................

..................................................15-10 MCU Project Build Settings .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................15-26 Definitions ............14-42 Selecting a DC Operating Point ....................................................... Folders and Files in the MCU Code Manager .................15-24 Source Code View.....................................................................15-8 MCU Code Manager Overview ................................15-21 Multisim MCU Source Code Editor .15-20 Errors and Warnings ..................................................................................15-1 Debugging Tools ...............................................................15-11 Documentation for Supported Tools ...........................................15-25 MCU Debugging Features ...14-45 Chapter 15 Multisim MCU Introduction to Multisim MCU .......14-45 Analyzing the RF Network ...........................................................15-12 8051 Workspace Build Settings Example.............................................................................................................................................................14-43 Selecting an Operating Frequency Point ....................................14-39 Interdigital Capacitor ....14-43 Selecting the Biasing Network ...............15-4 MCU Wizard ................15-19 Building an MCU Workspace .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................15-3 Advanced Features .............................................................................................................................................................................15-8 Adding and Removing Projects.....................................................................................................................................................................................................14-41 Selecting Type of RF Amplifier ............15-1 Multisim MCU Basics.........................................................................15-3 Peripheral Devices................................15-7 Multisim MCU Code Manager ........................15-27 MCU Toolbar Buttons ................................15-13 Loading an External Hex File Project .............................15-5 Adding and Removing Projects....................................15-24 Opening a Source Code File ..........................15-26 Debug Window Settings ........................................................................15-2 MCU Memory View....................15-28 © National Instruments Corporation xxiii NI Multisim User Manual ............................................ Folders and Files ..................................................................................................................................................................................15-26 Opening a Debug View ......................15-24 Building Source Code Files ............................................................................................................15-21 Simulation of Machine Code File ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................14-42 Selecting an RF Transistor .......................................15-3 Multisim MCU File Management ...............................................................................................................................................14-40 Tutorial: Designing RF Circuits ............................................................................................................................................................ Contents Lossy Line ......15-2 MCU Source Code Editor .............................15-4 MCU Design Overview ......................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................com ........................................................ 15-29 Stepping and Breaking ......................................................................... A-9 MCU Menu ..............Contents Simulation Markers . 15-29 Breakpoints ........ B-1 Backing up the User Database and Configuration Files ..... A-11 Simulate Menu .................. A-22 Options Menu ..................................................................................................... 15-32 Chapter 16 Automation API Appendix A Menus and Commands File Menu........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ A-23 Help Menu .............................................................................................. A-19 Reports Menu .......... B-2 Appendix C Technical Support and Professional Services Index NI Multisim User Manual xxiv ni.. A-24 Appendix B Archiving Data Backing up the Corporate Database ................................................. A-23 Window Menu .............................................. A-6 Place Menu .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-31 Memory View ............. A-1 Edit Menu ............................................................. A-18 Tools Menu .............................................................................................................. A-11 Transfer Menu .................................................................................................................................................................................... A-4 View Menu ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

refer to the Getting Started with NI Circuit Design Suite manual. simulation. Note For more information on the Multisim interface. Multisim is designed for schematic entry. Toolbars The toolbars listed below are available in Multisim: • Standard Toolbar • Main Toolbar • Simulation Toolbar • View Toolbar • Components Toolbar • Virtual Toolbar • Graphic Annotation Toolbar • Instruments Toolbar Note If the above toolbars are not visible. © National Instruments Corporation 1-1 NI Multisim User Manual . Introduction to the Multisim Interface Multisim is the schematic capture and simulation application of National Instruments Circuit Design Suite. and feeding to downstage steps. and information on the other components of NI Circuit Design Suite. a suite of EDA (Electronics Design Automation) tools that assists you in carrying out the major steps in the circuit design flow.User Interface 1 This chapter explains the basic operation of the Multisim user interface. select View»Toolbars»<toolbar name>. such as PCB layout. Refer to the release notes for a list of the features in your edition. Some of the features described in this chapter may not be available in your edition of Multisim.

Opens an existing circuit file. Previews the circuit as it will be printed. Open button. Creates a new circuit file. Undoes the most recently performed action. Redoes the most recently performed undo. Print Preview button. Print Circuit button. Open Sample button. Copy button. Inserts the contents of the Windows clipboard at the cursor location. Redo button. Paste button.com . Cut button. Opens a folder containing sample and getting started files. Its buttons are described below: Button Description New button. Undo button. Save button. Prints the active circuit.Chapter 1 User Interface Standard Toolbar The Standard toolbar contains buttons for commonly performed functions. Copies the selected elements and places them on the Windows clipboard. Saves the active circuit. Removes the selected elements and places them on the Windows clipboard. NI Multisim User Manual 1-2 ni.

Component Editing. Refer to the Capturing Screen Area section of Chapter 2. Displays the Postprocessor dialog box. Refer to the Spreadsheet View section of Chapter 3. Switches the Design Toolbox on and off. Postprocessor button. Refer to the Working with Analyses section of Chapter 10. Schematic Capture - Advanced Functions. Refer to the Viewing the Analysis Results: Grapher section of Chapter 10. for more information. Also displays a list of available analyses. for more information. Chapter 1 User Interface Main Toolbar The buttons in the Main toolbar are described below: Button Description Toggle Design Toolbox button. Analyses. User Interface. Toggle Spreadsheet View button. Grapher/Analyses button. Capture Screen Area button. Analyses. Refer to the Creating Components with the Component Wizard section of Chapter 6. for more information. for more information. Component Editing. Refer to the Design Toolbox section for more information. for more information. Checks that the electrical rules established for the wiring of the circuit have been followed. Launches the Database Manager dialog box. Launches the Component Wizard. Refer to the Editing Components section of Chapter 6. Displays the grapher. Postprocessor. Database Manager button. Electrical Rules Checking button. for more information. Create Component button. © National Instruments Corporation 1-3 NI Multisim User Manual . Refer to the Electrical Rules Checking section of Chapter 3. Refer to the Using the Postprocessor section of Chapter 11. for more details. Switches the Spreadsheet View on and off. for more information. Schematic Capture - Basics.

NI Multisim User Manual 1-4 ni. Refer to the Back Annotation section of Chapter 13. Pauses simulation.com . Refer to the Start/Stop/Pause Simulation section of Chapter 8. Simulation. for more information. Simulation. for more information. for more details. Simulation Toolbar The Simulation toolbar contains buttons used during simulation. Transfer/Communication. In Use List (not shown).Basics. Displays the top level sheet in a hierarchical design. Refer to the Hierarchical Design and Viewing a Parent Sheet sections of Chapter 4. Help button. Forward Annotate button. for more details. Transfer/Communication. Refer to the Start/Stop/Pause Simulation section of Chapter 8. Refer to — the Using the In Use List section of Chapter 2. Back Annotate from Ultiboard button. Launches the help file. Simulation. Pause at Next MCU Instruction Boundary button. for more information.Chapter 1 User Interface Button Description Go to Parent Sheet button. Button Description Run/resume simulation button. Stop simulation button. Working with Larger Designs. Stops the simulation. Schematic Capture . Pause simulation button. Click on the down-arrow to display a list of the active circuit’s components. for more information. Refer to the Start/Stop/Pause Simulation section of Chapter 8. Refer to the Forward Annotation section of Chapter 13. Starts/resumes simulation of the active circuit. Refer to the Stepping and Breaking section for more information. for more information.

Refer to the Stepping and Breaking section for more information. Refer to the Stepping and Breaking section for more information. Increase Zoom button. Magnifies the active circuit. Refer to the Stepping and Breaking section for more information. Step Out button. Refer to the Stepping and Breaking section for more information. Step Over button. Decrease Zoom button. View Toolbar The buttons in the View toolbar are described below: Button Description Toggle Full Screen button. © National Instruments Corporation 1-5 NI Multisim User Manual . Zoom Fit to Page button. Displays only the workspace. Remove All Breakpoints button. Refer to the Breakpoints section for more information. Chapter 1 User Interface Button Description Step Into button. with no toolbars or menu items. Drag the cursor to select an area on the workspace to magnify. Run to Cursor button. Decreases the magnification of the active circuit. Toggle Breakpoint button. Refer to the Breakpoints section for more information. Shows the entire circuit in the workspace. Zoom to Selected Area button.

Selects the Power component group in the browser. Each button will launch the place component browser (Select a Component browser) with the group specified on the button pre-selected. Selects the Diode components group in the browser. Place Transistor button. Place Analog button. NI Multisim User Manual 1-6 ni. Selects the TTL components group in the browser. Place Basic button.Chapter 1 User Interface Components Toolbar The buttons in the Components toolbar are described below. Selects the Source components group in the browser. Selects the Miscellaneous Digital component group in the browser. Button Description Place Source button. Selects the Basic components group in the browser. Place Miscellaneous Digital button. Selects the Analog components group in the browser. Place Diode button. Selects the CMOS component group in the browser. Place TTL button. Place Power Components button. Place Mixed button. Place Indicator button. Selects the Transistor components group in the browser. Selects the Mixed component group in the browser. Place CMOS button.com . Selects the Indicator component group in the browser. Refer to the Using the Place Component Browser section for more information.

Selects the RF component group in the browser. Places a bus with segments created as you click on the workspace. Schematic Capture . Working with Larger Designs. Place Hierarchical Block button. Virtual Toolbar Use the Virtual toolbar to place virtual components on your workspace. Selects the Electromechanical component group in the browser. for more information. Opens a file to be embedded as a hierarchical block. Refer to the Placing Virtual Components section of Chapter 2. Graphic Annotation Toolbar The buttons in the Graphic Annotation toolbar are described below. Place Advanced Peripherals button. Schematic Capture - Basics. Selects the MCU component group in the browser. Selects the Miscellaneous component group in the browser. Refer to the Buses section of Chapter 4. Place Electromechanical button. Chapter 1 User Interface Button Description Place Miscellaneous button. © National Instruments Corporation 1-7 NI Multisim User Manual . Refer to the Graphic Annotation section of Chapter 2.Basics. Place Bus button. Working with Larger Designs. Place MCU button. Refer to the Hierarchical Design section of Chapter 4. for more information. for more information. for more information. Place RF button. Selects the Advanced Peripherals component group in the browser.

Ellipse button. the button places a specific instrument on the workspace. Refer to the Adding Miscellaneous Text section of Chapter 2. Multiline button.Basics. . Schematic Capture - Basics. Click on this button to draw an ellipse. Schematic Capture . Click on this button to draw an arc. Click on this button to draw a line. Click on this button to draw a polygon.com . In each case. for more information.Chapter 1 User Interface Button Description Picture button. Click on this button to draw a rectangle. for more information. Places a text frame on your workspace into which you can enter miscellaneous text. Instruments Toolbar The buttons in the Instruments toolbar are described below. Rectangle button. Refer to the Adding a Comment section of Chapter 2. Place Comment button. Click on this button to draw a multiline. Some versions of Multisim do not include all of the instruments described below. Click on this button to place a picture on the workspace. Click on this button to place a comment on the workspace. NI Multisim User Manual 1-8 ni. Polygon button. Line button. Place Text button. Arc button.

for more information. Places a Bode plotter on the workspace. Refer to the Function Generator section of Chapter 9. Instruments. for more information. Function Generator button. for more information. Wattmeter button. Places a frequency counter on the workspace. Logic Converter button. Refer to the Multimeter section of Chapter 9. Refer to the Logic Analyzer section of Chapter 9. Places a word generator on the workspace. for more information. Places a four-channel oscilloscope on the workspace. Logic Analyzer button. Refer to the Oscilloscope section of Chapter 9. Refer to the Four-Channel Oscilloscope section of Chapter 9. Places a function generator on the workspace. for more information. Refer to the IV Analyzer section of Chapter 9. for more information. Oscilloscope button. Instruments. Places an IV Analyser on the workspace. Bode Plotter button. Instruments. Instruments. Instruments. Places a logic converter on the workspace. Refer to the Logic Converter section of Chapter 9. Places an oscilloscope on the workspace. for more information. Instruments. Refer to the Bode Plotter section of Chapter 9. Instruments. © National Instruments Corporation 1-9 NI Multisim User Manual . for more information. Refer to the Wattmeter section of Chapter 9. Chapter 1 User Interface Button Description Multimeter button. Places a logic analyzer on the workspace. for more information. Refer to the Frequency Counter section of Chapter 9. for more information. Places a wattmeter on the workspace. Instruments. Refer to the Word Generator section of Chapter 9. for more information. Instruments. Instruments. Instruments. Frequency Counter button. Places a multimeter on the workspace. Word Generator button. Four Channel Oscilloscope button. IV-Analysis button.

Agilent Oscilloscope button. Refer to the Distortion Analyzer section of Chapter 9. for more information. Refer to the Agilent Simulated Multimeter section of Chapter 9. Instruments. Spectrum Analyzer button. Network Analyzer button. Places a distortion analyzer on the workspace. Refer to the Network Analyzer section of Chapter 9. Places a current probe on the workspace. for more information. Places an Agilent multimeter on the workspace. Agilent Multimeter button. Instruments. Instruments. Places an Agilent function generator on the workspace. for more details. Places a network analyzer on the workspace. Current Probe button. Places a Tektronix oscilloscope on the workspace. for more information. for more information. Tektronix Oscilloscope button. Refer to the Agilent Simulated Oscilloscope section of Chapter 9. Instruments.com . for more information. Refer to the Spectrum Analyzer section of Chapter 9. Instruments. Refer to the Tektronix Simulated Oscilloscope section of Chapter 9. for more information. Places a spectrum analyzer on the workspace. Agilent Function Generator button. for more information. Instruments. NI Multisim User Manual 1-10 ni. Refer to the Current Probe section of Chapter 9. Places an Agilent oscilloscope on the workspace. Refer to the Agilent Simulated Function Generator section of Chapter 9. Instruments. Instruments.Chapter 1 User Interface Button Description Distortion Analyzer button.

Attaches a probe to the mouse pointer that measures voltage. for more information. Refer to the LabVIEW Instruments section of Chapter 9. the drag bars on all docked toolbars display. Instruments. Chapter 1 User Interface Button Description LabVIEW Instruments button. • Right-click in any toolbar and select Lock Toolbars from the pop-up menu that appears. Instruments. as shown in the figure below (1). hold down <Alt> and drag the toolbar with your mouse. Tip To drag a docked toolbar to a different location when Lock Toolbars is enabled. you can lock all docked toolbars in place in different ways: • Select Options»Lock Toolbars. for more information. Use the arrow to place static probes. When Lock Toolbars is disabled. Measurement Probe button. Note If the Lock Toolbars option is enabled. current and frequency on any wire on your schematic. or during simulation (dynamic probe). Places a LabVIEW instrument on the workspace. Once you have placed them as you like. Grab the toolbar by the drag bar to move it. Locking Toolbars You can lock toolbars in place to prevent them from being inadvertently moved. Can be placed before simulation (static probe). Refer to the Toolbars tab section for more information. • Enable Lock all docked toolbars from the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box. Refer to the Measurement Probe section of Chapter 9. © National Instruments Corporation 1-11 NI Multisim User Manual . floating toolbars will be locked in place if you move them to a docked position.

File. Tip You can make your own toolbars and add or delete buttons from existing toolbars to get everything to fit. 1 More Buttons Icon Click the More Buttons icon to display the hidden buttons. Pop-up From Circuit Window.Chapter 1 User Interface 1 Drag Bar Note If the Lock Toolbars option is enabled. the drag bars do not appear. some of the buttons in larger toolbars may become hidden. These commands are: • Place Component—Lets you browse the databases (Master.Basics. there are also a number of context-sensitive pop-up menus available. with no Component Selected When you right-click on the circuit window with no component selected. Pop-up Menus In addition to the standard menus at the top of the screen (for example. Schematic Capture . a pop-up menu of appropriate commands appears. Refer to the Toolbars tab section for more information. Toolbar Behavior When Multisim Size is Reduced If you reduce the size of Multisim. the More Buttons icon appears as shown in the figure below (1). If this happens. To show these. Corporate and User) for components to be placed. Corporate and User) for components to be placed.com . Refer to the Using the Place Component Browser section of Chapter 2. make Multisim large enough to show all toolbar buttons without the More Buttons icon. Refer to NI Multisim User Manual 1-12 ni. Note Text boxes and drop-down lists do not display when Multisim’s size is reduced. for more information. • Place Schematic»Component—Lets you browse the databases (Master. Edit).

for more information. for more information. • Place Schematic»Bus HB/SC Connector—Adds bus connectors to a circuit for use in a hierarchical block or a subcircuit. • Place Schematic»Merge Bus—Merges selected buses. Refer to the Adding a Hierarchical Block section of Chapter 4. for more information. Refer to the Flat Multi-Sheet Design section of Chapter 4. • Place Schematic»Replace by Subcircuit—Replaces the selection by a subcircuit. Refer to the Buses section of Chapter 4. • Place Schematic»New Subcircuit—Places a new subcircuit on the workspace. Refer to the Placing Wires Directly Onto Workspace section of Chapter 2. Chapter 1 User Interface the Using the Place Component Browser section of Chapter 2. Schematic Capture . for more information.Basics. Refer to the Manually Adding a Junction section of Chapter 2. Working with Larger Designs. • Place Schematic»Junction—Places a connector. • Place Schematic»Bus Off-Page Connector—Places an off-page connector for use with buses only on your workspace. Refer to the Placing a HB from an Existing File section of Chapter 4. Working with Larger Designs. • Place Schematic»New Hierarchical Block—Displays the Hierarchical Block Properties dialog box. • Place Schematic»HB/SC Connector—Adds connectors to a circuit for use in a hierarchical block or a subcircuit. • Place Schematic»Wire—Use to place a wire on the workspace. for more information.Basics. Refer to the Flat Multi-Sheet Design section of Chapter 4.Basics. Working with Larger Designs. • Place Schematic»Off-Page Connector—Places an off-page connector on your workspace. for more information. Working with Larger Designs. © National Instruments Corporation 1-13 NI Multisim User Manual . Working with Larger Designs. • Place Schematic»Hierarchical Block from File—Opens a file to be embedded as a hierarchical block. Schematic Capture . • Place Schematic»Bus—Places a bus with segments created as you click. for more information. Working with Larger Designs. Refer to the Adding a Subcircuit section of Chapter 4. • Place Schematic»Multi-Page—Opens a new page. Schematic Capture . for more information. for more information.

for more information.com . • Select All—Selects all elements on the workspace. Refer to the Graphic Annotation section of Chapter 2. such as an IC. to a bus. • Place Graphic»Polygon—Places a polygon on your workspace. Refer to the Graphic Annotation section of Chapter 2. Refer to the Adding Miscellaneous Text section of Chapter 2. Schematic Capture - Basics. Refer to the Adding a Comment section of Chapter 2. Refer to the Graphic Annotation section of Chapter 2.Chapter 1 User Interface • Place Schematic»Bus Vector Connect—Use to place numerous connections from a multi-pinned device. • Place Graphic»Ellipse—Places an ellipse on your workspace. • Paste—Pastes the current contents of the clipboard onto the circuit. Schematic Capture . for more information.Basics. Refer to the Graphic Annotation section of Chapter 2. or directly to a component. • Place Graphic»Picture—Places a picture on your workspace. • Copy—Copies the selected item from the circuit to the clipboard.Basics. Schematic Capture . Schematic Capture - Basics. • Place Graphic»Rectangle—Places a rectangle on your workspace.Basics. for more information. • Place Graphic»Text—Places text on the circuit. • Place Graphic»Arc—Places an arc on your workspace. Schematic Capture . Refer to the Graphic Annotation section of Chapter 2. for more information. • Place Graphic»Line—Places a straight line on your workspace. for more information. Schematic Capture . for more information. • Cut—Removes the selected item from the circuit and places it on the clipboard. • Place Comment—Use to “pin” a comment to the workspace. for more information.Basics. for more information. • Delete—Deletes the selection from the workspace. • Toggle NC Marker—Places an NC (no connection) marker on a component’s pin.Basics. for more information.Basics. NI Multisim User Manual 1-14 ni. Schematic Capture .Basics. • Place Graphic»Multiline—Places a multiline on your workspace. Refer to the Bus Vector Connect section of Chapter 4. Schematic Capture . for more information. Schematic Capture . Refer to the Graphic Annotation section for more information. Working with Larger Designs. Refer to the Graphic Annotation section of Chapter 2. Refer to the Marking Pins for No Connection section of Chapter 2.

• Font—Displays a dialog box where you set font information for the circuit. circuits or text. Working with Larger Designs. Schematic Capture . Refer to the Rotating/Flipping Placed Components section of Chapter 2. Be sure that you have no elements on the workspace selected. The cursor shows a “ghosted” image of the item to be pasted. Schematic Capture . and places them on the clipboard. a pop-up menu of appropriate commands appears. • Replace by Subcircuit—Replaces the elements that you have selected with a subcircuit.Basics. for more information.Basics. for more information. • Paste as Subcircuit—Pastes the contents of the clipboard onto the workspace as a subcircuit. • Flip Vertical—Flips the selection vertically.Basics. • Copy—Copies the selected components. • 90 Clockwise—Rotates the selection 90 degrees clockwise. Schematic Capture . for more information. for more information. Refer to the Sheet Properties .Advanced Functions. circuits or text. Schematic Capture . and places them on the clipboard. • Flip Horizontal —Flips the selection horizontally. • Paste—Places the contents of the clipboard on the workspace. Click to indicate where the item is to be pasted. Refer to the Hierarchical Design section of Chapter 4. • Properties—Displays the Sheet Properties dialog box. Schematic Capture . • Delete—Deletes the selection from the workspace. for more information. Refer to the Rotating/Flipping Placed Components section of Chapter 2. Chapter 1 User Interface • Clear ERC Markers—Clears existing ERC (electrical rules check) markers from the workspace.Font Tab section for more information. Refer to the ERC Options Tab section of Chapter 3. Refer to the Copying a Placed Component section of Chapter 2. Refer to the Using the Sheet Properties Dialog Box section for more information. or the properties for that element will appear instead. © National Instruments Corporation 1-15 NI Multisim User Manual . for more information.Basics. Refer to the Rotating/Flipping Placed Components section of Chapter 2. These commands are: • Cut—Removes the selected components. Pop-up From a Selected Component or Instrument When you right-click on a selected element (component or instrument).

NI Multisim User Manual 1-16 ni. • Replace Components—Invokes the Select a Component browser from which you can select a new component. • Replace by Subcircuit—Replaces the elements that you have selected with a subcircuit. Refer to the Rotating/Flipping Placed Components section of Chapter 2. • Save Component to DB—Lets you save the selected component. If an instrument is selected. • Reverse Probe Direction—Reverses the polarity of a selected Measurement Probe or Current Probe. Schematic Capture . Refer to the Hierarchical Design section of Chapter 4.Chapter 1 User Interface • 90 CounterCW—Rotates the selection 90 degrees counterclockwise.Basics. for more information. • Bus Vector Connect—Displays the Bus Vector Connect dialog box. Refer to the Replacing Components with an HB section for more information. to the database. • Font—Changes the font of various elements on the workspace from their default values. Refer to the Bus Vector Connect section for more information. opens the instrument face. • Edit Symbol/Title Block—Depending on the selected item. including any changes you made to it. Schematic Capture .Font Tab section for more information. launches either the Symbol Editor or the Title Block Editor. for more information.com . • Properties—If a component is selected. for more information. displays that component’s properties dialog box. Working with Larger Designs. Refer to the Replacing a Placed Component section of Chapter 2. Components. Refer to the Sheet Properties . • Change Color—Displays a color palette where you can change the color of the selected element’s lines. for more information. • Replace by Hierarchical Block—Replaces the elements that you have selected with a hierarchical block. Refer to the Saving Placed Components section of Chapter 5.Basics.

a pop-up menu of appropriate commands appears. • Font—Changes the font of various elements on the workspace from their default values. Refer to the Rotating/Flipping Placed Components section of Chapter 2. Refer to the Rotating/Flipping Placed Components section of Chapter 2.Basics. Pop-up From a Selected Text Block or Graphic When you right-click on a selected text block or graphic element in the circuit window. Schematic Capture . for more information.Basics. for more information. for more information. Schematic Capture . for more information. • Change Color—Changes the color of the selected wire from its default value. • Flip Horizontal—Flips the selection horizontally. • Flip Vertical—Flips the selection vertically. • 90 Clockwise—Rotates the selection 90 degrees clockwise. These commands are: • Delete—Deletes the selected wire from the workspace. © National Instruments Corporation 1-17 NI Multisim User Manual . Refer to the Modifying Net Names section of Chapter 2. for more information.Basics. Refer to the Rotating/Flipping Placed Components section of Chapter 2. Chapter 1 User Interface Pop-up From a Selected Wire When you right-click on a selected wire in the circuit window. Refer to the Rotating/Flipping Placed Components section of Chapter 2.Basics. These commands are: • Delete—Deletes the selected item. Schematic Capture .Font Tab section for more information. Is disabled if text is selected. a pop-up menu of appropriate commands appears. Schematic Capture . Schematic Capture . • Properties—Displays the Net dialog box. Refer to the Sheet Properties . • 90 CounterCW—Rotates the selection 90 degrees counterclockwise. • Pen Style—Changes the style of the pen for a selected graphic.Basics. • Pen Color—Changes the color of the selected item from its default value. • Color Segment—Changes the color of the selected wire segment from its default value.

or text is selected. for more information. ellipses and polygons. Schematic Capture . Deselect to remove an element from the assigned layer. or text is selected. • Fill Type—Changes the appearance of the fill for selected rectangles. • Move to»Bottom Right—Places the selected title block at the bottom right corner of the document. • Order—Use to Bring to Front or Send to Back the selected element. Pop-up From a Title Block When you right-click on a selected title block in the circuit window. Is disabled if any other graphic element. ellipses and polygons. • Move to»Bottom Left—Places the selected title block at the bottom left corner of the document. Refer to the Title Block Editor section of Chapter 3. • Move to»Top Right—Places the selected title block at the top right corner of the document.com . Refer to the Entering the Title Block Contents section of Chapter 2. • Edit Symbol/Title Block—Launches the Title Block Editor. font style and size for selected text. • Properties—Is inactive for text blocks or graphics. or text is selected. These commands are: • Delete—Deletes the selected title block. • Assign to Layer—Places selected element on the selected layer.Basics. • Change Color—Displays a palette where you can change the selection’s color. • Font—Lets you select a font. NI Multisim User Manual 1-18 ni. Schematic Capture - Advanced Functions. Is disabled if any other graphic element. for more information. Refer to the Sheet Properties .Visibility Tab section for more information. • Move to»Top Left—Places the selected title block at the top left corner of the document. • Properties—Lets you change the information that you see in the title block. Is disabled if any other graphic element. a pop-up menu of appropriate commands appears. • Arrow—Places an arrow on selected lines and multilines.Chapter 1 User Interface • Fill Color—Changes the color of the fill for selected rectangles.

Your customization settings are saved individually with each circuit file you use so you could. Click to indicate where the item is to be pasted. a pop-up menu of appropriate commands appears. and the Measurement Probe Settings section of Chapter 9. zoom level. change one particular component from red to orange) or for the entire circuit. Refer to the Sheet Properties . The cursor shows a “ghosted” image of the item to be pasted. Refer to the Adding a Comment sectionof Chapter 2. • Show Comment/Probe—Displays the contents of the comment or placed probe. • Copy—Copies the selected item and places it on the clipboard. Chapter 1 User Interface Pop-up from a Comment or Measurement Probe When you right-click on a selected Comment or Measurement Probe. Refer to the Using the Preferences Dialog Box sections for more information. Instruments. • Reverse Probe Direction—Is active for a selected probe only. Setting Schematic Capture Preferences You can customize virtually any aspect of Multisim preferences. © National Instruments Corporation 1-19 NI Multisim User Manual . symbol set (ANSI or DIN) and printer setup. Customization is done through the: • Preferences dialog box—Used to set up global preferences. Use to enter text into the comment. These preferences can vary from computer to computer. page size.Font Tab section for more information. • Properties—Depending on the element selected. • Delete—Deletes the selected item from the workspace. • Edit Comment—Is active for a selected comment only. These commands are: • Cut—Removes the selected item and places it on the clipboard. have one color scheme for one circuit and another for a different circuit. Reverses the probe’s polarity. You can also override the settings for individual instances (for example. for example. including the colors used in your circuit. Schematic Capture - Basics. • Font—Changes the font of various elements on the workspace from their default values. for more information. auto-backup interval. • Paste—Places the contents of the clipboard to the workspace. displays either the Comment Properties. or the Probe Properties dialog box.

default graph background color. 3. auto-backup timing and saving simulation data with instruments. and other items. and language. Complete the following steps to set your user preferences: 1. autowiring behavior.Paths Tab The Multisim installation puts specific files in specific locations. The specific options and settings available in the tabs are described in the following sections. The following sections describe details of setting specific options. and positive phase shift direction.Chapter 1 User Interface • Sheet Properties dialog box—Used to set up the preferences for the active sheet. Choose Options»Global Preferences. • General—Use to set up selection rectangle behavior. database files.com . These preferences are saved with the circuit files so that if the circuit is opened on another computer. 2. Click OK to save your changes. with the following tabs: • Paths—Use to change the filepaths for the databases. • Parts—Use to set up component placement mode and the symbol standard (ANSI or DIN). for example. • Save—Use to set up security copy creation. Set the desired options. configuration files. NI Multisim User Manual 1-20 ni. mouse wheel behavior. Select the desired tab. Note Refer to the Using the Sheet Properties Dialog Box section for information on sheet preferences. it will use the same settings. The Preferences dialog box appears. Preferences . • Simulation—Use to set up netlist error behavior. 4. If necessary you can point to a new location to find. Refer to the Using the Sheet Properties Dialog Box section for more information Using the Preferences Dialog Box This section explains general procedures for setting preferences. Tip Click on an item in the Paths tab to show its description.

Select the Paths tab. Change the Miscellaneous settings as desired: • User LabVIEW Instruments Path—The location where user-created LabVIEW instruments are found. 5. Change the settings in the Database Files area as desired: • Master Database—The location of the Master Database.Save Tab The options in this tab let you set up security copy creation. 2. Change the User Settings as desired: • Configuration File—Contains the user interface settings. Complete the following steps to set up save preferences: 1. Choose Options»Global Preferences and click on the Save tab that appears in the Preferences dialog box. 3. Instruments. • Code Models Path—The location where user-created code models are found. © National Instruments Corporation 1-21 NI Multisim User Manual . unless you manually navigate to a new location when saving. • User Database—The location of the User Database. Change the General settings as desired: • Circuit Default Path—This is where all new files are saved. 4. • User Button Images Path—This is where you store any user-created button graphics. • New User Configuration File—Click to create a new user configuration file and select an item from the drop-down list. Refer to the Structure of the Component Database section of Chapter 5. for information on Multisim’s databases. for information on these. 2. Preferences . 6. Choose Options»Global Preferences. Refer to the LabVIEW Instruments section of Chapter 9. The Preferences dialog box appears. Set the following as desired: • Create a Security Copy—Enable to save a security copy when you do a save. auto-backup timing and saving simulation data with instruments. Components. • Corporate Database—The location of the Corporate Database. Chapter 1 User Interface Complete the following steps to change file locations: 1.

not Unicode text file format. text files saved from reports will be in plain text file format. NI Multisim User Manual 1-22 ni. for an example of multi-section part placement. • Save simulation data with instruments—Enable to save data displayed on instruments with the circuit file. Refer to the Creating and Editing a Component’s Symbol with the Symbol Editor section of Chapter 6. The graphic changes to represent the selected symbol set. For example.com . • Continuous placement for multi-section part only radio button—Select to place multiple sections of a multi-section component. Press <Esc> to end continuous placement. • Place single component radio button—Select to place one selected component at a time.Chapter 1 User Interface • Auto-backup—Enable to create a recovery file that is saved at the interval that you specify in the Auto-backup interval field. Complete the following steps to set up parts preferences: 1. for information on how to override this setting for individual components.TXT files as plain text (not Unicode)—When enabled. Enter the maximum size of the simulation data in the Maximum size field. In the Place Component Mode box: • Return to Component Browser after placement checkbox—Enable to return to the Select a Component dialog box after you place a component on the workspace. 2. • Continuous placement radio button—Select to place several components of the same type by continuing to click on the workspace after each component is placed. Press <Esc> when finished part placement. so using this option means each time you place a 7400N you place a different one of its NAND gates. In the Symbol Standard box: • Select the symbol set to use for components (ANSI or DIN). Component Editing. 7400N has four NAND gates.Parts Tab The options in this tab determine the component placement mode and the symbol standard (ANSI or DIN). • Save . Choose Options»Global Preferences and click on the Parts tab that appears in the Preferences dialog box. 3. Refer to the Using the Place Component Browser section of Chapter 2. Schematic Capture - Basics. Preferences . This is useful when you have many parts to place.

Refer to the Setting Dragging Selection Options section of Chapter 2. Enable Delete associated wires when deleting component if you wish to delete wires that are connected to components being deleted. You must restart Multisim for the new setting to take effect. Preferences . you set up selection rectangle behavior. and language. © National Instruments Corporation 1-23 NI Multisim User Manual . Choose Options»Global Preferences and click on the Simulation tab that appears in the Preferences dialog box. Schematic Capture . Refer to the Setting Wiring Preferences section of Chapter 2. Complete the following steps to set up parts preferences: 1.General Tab In this tab. 2. In the Wiring box select the desired options to control the degree of automation used in wiring. • Scroll workspace—Use mouse wheel to scroll up and down the page. Chapter 1 User Interface Preferences . set the following as desired: • When a netlist error occurs drop-down list—Select one of Prompt user. In the Selection Rectangle box. autowiring behavior. wires connected to deleted components will remain. mouse wheel behavior. In the Language box. Cancel simulation/analysis.Basics. for more information. 3. 7. select the desired locale. In the Netlist Errors box. 2. Schematic Capture . Choose Options»Global Preferences and click on the General tab that appears in the Preferences dialog box. In the Mouse Wheel Behavior box select one of: • Zoom workspace—Use mouse wheel to zoom in and out on workspace. If this box is unchecked.Simulation Tab In this tab.Basics. 4. 6. select either Intersecting or Fully enclosed. for more information. Enable the Show line to component when moving its text and Show line to original location when moving parts checkboxes as desired. Proceed with simulation/analysis. default graph and instrument background color. Complete the following steps to set up parts preferences: 1. 5. and positive phase shift direction. you set up netlist error behavior.

White is suggested for printouts. wires) on the workspace. Using the Sheet Properties Dialog Box The Sheet Properties dialog box is used to set up the preferences for each sheet. Proceed with simulation/analysis. components. or the properties dialog box for the selected element will display instead. Cancel simulation/analysis. Note Refer to the Using the Preferences Dialog Box section for information on personal (user) preferences. Do not select any elements (for example. • PCB—Where you set up options for your printed circuit board • Visibility—Where you enable and disable custom annotation layers.com . Set Positive Phase Shift Direction as desired. Complete the following steps to set sheet preferences: 1. font size and style for text elements on the circuit. 4. Select Options»Sheet Properties. This setting only affects the Phase parameter in AC sources. In the Graphs box. Graphs that have already been run and instruments that have already been placed will not be affected by this setting. These preferences are saved with the circuit file so that if the circuit is opened on another computer. NI Multisim User Manual 1-24 ni. Or Right-click on a blank area of the workspace and choose Properties from the pop-up menu that appears. Refer to the Netlist Errors and Warnings section for more information. set the following as desired: • Default background color for graphs and instruments—Select either Black or White. offering you the following tabs: • Circuit—Where you set the color scheme and the display properties of workspace text • Workspace—Where you set the sheet size and properties • Wiring—Where you set the wire and bus options • Font—Where you select the font. 3. Black is suggested for onscreen viewing.Chapter 1 User Interface • When a netlist warning occurs drop-down list—Select one of Prompt user. The Sheet Properties dialog box appears. it will use the same settings.

2. Schematic Capture - Advanced Functions. Click OK to save your changes. shows all symbol pin names.Circuit Tab The options in this tab control the way your circuit and its components appear on the workspace. shows no footprint pin names. when grey checked. Set the desired customization options. If you do not wish to have the settings saved as the default. select how net names will be shown: • Show All—Check to display all net names on the workspace. when not checked. 3. Multisim comes with several color schemes that affect the circuit window background color. Default settings are those used when you create new circuits (File»New). shows footprint pin names for those components whose default behavior is to show them.) Sheet Properties . 4. For symbol and footprint pin names: • Symbol Pin Names checkbox—When fully checked. Select the desired tab. © National Instruments Corporation 1-25 NI Multisim User Manual . • Use Net-specific Setting—Check to show net names as set in the Net dialog box. enable those items you want shown on the workspace. Refer to the Displaying Identifying Information about a Placed Component section of Chapter 3. In the Net Names box. for information on how to override your choices for a particular component. Schematic Capture . The Save as Default checkbox is normally enabled. 1. (If you wish to apply the changes without closing the dialog. You can also develop your own color scheme to meet your individual needs. shows no symbol pin names. Refer to the Modifying Net Names section of Chapter 2. The specific options and settings available in the tabs are described in the following sections of this chapter. 5. The results of enabling these options is shown in the preview area. disable this checkbox. click Apply. Chapter 1 User Interface 2. when grey checked. Note Pin names and numbers are made visible as detailed above. • Footprint Pin Names checkbox—When fully checked. when not checked.Basics. shows all footprint pin names. checking and unchecking in the Visibility tab of the Design Toolbox has no effect. and component color. In the Component box. for more information. wire color. and the level of detail which appears. shows symbol pin names for those components whose default behavior is to show them.

Show page bounds and Show border checkboxes as desired. You can modify any of the settings of these sizes to make your own custom sheet.Workspace Tab The options on this tab determine the appearance and behavior of the circuit window. In the Color box: • To use one of the built-in color schemes: – Choose the scheme from the drop-down list.Chapter 1 User Interface • Hide All—Check to hide all net names on the workspace. 4. enable the Show grid. Sheet Properties . A Color selector dialog box appears. – A representation of the scheme’s settings appears in the preview box below the list. 3. you can set the Width and Height as desired. In the Sheet size box. 1. – Click on the color you want to use for that item and click OK. Multisim comes with standard sheet sizes that you can use to capture your circuit. • To create a custom color scheme: – Choose Custom from the drop-down list. In the Show box. enable the Show Labels checkbox if you wish to display the busline name in circuits that contain buses. In the Bus Entry box. select the desired size from the drop-down list. 4. The results appear in the preview area. 3. In the Custom size box. – Repeat until all your color settings are made. – You are returned to the Sheet Properties dialog box. Select either Portrait or Landscape in the Orientation box.com . – The results of your choice appear in the preview area. – Click on the colored button next to any item. 2. NI Multisim User Manual 1-26 ni.

Basics. R22. for information on changing this label. • Component Attributes—Descriptive information you add to specific components using the component’s properties dialog box. or the desired character will display as a rectangle. • Component Values and Labels—The value being used by the component and identified in the Value tab of the component’s properties dialog box. select either Net or Busline. Working with Larger Designs. change the Wire width and Bus width as desired for current or subsequent wires and buses. Caution Changing to larger fonts may cause labels to collide or exceed boundaries. Sheet Properties .Font Tab Use this tab to set the font parameters for some or all of the elements in the workspace that contain text. 1. Refer to the Viewing a Placed Component’s Value/Model section of Chapter 3. Chapter 1 User Interface Sheet Properties . In the Bus Wiring Mode box. for information on viewing and modifying this value. Select the Font. 2. Complete the following steps to change the font for any text element of the circuit: 1. However. For example. Multisim supports Unicode characters. Font Style and Size for the desired elements. you must be sure to select a font that is Unicode-compatible. Refer to the Modifying Component Labels and Attributes section of Chapter 2. 2. Refer to the Buses section of Chapter 4. which lets you use Cyrillic and Asian fonts. Select the elements you want to change from the following options in the Change All section of the tab: • Component RefDes—The component’s unique identifier (Reference Designator). © National Instruments Corporation 1-27 NI Multisim User Manual .Wiring Tab The options on this tab control the wire width.Advanced Functions. Schematic Capture . bus width and bus wiring mode options. The component label is assigned by Multisim and identified in the Label tab of the component’s properties dialog box. In the Drawing Option box. for more information. Schematic Capture .

com . for example. Refer to the Modifying Net Names section of Chapter 2. • Footprint Pin Names—The name assigned to a pin when it is transferred to PCB layout.Basics. To change the font for a specific selection. for information on changing this name. Entire Circuit changes the font for all instances of the elements selected in the Change All box. for more information. Refer to the Buses section of Chapter 4. 1. select Connect digital ground to Analog ground if you wish to make the digital and analog grounds the same when exporting to PCB layout packages. • Schematic Texts—Notes that you add to your circuit using the Place»Text command. Schematic Capture . GND (for ground). Instruments. Schematic Capture . Note In the Apply to box. Sheet Properties . This setting is used by Ultiboard to determine the default board setup. for more information. the number of copper layers (inner) increases. or select it before you open the Sheet Properties dialog box. and the Measurement Probe section of Chapter 9. 2. 3. • Net Names—The name automatically assigned to a net when it is placed on your circuit.PCB Tab This tab is used to set options used when exporting data for PCB layout. Enter the desired Number of Copper Layers. for more information.Basics. • Comments and Probes—Text found in comments that you add to the circuit from the Place»Comment command. Schematic Capture . NI Multisim User Manual 1-28 ni. • Busline Name—The name that you assign to a busline. • Symbol Pin Names—The name assigned to a pin. and is reflected in the list below the Number of Copper Layers field. for more information. Refer to the Adding a Comment section of Chapter 2.Basics. Refer to the Adding Miscellaneous Text section of Chapter 2.Chapter 1 User Interface Refer to the Modifying Component Labels and Attributes section of Chapter 2. Schematic Capture . then enable the Selection radio button in the Font tab. right-click on the desired element and select Font from the pop-up that appears. In the Export Settings box. Also for text found in probes that placed from the Instruments toolbar.Basics. As this value increases. select the Units to use during export to PCB layout. In the Ground Option box. Working with Larger Designs.

1. • Attribute and Variant—This layer contains the attribute information entered in the component’s properties dialog box in the Attributes fields in the Label tab. Chapter 1 User Interface Sheet Properties . • Bus Entry Label—This layer contains the labels that appear at the point where a wire enters a bus. • Pin Name—This layer contains the pin names. click Add to add custom annotation layers to the schematic. • Pin Number—This layer contains the pin numbers. Design Toolbox The Design Toolbox is used to manage various elements in the schematic. © National Instruments Corporation 1-29 NI Multisim User Manual . U2A.Visibility Tab This tab lets you add the custom annotation layers that are available in Multisim. 1 kohm. The Schematic Capture layers consist of: • RefDes—This layer contains the reference designators for all elements on the workspace. Working with Larger Designs.for information on the Project View tab. Refer to the Placed Component Properties section of Chapter 3. R1. “Ln 1”. Refer to the Visibility Tab section for more information. It also contains the component’s value. Note Refer to the Project Management and Version Control section of Chapter 4. Refer to the Variants section of Chapter 4. Note Refer to the Visibility Tab section for information on annotation layers. for example. In the Custom Layers box. Show/hide these layers from the Visibility tab in the Design Toolbox. • Net Name—This layer contains the netnames.Advanced Functions. for more information. Visibility Tab The Design Toolbox Visibility tab lets you choose which layers to display on the current sheet on the workspace. • Label and Value—This layer contains the label entered in the component’s properties dialog box in the Label field in the Label tab. Schematic Capture . 2. for example. Working with Larger Designs. for example. It also includes the Variant Status. for more information.

Refer to the Adding a Comment section of Chapter 2.com . • Text/Graphics—This layer contains any graphic elements that you place on the workspace. for more information. Schematic Capture . Hierarchy Tab The Design Toolbox’s Hierarchy tab contains a tree that shows the files in the design that you have open. NI Multisim User Manual 1-30 ni. 1 Design Root 5 Hierarchical Blocks 2 Active Variant 6 Included in Active Variant 3 Page 1 of Multi-sheet 7 Page 2 of Multi-sheet 4 Subcircuit Refer to the Variants. Refer to the Measurement Probe section of Chapter 9. for more information.Visibility Tab section for more information. Instruments. Refer to the Sheet Properties . Refer to the Electrical Rules Checking section of Chapter 3. Schematic Capture . • Static Probe—This layer contains the static measurement probes that can be placed on the schematic.Basics. disable the layer’s checkbox. enable the layer’s checkbox. To hide a layer. for more information. To show a hidden layer. for more information. and Hierarchical Design sections of Chapter 4.Chapter 1 User Interface The Fixed Annotations layers consist of: • ERC Error Mark—This layer contains the marks that are placed on the schematic that indicate ERC error points.Advanced Functions. Custom Annotation layers can be added from the Sheet Properties dialog box. Flat Multi-Sheet Design. • Comment—This layer contains any comments that you “pin” to the workspace. Working with Larger Designs.

• Rename Subcircuit—To change the subcircuit’s name. select: • Open Window—To open the hierarchical block on the workspace. Right-click on an item. for more information. select: • Open Window—To open the page on the workspace. From a page of a multi-sheet design (in this example. Depending on the item. From a subcircuit. 6. From an active or in-active variant that branches from the Design Root. 5. Working with Larger Designs. 3. A blue box displays beside the active variant. From a hierarchical block. From the Design Root select: • Close—To close the entire design. Refer to the Setting the Active Variant for Simulation section of Chapter 4. select: • Set Variant Active—To set the active variant. for more information. • Close Window—To close the page. PowerSupply#1). • Close Window—To close the subcircuit. • Map Variants—To display the subcircuit’s properties dialog box. • Variant Manager—To display the Variant Manager dialog box. Working with Larger Designs. • Rename Page—To change the multi-page’s name. Refer to the Setting Up Variants section of Chapter 4. Chapter 1 User Interface Note Variants are not available in all versions of Multisim. different context-sensitive menus appear. Refer to the Assigning Variant Status to Components section of Chapter 4. for more information. 2. select: • Open Window—To open the subcircuit on the workspace. • Close Window—To close the hierarchical block. Working with Larger Designs. © National Instruments Corporation 1-31 NI Multisim User Manual . • Save—To save the design. 4. Pop-up Menus Complete the following steps to view and use context-sensitive menus in the Hierarchy tab: 1. where you can assign its variant status.

You can only include one variant at a time in the active variant. Working with Larger Designs. • Exclude from Active Variant—To exclude this variant from the active variant. If desired. A blue triangle appears beside the included variant.com . As well. Select Options»Customize User Interface. Customizing the Interface The Multisim user interface is highly customizable. you can exclude all variants in a hierarchical block from the active variant. The menu system is fully customizable. including all pop-up menus for the various object types. select: • Variant Manager—To display the Variant Manager dialog box. The contents of the toolbars can be customized. for more information. For example. Complete the following steps to customize the interface: 1. • Include in Active Variant—To include this variant in the active variant. where you can assign its variant status. the toolbars and docking windows can be re-configured as you move from a circuit sheet to a description sheet. Separate customizations can be applied whenever a different type of sheet becomes active. NI Multisim User Manual 1-32 ni. for more information. the keyboard shortcut system is customizable. Toolbars can be docked in various positions and orientations. 2. This allows for any keys or key combinations to be assigned to any command that can be placed in a menu or on a toolbar. From a variant that branches from a hierarchical block. 7. New toolbars can be created. Refer to the Assigning Variant Status to Components section of Chapter 4.Chapter 1 User Interface • Map Variants—To display the hierarchical block’s properties dialog box. Working with Larger Designs. Make changes as detailed in the following sections: • Commands tab • Toolbars tab • Keyboard tab • Menu tab • Options tab • Customization Pop-up Menus. Refer to the Setting Up Variants section of Chapter 4.

or all toolbars. Click Close when customizations are complete. When a command is selected in the Command list.ewcfg”. When you click OK. switch on the checkbox beside the desired toolbar in the Toolbars list. drag it to its new location. 3. a new toolbar with the name that you entered is created. Complete the following steps to add a command to a menu or toolbar: 1. The Customize dialog box must be open when you do this. To change the position of a command that is in a menu or toolbar. Follow the steps in the Commands tab section to add buttons to the toolbar. Toolbars tab The Toolbars tab in the Customize dialog box is used to show or hide toolbars. 2. click on another selection in the Categories list to display more commands. Use the following buttons and checkboxes as desired: • Reset All—Displays the Reset Toolbars dialog box. You are prompted to select the configuration file you wish to use. 3. • New—Displays the Toolbar Name dialog box. and to add new custom toolbars. To remove a command from a menu or toolbar. right-click on it and select Delete from the pop-up that appears. Complete the following steps to use the features in this tab: 1. for example. its description is displayed in the Description field. “default. where you select whether to reset the currently selected toolbars. To display a toolbar. If you do not see the command that you require. Chapter 1 User Interface Commands tab The Commands tab in the Customize dialog box is used to add commands to menus and toolbars. 2. Drag it from the Commands list to the desired menu or toolbar. Switch off a checkbox to hide a toolbar. © National Instruments Corporation 1-33 NI Multisim User Manual . where you enter the name for a new toolbar. Note You cannot switch off the Menu bar. The Customize dialog box must be open when you do this.

Menu tab The Menu tab is used to modify the various context-sensitive menus that appear when you right-click from various locations in Multisim. • Delete—Use to delete the selected toolbar. If a shortcut is already assigned. Complete the following steps to set up keyboard shortcuts: 1. Complete the following steps to display the desired menu: 1. 3.Chapter 1 User Interface • Rename—Use to rename a toolbar that you have created yourself. You cannot rename toolbars that are included in Multisim by default. Choose a category from the Category drop-down list and the desired command from the Commands drop-down list. for example. Right-click on the menu that appears and edit as desired. Main. You cannot delete toolbars that are included in Multisim by default. • Lock all docked toolbars—Select this checkbox to lock all docked toolbars in place. it appears in the Current Keys field. Components. Select the desired menu set from the Select Context Menu drop-down list. NI Multisim User Manual 1-34 ni. “Save”) in the toolbar. 4. View. 2. along with the command’s icon. Select the desired menu effects using the Menu animations drop-down list and the Menu shadows checkbox. Enter a new shortcut in the Press New Shortcut Key field. • Show text labels—Select this checkbox to show the text labels (for example. Click Close when customizations are complete. 2. Components. Menu Bar. 3. for example. Keyboard tab The Keyboard tab is used to set up keyboard shortcuts.com . Click Close when customizations are complete.

2. the Button Appearance dialog box appears. When you select Button Appearance. Complete the following steps to display the above pop-up: 1. switch the checkboxes on or off as desired. 3. Customization Pop-up Menus To customize the appearance of toolbar buttons and menu items. where you can change the appearance of the selected toolbutton. Chapter 1 User Interface Options tab The Options tab in the Customize dialog box is used to set up toolbar and menu options. a pop-up menu is available when the Customize dialog box is open. Be sure you have the Customize dialog box open. © National Instruments Corporation 1-35 NI Multisim User Manual . To set up menu and toolbar options. Right-click on either a menu item or toolbar and select the desired option from the pop-up menu that appears.

as in other Windows applications. you should look to other chapters for details on the component database and instructions on editing components. For example. Introduction to Schematic Capture Schematic capture is the first stage in developing your circuit.Basics 2 This chapter describes the basic functions involved in creating a circuit in the circuit window. for information on how to set up your workspace. Some of the features described in this chapter may not be available in your edition of Multisim. Multisim lets you modify component properties. Each window is distinct. and otherwise prepare your design. Refer to the release notes for a list of the features in your edition. a component or instrument from one circuit window to another. You can copy. Note Refer to the Setting Schematic Capture Preferences section of Chapter 1. components and wires. The active circuit window is. © National Instruments Corporation 2-1 NI Multisim User Manual . and can have its own preferences settings. and control the color of the circuit window background. User Interface. place them on the circuit window in the desired position and orientation. You can use the Window menu to move from circuit window to circuit window or just click on the tab at the bottom of the workspace for the circuit you want to see. It explains the fundamental steps in circuit creation. orient your circuit on a grid. Working with Multiple Circuit Windows You can open as many circuits as you want at the same time. In this stage you choose the components you want to use. set of components and so on. add text and a title block. wire them together. add subcircuits and buses. but is not intended to describe all the potential aspects of circuit design. but not move. Each circuit appears in its own circuit window. the window with the highlighted title bar.Schematic Capture .

for more information. NI Multisim User Manual 2-2 ni. You can use the following methods to locate a component in the database: • use the Components toolbar to browse through all the component groups. They are included for simulation flexibility. Virtual components have a symbol and a model. but no footprint and hence are not “real” in the sense that they cannot be purchased. Power Sources Family). Refer to the Database Levels section of Chapter 5. group. The first of these choices is normally used. Filters are provided as appropriate to narrow lists based on value range and tolerance where applicable. Type-ahead allows you to type a few characters to jump to the component you are looking for. Note There are multiple “levels” of the component database.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . for more information. Click one of these buttons to open the place component browser (that is. Virtual component families are color coded green in the Select a Component dialog box. Components. • search for a specific component group/family in the database. Search capabilities allow you to find parts using generalized wildcard searches throughout all the databases. Refer to the Searching for Components section of Chapter 5.com . Parts are organized by database. and family (for example.Basics Selecting Components from the Database The first step in schematic capture is placing the appropriate components on your circuit window. the Select a Component dialog box) with the contents of that button’s group displayed. Components. Refer to the Using the Place Component Browser section for more information. Placing Components The component browser is used to select parts from the component databases and place them on a circuit. Master Database. Each button on the Components toolbar corresponds to a group of components with similar functionality. Multisim provides the unique concept of virtual components. Sources Group.

Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . matches are displayed in the top of the Component list. Transistors. for example. Click on the desired component family in the Family list. Select the desired model and model manufacturer in the Model manuf. © National Instruments Corporation 2-3 NI Multisim User Manual . Or Right-click in the workspace and select Place Component from the pop-up that appears. If you make a mistake. The default database that displays in the browser is the Master Database. Inductors or Capacitors section for information on the placement of R.Basics Using the Place Component Browser The procedure described in this section applies for the placement of most components. Click on the desired component in the Component list. Refer to the Multi-section Components section for information on the placement of multi-section components. type the first few characters of the component’s name in the Component field. Complete the following steps to place a component: 1. L. the database will remain as selected for subsequent part placements. As you type. or C components. If you wish to select a component from either the Corporate Database or User Database. you can use the Backspace key to remove one character at a time. you must select that database from the Database drop-down list before selecting a component. Refer to the Placing Resistors./ID area. 2. you can display the Select a Component dialog box by choosing Place»Component and selecting the desired group from the Group drop-down list. 3. 5. Once changed. Alternatively. The Select a Component dialog box appears with the selected component group displayed. 4. Note The Select a Component browser is also referred to as the place component browser. Click on the desired group in the Components toolbar. Tip To make your scroll through the Component list faster. Note The Function area shows any available information about the component selected in the Component list.

for more information. Schematic Capture .Advanced Functions). virtual components. power sources) do not have footprints available. hover your cursor it. a dialog box displays. hold down the <Ctrl> key and click your mouse. as explained in the Displaying Identifying Information about a Placed Component section of Chapter 3. The browser closes and the cursor on the circuit window changes to a ghost image of the component.Basics 6. Note If you are placing a component that is one part of a multi-section component such as a quad 2-input NAND gate. as well as a unique RefDes made up of a letter and number. and so on.com . This indicates that the component is ready to be placed. Click OK to confirm that this is the component you want to place. 9. Refer to the Preferences . Some virtual components (for example. The Hyperlink field is intended to contain. The workspace automatically scrolls if you move your cursor to its edges. Components.Parts Tab section of Chapter 1. Move your cursor to the location where you want to place the component. for a discussion of “real” vs. The component’s symbol and labels appear (unless you have specified that they are not to be displayed. Selected the desired footprint in the Footprint manuf. Click on the circuit window where you want the component placed.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Refer to the Modifying User Field Titles and Content section of Chapter 5. the first digital component has the RefDes “U1”. it appears in a different color from real components. For example. 8. If you have Return to Component Browser after Placement selected in the Parts tab of the Preferences dialog box. for example. This color is set in the Sheet Properties NI Multisim User Manual 2-4 ni. If the component you place is a virtual component. User Interface. Refer to the Multi-section Components section for more information about the dialog’s functionality. The letter represents the type of component and the number is a sequential number that indicates the order in which the components were originally placed. Schematic Capture .Advanced Functions. the first inductor has the RefDes “L1”. The contents of this field can be edited in the Components tab of the Database Manager. If you want to go to the link. for more information. the Select a Component browser reappears. the internet address for the component’s manufacturer. 7. where you specify which of the sections you want to place. Refer to the Real Components section of Chapter 3./Type list. the next is “U2”.

2.Basics dialog box.Circuit Tab section of Chapter 1. Complete the following steps to place an R. Select the Master Database in the Database drop-down list. When placing any of these components. User Interface. Type the value of the component that you want to place in the field at the top of the Component list. you must be careful that the combination of values that you select in the Select a Component dialog box are available in a real-world. L or C component: 1. purchaseable component. there are some differences. You can type any value—it does not need to appear in the list to be placed on the schematic. and become part of a Bill of Materials. Select the Basic group from the Group drop-down list. 5. © National Instruments Corporation 2-5 NI Multisim User Manual . Click on the desired component family in the Family list. and select the Basic group from the Group drop-down list. Caution If you are placing a component that will be exported to PCB layout. 3. Inductors or Capacitors The procedure used to place resistors. carbon film). 4. any component with a unique combination of the values in the various fields of the Select a Component dialog box is saved. you can choose any combination of: the component’s value (for example. resistance). The Select a Component dialog box appears with the Basic component group displayed. type (for example. tolerance. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Refer to the Acceptable Unit Letters section for information about what letters can be used in this field. Or Right-click in the workspace and select Place Component from the pop-up that appears. When this is enabled. for more information. Placing Resistors. Refer to the Sheet Properties . Optionally. Or Choose Place»Component to display the Select a Component dialog box. for example Resistor. Click on the Basic group in the Components toolbar. However. enable the Save unique component on placement checkbox. inductors or capacitors is quite similar to the procedure used to place other types of components. footprint and manufacturer.

the internet address for the component’s manufacturer. Refer to the Backing up the Corporate Database section of Appendix B. 11. Those that are placed from the Master Database as described in this procedure have additional SPICE simulation parameters that can be viewed from the Value tab of the placed component’s properties dialog box. variable inductors. or variable capacitors. If you want to go to the link.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . and the Save unique component on placement checkbox is enabled.com . L. if the Corporate dB is deleted. the Select a Component browser reappears. User Interface. Archiving Data for important information. L. hover your cursor over it. tolerance. for more information. If you are placing a part for simulation only. Selected the desired footprint in the Footprint manuf. for more information. Refer to the Preferences . If you intend to export the schematic to PCB layout. The browser closes and the cursor on the circuit window changes to a ghost image of the component you wish to place. R. you can type it manually. Note You can also create resistors. Move your cursor to the location where you want the component placed. and footprint manufacturer/type. To confirm that this is the component you want to place. inductors or capacitors using Multisim’s Component Wizard. and C components created in this way will only contain basic simulation model information. these components no longer appear in the Master database. Consequently. Select the desired Tolerance. The contents of this field can be edited in the Components tab of the Database Manager. The Hyperlink field is intended to contain. select a value in this list.Parts Tab section of Chapter 1. If you do not see the desired tolerance in the list. 9. component type. This list does not appear for potentiometers. 10. The workspace automatically scrolls if you move your cursor to its edges. 6. however. for example. Select the desired Component Type./Type list. If you do not see the desired type in the list. 8. and C components found in the Master database are in fact a combination of the value. hold down your <Ctrl> key and click your mouse. Click on the circuit window where you want the component placed. 7. When you are NI Multisim User Manual 2-6 ni. the combination of these values is saved in the Corporate database. you can type it manually. Components. If you have Return to Component Browser after Placement selected in the Parts tab of the Preferences dialog box.Basics Note R. This indicates that the component is ready to be placed. click OK. select <no footprint>. Whenever a unique combination of these values is selected in the Select a Component dialog box. Refer to the Modifying User Field Titles and Content section of Chapter 5.

or C components in price lists and specifications. To accommodate this. Do not use an exponent in this case. and capacitors. The following table describes the acceptable unit letters. followed by an optional unit letter for the value of resistors. so 1M3 = 1. if you type 1. L. if it is used in place of a decimal point as in the example “1k3”. However. Exception: “k” is normally lower case. as in “1K3”.3G. Letters with multiple acceptable capitalizations are auto-corrected to match the standard for that unit. Multisim lets you enter any number in scientific notation (with or without an exponent). double-click on the component and click the Value tab. To edit a placed R. For example. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . for example. © National Instruments Corporation 2-7 NI Multisim User Manual . L. you must select them from either the Corporate or User Database. it is converted to 1. inductors. Acceptable Unit Letters Some manufacturers do not use standard units to describe their R.3g.Basics placing components that were created using the Component Wizard.3M. Unit Letter Description f or F femto (1e-15) p pico (1e-12) n or N nano (1e-9) u or U or μ micro (1e-6) m milli (1e-3) k or K kilo (1e+3) M or MEG or meg mega (1e+6) g or G giga (1e+9) t or T tera (1e+12) P peta (1e+15) You can also use the unit letter as a subsitute for the decimal point in a number. or C component. it is converted to upper case.

some multi-section TTL and CMOS components are available in a single-footprint format containing all of the devices. for more information. Rather.3kohms • 1. Reports.3k • 1k3 • 1. several component symbols may correspond to a single physical package.com .3e-4meg Multi-section Components Certain non-virtual part symbols do not have a one-to-one correspondence with a footprint. A Spare Gates Report is available to show sections not used on multi-section parts in the circuit.3 • 1. Once placed. Acceptable values include: • 1. and are appended with “_IC”.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . For example. “1.4kohms” = “1.4k” and “1. These components’ parts families are found in the place component browser.3m”. up to four component symbols on a schematic diagram may correspond to a single part for the purposes of PCB layout. You must select one of these sections for placement. An example is a quad 2-input NAND gate such as the Texas Instruments 74LS00D.Basics Any letters after the suffix are ignored. For this particular device. select the individual part (in this case. Immediately prior to placing the component. as in the part family “74LS_IC”. or allows you to start placing a new part.3e4 • 1. optimizing facilities are provided to enable multi-section parts to be efficiently packed into chips. a NAND gate) from the component browser. NI Multisim User Manual 2-8 ni. Refer to the Spare Gates Report section of Chapter 12. As well as being available in components with individual sections as described above. a section chooser pops up that lists parts that have free sections.3e-4 • 1.3me” = “1. To place a multi-section part.

a dialog box appears as shown in the figure below: © National Instruments Corporation 2-9 NI Multisim User Manual . and will be contained in one component package when the circuit is exported for PCB layout. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Complete the following steps to place one device of a multi-section part: 1. 2. 2. Family and Component. These four gates were place from the 74Ls component family. It also shows a single-footprint 74LS00D IC containing four NAND gates (2). Complete the following steps to place a multi-section part with a single footprint: 1.Basics 1 2 1 Individual 74LS00D Gates 2 Single-footprint 74LS00D IC In the above figure. Select Place»Component and navigate to the desired Group. Click to place the IC on the workspace. If this is the first multi-section component of this type (for example. Family and Component. (1) shows 74LS00D gates placed as individual components. This was placed from the 74LS_IC component. 74LS00D) being placed on the circuit. Click OK. Note Single-IC components are not available for all multi-section components. Select Place»Component and navigate to the desired Group.

7. NI Multisim User Manual 2-10 ni.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Click to place the device in the desired location. for example 74LS01N. If there are other quad 2-input NAND devices in the circuit. As you are dragging the “ghost” image of the part that you are placing. the dialog box will be similar to the following: 1 2 1 Darker Text 2 Greyed-out Text Darker text (1) indicates available sections for placement. Greyed-out text (2) indicates this section has already been placed. press one of the following key combinations: • Ctrl-R—rotates the component 90 degrees clockwise. they will not be displayed. 2. U1 and “New” are both quad 2-input 74LS00D ICs. Click on any available section. The dialog box closes and a ghost image of the device is attached to your cursor. • Ctrl-Shift-R—Rotates the component 90 degrees counter-clockwise. Click on an available section to place it. Note It is a good idea to place all the sections of a multi-section device (U1 in this example) before going to a new multi-section device of the same type. press <Esc> to exit. the dialog box re-appears. Rotating/flipping a part during placement Complete the following steps to rotate or flip a part during placement: 1. 5. Continue placing parts from this dialog. If you selected either Continuous placement for multi-section part only or Continuous placement in the Parts tab of the Preferences dialog box.com . 4. In the above example. Select a part as detailed in the Using the Place Component Browser section. 6. When finished.Basics If there are already other multi-section components placed. Only instances of the same component type are shown as available to place. 3.

© National Instruments Corporation 2-11 NI Multisim User Manual . Other Buttons To display the Search Component dialog box. which contains buttons that let you place different virtual Signal Source components. Button Description Show Power Source Components button. for more information. for more information. Displays the Power Source Components toolbar. To display the Model Data Report dialog box. Reports. Placing Virtual Components Use the Virtual toolbar to place virtual components on your workspace. To display the Component Detail Report dialog box. which contains buttons that let you place different virtual Basic components. click the Model button. Refer to the Searching for Components section of Chapter 5. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Show Diode Components button. Complete the following steps to place a virtual component: 1.Basics • Alt-X—Flips the component horizontally. click the Detail Report button. Refer to the Model Data Report section of Chapter 12. which contains buttons that let you place different virtual Power Source components. Reports. Displays the Diodes Components toolbar. Components. click the Search button. Show Basic Components button. for more information. • Alt-Y—Flips the component vertically. Click on the desired button in the Virtual toolbar. Displays the Signal Source Components toolbar. Displays the Basic Components toolbar. which contains buttons that let you place different virtual diodes. Show Signal Source Components button. Refer to the Component Detail Report section of Chapter 12.

This feature is not available in all versions of Multisim. Displays the Analog Components toolbar.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . This feature is not available in all versions of Multisim. which contains buttons that let you place different virtual Analog components. Show Measurement Components button. Show Rated Virtual Components button. Show Analog Components button. Show Miscellaneous Components button. These components function normally when the circuit is simulated. but appear like the real component on the circuit schematic. which contains buttons that let you place miscellaneous virtual components. This component group contains a number of virtual components that can be rated to “blow” if pre-set tolerance(s) are exceeded when the circuit is simulated. Show 3D Components button. which contains buttons that let you place different virtual transistors. These tolerances are set in the Values tab of each component’s properties window. Displays the Measurement Components toolbar. which contains buttons that let you place different virtual 3D components.Basics Button Description Show Transistor Components button. Displays the 3D Components toolbar. Displays the Transistor Components toolbar. which contains buttons that let you place different virtual Measurement components.com . Displays the Miscellaneous Components toolbar. NI Multisim User Manual 2-12 ni. Note Refer to the Virtual component toolbars section for information about the various toolbars that appear when buttons on the Virtual toolbar are pressed. which contains buttons that let you place different virtual components that are found in the Rated Virtual component group. Displays the Rated Virtual Components toolbar.

normally open relay. AC Voltage Source. FM Voltage Source. variable inductor. Tip You can click on the down-arrow beside any of the buttons in the Virtual toolbar to display the components available for that button and select the desired component directly from the drop-down list that appears. magnetic core coil. transformer. Digital Ground. Basic Components The buttons (from left to right) in the Basic toolbar place the following virtual components: capacitor. AM Source. Power Source Components The buttons (from left to right) in the Power Source Components toolbar place the following virtual components: AC Power Source. miscellaneous transformer. VDD Supply. 3. VEE Supply. Exponential Current Source.Basics 2. Thermal Noise Source. From the toolbar that displays. The cursor changes to a “ghost” image of the component you wish to place. DC Current Source. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . VCC Supply. Refer to the Placing Virtual Components section for more information. combination relay. PWL Linear Voltage. Signal Source Components The buttons (from left to right) in the Signal Source Components toolbar place the following virtual components: AC Current Source. normally closed relay. Pulse Voltage Source. variable capacitor. Exponential Voltage Source. FM Current Source. Pulse Current Source. PWL Linear Current. 3 Phase Voltage Source Wye. Ground. pullup resistor. DC Power Source. inductor. VSS Supply. resistor. click on the desired virtual component. voltage controlled resistor. Virtual component toolbars This section describes the virtual components that can be placed from the various virtual component toolbars that are accessed by pressing the corresponding button on the Virtual toolbar. Clock Current Source. Click the workspace in the desired location to place the virtual component. potentiometer. Clock Voltage Source. non-linear transformer. © National Instruments Corporation 2-13 NI Multisim User Manual . 3 Phase Voltage Source Delta. audio transformer. power transformer. coreless coil.

BJT PNP 4T.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . 3 Terminal Op-amp. select it from the list and click to place it in the desired location. Using the In Use List Each time you place a component. BJT NPN. Voltmeter (4 configurations). Phase Locked Loop. several enhancement and depletion mode NMOSFETs and PMOSFETs. To place another instance of any currently placed component. Current Rated Fuse. Optocoupler. JFET P. BJT PNP. Transistor Components The buttons (from left to right) in the Transistor Components toolbar place the following virtual components: BJT NPN 4T. Miscellaneous Components The buttons (from left to right) in the Miscellaneous Components toolbar place the following virtual components: 555 Timer. Analog Components The buttons (from left to right) in the Analog Components toolbar place the following virtual components: Comparator. zener diode.Basics Diodes The buttons (from left to right) in the Diodes toolbar place the following virtual components: diode. 5 Terminal Op-amp.com . 7 Segment Display Common Cathode. GaASFET N. NI Multisim User Manual 2-14 ni. Motor. JFET N. it is added to the In Use List. Crystal. DCD Hex. 7 Segment Display Common Anode. GaASFET P. Measurement Components The buttons (from left to right) in the Measurement Components toolbar place the following virtual components: Ammeter (4 configurations). Monostable. Analog Switch. Lamp. Digital Probe (5 colors).

but not the entire component. Selecting Placed Components You can select a component that has been placed on the workspace by either clicking on it or dragging the mouse to make a selection. do not click on the center of the component—click directly on the text. left-click on its center. as shown in (3) in the above figure. 2. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . you can drop two-pinned components such as resistors directly onto a wire. To select a component using the mouse. Release the mouse to “break” the wire and place the component in the break. Select the desired two-pinned component as described in the Using the Place Component Browser section. © National Instruments Corporation 2-15 NI Multisim User Manual . 2 1 3 1 Original Circuit 2 New Component 3 Placed Component Complete the following steps to drop a two-pinned component onto a wire in the original circuit in the above figure (1): 1. Tip If you wish to select a component’s label or other text. 3. Move the “ghost” image of the component to the desired wire as shown in (2) in the above figure.Basics Drop-Placing Two-Pinned Components Once you have wired a circuit.

Refer to the Setting Dragging Selection Options section for more information. • Fully enclosed—The entire part. Refer to the Setting Wiring Preferences section for more information. press and hold the Z key before dragging the mouse. 2. Setting Dragging Selection Options You can use the Selection Rectangle box in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box to set how part selection by mouse dragging functions. Note Moving a component automatically adjusts its wiring to an appropriate configuration.Basics Complete the following steps to select a component by dragging the mouse: 1. down. Tip You can select individual elements in a component like the RefDes. Tip To toggle between the Intersecting and Fully enclosed modes. • select the component and press the arrow keys on your keyboard to move it up. or to either side in increments of one grid space. Release the mouse.com .Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . use the <Tab>key. including all text and labels must be in the dragged rectangle for part to be selected. unless you have disabled the Autowire on move option. If you select: • Intersecting—The part is selected when a portion of it is contained in the dragged rectangle. The component is selected. NI Multisim User Manual 2-16 ni. do one of the following: • drag the component. label and so on. Moving a Placed Component To move a placed component to another location. Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor to form a selection rectangle on the workspace that contains the component to be selected. Note You can set whether you must enclose all or part of a component in the selection rectangle. To move the selection to another element of the component.

not just its label. Refer to the Selecting Placed Components section for more information. Click and hold the left mouse button on the desired label. Note A component’s symbol and labels (for example. as shown in (1) in the figure below. 2. Click and hold the left mouse button on the desired component. 2. Drag the component to the desired location. Release the mouse button when the ghost image is in the desired location. As you drag the mouse. The component is selected with a dashed line. a ghost image of the selected label appears attached to the cursor. be sure the whole component is selected. Value) can be moved independently or together—if you plan to move the component. as you drag the mouse. Drag the label to the desired location. along with a dashed line that connects the ghost image to the selected label’s original location. As shown in the figure below. Complete the following steps to move a component’s label: 1. along with a dashed line that connects the ghost image to the selected component’s original location.Basics Complete the following steps to move a component by dragging: 1. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . 3. © National Instruments Corporation 2-17 NI Multisim User Manual . a ghost image of the selected part appears attached to the cursor. RefDes.

Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . 2. Or Right-click on the workspace select Paste from the pop-up menu that appears. The most common use for this feature is when you wish to start a circuit with virtual components. The cursor shows a “ghosted” version of the copied component. Select Edit»Paste. Release the mouse button when the ghost image is in the desired location.com . and. choose Copy. Or Right-click on the desired component. Click at the location where you want the copied component placed. Select the desired component and choose Edit»Copy.Basics A solid line connects the ghost image to the component to which it belongs. as shown in (2) in the figure below. Replacing a Placed Component You can easily replace a placed component by using the Replace button in the component’s properties dialog box. This is very useful in circuits that have a large number of components. and then replace them with the nearest real components. 3. Note You can also copy a component using the Windows control keys for cut <Ctrl-X>. copy <Ctrl-C> and paste <Ctrl-V>. 1 2 1 Ghost Image 2 Solid Line 3. Copying a Placed Component Complete the following steps to copy a placed component: 1. NI Multisim User Manual 2-18 ni. from the pop-up menu that appears.

You are presented with a color palette. Controlling Component’s Color The default color is controlled in the Sheet Properties dialog box. Refer to the Using the Place Component Browser section for more information about the component browser. for more information.Circuit Tab section of Chapter 1. for more information. Wires can also be started by double-clicking anywhere on the circuit. Wiring Components A basic wire can be created by clicking on any one of a part’s symbol pins.Basics Complete the following steps to replace a placed component: 1. Each time a wire is placed it either creates a new net. Complete the following steps to change the color of a placed component: 1. This creates a junction at that location and starts wiring from that point. Choose a color and click OK to apply it to the selected item. The term net is typically used to describe this concept when discussing PCB layout. The new component appears on the circuit window in the place of the previous one. 2. This creates a wire that can then be routed to either another symbol pin. This concept is equivalent to the concept of a node when discussing SPICE-based circuit simulation. a connection is automatically made. The component’s properties dialog box appears. If routed to a wire. Select a new component and click OK. Right-click on the component and choose Change Color from the pop-up menu that appears. when placed a junction is automatically created to differentiate between two wires crossing and two wires connected. Menus and Commands. © National Instruments Corporation 2-19 NI Multisim User Manual . Click Replace. User Interface. Note If you wish to replace multiple selected parts with the same quantity of one specific part. If a symbol’s pins are dropped onto either a wire or another pin. Double-click on the component you want to replace. The Select a Component browser appears. or to another wire. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . or joins an existing one. select Tools»Replace Components. Refer to the Tools Menu section of Appendix A. A net is a collection of wires all of which define a common electrical potential. Refer to the Sheet Properties . 3. 2.

and is the reference for all voltages during simulation. Except for special reserved nets. Net 0 corresponds to analog ground. as they and their accompanying wires would clutter the schematic to too great an extent. These reserved nets are 0.com . it joins this net. Wiring Components Automatically Complete the following steps to wire two components together automatically: 1. The wire is numbered as a net. but are nonetheless connected for the purposes of simulation and layout. After a wire is connected between two pins the cursor returns to its normal mode and is ready for the next command. a TTL digital AND gate would be connected to GND and VCC via hidden pins. the two nets are merged together. That is to say. You may also manually assign a name to a net. VEE. Click on a pin on the second component to finish the connection. however in general the smaller-numbered net wins. Move the mouse. This is called virtual wiring and may be used to reduce the complexity of circuits. 2. Within a single-page of a circuit. If two nets are merged by wiring them together. 3. These reserved nets are most often used in conjunction with hidden symbol pins. there are rules used to decide which of the two names the new net will bear. as described in the Setting Wiring Preferences section). GND. GND is a digital ground (as it is common for the purposes of PCB layout to wish to isolate these two ground nets). Click on a pin from the first component to start the connection. Refer to the Virtual Wiring section for more information. NI Multisim User Manual 2-20 ni. VCC. and VSS. anytime a net at any level in the hierarchy or on any page is re-named to one of these reserved nets. In this case. Certain pre-defined named nets are considered global across an entire design. attached to your cursor. A wire appears. virtual wiring may not be used across pages or across levels in the hierarchy. Your pointer turns into a crosshair ( ). For example.Basics Nets are typically assigned the next available small integer value.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Multisim automatically places the wire. a net may be manually renamed to be the same name as another on the same page. which snaps to an appropriate configuration (unless you have disabled the “autowire on connection” option. These are pins that are not shown on a schematic. VDD.

Refer to the Wiring Components Manually section for more information. Try to make the connection at a slightly different location. 1 2 1 Connected Pin 2 Common Pin Connection To delete a wire. (1) shows Pin 11 connected to Q1 from component U5A (section A of U5). In the figure below. you may be trying to place the wire too close to other surrounding components. Current Controlled Operational Transconductance Amplifier. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Pin 11 of U5B (section B of U5) is marked with an “X”. an “X” indicates that a common pin has been connected in another section of the component. These two sections share a common pin on the IC (pin 11. When wiring a component with multiple sections. This indicates that pin 11 is connected in another section of U5. U5A and U5B are sections of a Dual. © National Instruments Corporation 2-21 NI Multisim User Manual . or use manual wiring.Basics Tip If the connection was not successful. click on it and press Delete on your keyboard or right-click on it and choose Delete from the pop-up menu that appears. VB+). In the same figure (2).

Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Drag the component so that the desired pin is in contact with the desired wire. Optionally. drag a component to a new location. A wire appears. Optionally. To pass through intermediary components instead. The two components stay connected.com . Your pointer turns into a crosshair ( ). Wiring Components Manually If you want to select the precise path a wire will take on a schematic. Control the flow of the wire by clicking on points as you move the mouse. Click on a pin from the first component to start the connection. position the wire at the desired location beside the intermediary component. A junction is automatically placed at the contact point. 3. attached to your cursor.Basics Autowire of Touching Pins You have the option to make an automatic connection if a component pin is touching a wire. press <Shift> and drag the wire. 3. The component stays connected to the wire. Release the mouse button. Complete the steps in the example below to connect two components: 1. 2. Complete the steps below to automatically connect a component to a wire: 1. 4. Each click “fixes” the wire to that point. Drag one component into pin-to-pin contact with another component. 3. Move the mouse. Click on the desired pin of the second component to finish the connection. drag the component to a new location. select or deselect the Autowire when pins are touching checkbox in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box. Multisim “skips over” (avoids) components to which the wire is not connected. A junction is automatically placed at the contact point between the component’s pin and the wire. 2. Complete the following steps to wire two components together manually: 1. To enable/disable this option. another pin or a junction. use the procedure documented in this section. 2. Release the mouse button. NI Multisim User Manual 2-22 ni. Note By default.

and use manual wiring only for difficult. Complete the following steps to exit the place NC marker mode: 1. Multisim assumes you always want to perform automatic wiring until you click somewhere. To delete a wire. Complete the following steps to place an NC marker on a component’s pin: 1. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Or Press <Esc>. select it and press Delete on your keyboard or right-click on it and choose Delete from the pop-up menu that appears. The cursor changes to a crosshair. Double-click on the component and click the Pins tab. until you click once more—either at a destination pin or wire to complete the connection. select Yes from the drop-down list that appears and click OK to close the dialog box. The crosshair on the cursor is replaced with a pointer. If you attempt to connect a wire to a pin with an NC marker. This method allows you to use automatic wiring for most connections. critical or sensitive paths. © National Instruments Corporation 2-23 NI Multisim User Manual . press <Esc>. Select Tools»Toggle NC Marker. Select Tools»Toggle NC Marker. Click in the field in the NC column for the desired pin. 2. which “locks” the wire to that point (this is manual wiring). Click the crosshair on the desired pin to place the NC marker ( ). or at another interim point on the wire you are placing. Marking Pins for No Connection You can place NC (no connection) markers on selected component pins to prevent inadvertantly wiring to these pins. Complete the following steps to place an NC marker on a component’s pin via the component’s properties dialog: 1. An NC marker is added to the selected pin on the schematic.Basics To stop the wiring process at any time. the connection is prevented and a message appears advising that you cannot connect to a pin marked as “no connection”. When in autowiring mode. Multisim then continues with automatic wiring. 2. Combining Automatic and Manual Wiring You can combine the two methods of wiring when placing a single wire.

Choose Options»Global Preferences and select the General tab. you can start and end a wire in “mid-air”. Select Place»Wire. In the Wiring box. Placing Wires Directly Onto Workspace For more flexibility during wiring. 4. • Autowire component on move. another pin or a junction. Select checkbox and enter the desired NI Multisim User Manual 2-24 ni. Double-click to place a junction in “mid-air” and end the wire placement. enable any or all of the following options: • Automatically connect components when pins are touching checkbox—Makes an automatic connection if a component pin is touching a wire. Setting Wiring Preferences Complete the following steps to set how Multisim controls the wiring: 1. • Autowire when wiring components checkbox—Chooses the most efficient path to wire the selected components together. 3. that is. Tip While wiring.Basics Note You cannot change the NC state of a pin that is already wired to a net. Disabling this option gives you more control over the wire path. Or Click to attach the wire to an existing wire or component pin.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Complete the following steps to place a wire using the menu: 1. 2. If you try. without attaching it to a component or starting from a previously placed junction. Click to place a junction on the workspace and then move the mouse to route the wire as desired. 2. as Multisim follows the exact path of your cursor. hold <Shift> to temporarily switch from the selected mode.com . Or Right-click on the workspace and select Place Schematic»Wire from the pop-up menu that appears. Click as desired to lock the wire to a specific point on the workspace. if number of connections is fewer than checkbox—This is especially useful for components with large pin counts. a warning appears indicating that this is not permitted.

press <Ctrl> on your keyboard and click on the wire at the location where you want the drag point added or removed. Or. 4. in the direction of the arrows. Move your cursor anywhere on the wire. wires attached to a component will be deleted when that component is deleted. Enable/disable the Delete associated wires when deleting component checkbox. Click OK. more commonly. A number of drag points appear on the wire. Tip During part movement. Modifying the Wire Path Complete the following steps to change the location of a wire once it is placed: 1. © National Instruments Corporation 2-25 NI Multisim User Manual . 3. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . the wires are disconnected from the component and remain in their original location. Multisim reshapes connected wires to the most efficient path. or a component with more than the set number of connections is moved.Basics number of connections in the associated listbox. hold <Space> to temporarily switch from the selected mode. When the checkbox is disabled. click and drag. When your cursor changes to a double arrow. To add or remove drag points. as shown in (1) in the following figure: 1 1 Drag Points 2. Click on the wire. When enabled. You can add or remove a drag point to give you even more control over the wire. to modify the shape. Click any of these and drag to modify the shape. When you move a component with less than this number of connections.

2. NI Multisim User Manual 2-26 ni.Basics Controlling Wire Color The default color used for wires is controlled by the Sheet Properties dialog box. User Interface. Right-click on the wire and choose Change Color or Segment Color from the pop-up menu that appears. Move the cursor to the pin where you wish to reconnect the wire and click once. 1 1 Cursor 2. as shown in the figure below (1). The wire is now connected to the new location.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . The cursor changes to a crosshair. Complete the following steps to change the color of a placed wire. Place your cursor at the point where you wish to disconnect the wire. 3. Tip You can create a floating (unconnected) junction and reconnect the wire you are moving to that junction by double-clicking on a blank space on the schematic. The cursor changes to an “x” with two parallel lines.Circuit Tab section of Chapter 1. Choose a color and click OK to apply it to the selected item. Click once. for more information. Moving a Wire Complete the following steps to disconnect a wire and move it to another location in your schematic: 1. or a wire segment.com . from its default values: 1. You are presented with a color palette. Refer to the Sheet Properties .

or right-click on the workspace and select Place Schematic»Junction from the pop-up. 2. You can also manually place junctions on the workspace as desired. the two nets are merged together. Complete the following steps to manually add a junction: 1. Note Refer to the Modifying Net Names section for more information on the Net dialog box. Double-click on the wire. a net can be manually renamed to be the same name as another on the same page.Basics Virtual Wiring Within a single page of a circuit. Click Yes. A junction appears at the selected location. Multisim creates a virtual connection between the pins with the same net number. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Click on the location where you want the junction placed. Vcc). © National Instruments Corporation 2-27 NI Multisim User Manual . Change the Net name to match that of the net to which you wish to make the virtual connection. 3. 4. For instance. Complete the following steps to make a virtual connection between components: 1. Click OK. 2. Manually Adding a Junction Multisim automatically inserts junctions when you connect one wire to another wire to differentiate them from wires that are crossing but not connected. as they are critical to your circuit’s connectivity as understood by simulation or PCB layout. Note You should exercise caution when changing net names. The Net dialog box displays. In this case. virtual wiring may not be used across pages or across levels in the hierarchy. enter 21 in the Net name field. Choose Place»Junction. This is called virtual wiring and can be used to reduce the complexity of circuits. if you want to connect the selected net to net 21. Multisim prompts you to confirm that you want this duplication. Except for special reserved nets (for example. The net name that appears on the schematic is shown in the Net name field.

Any wires attached to the component are rerouted automatically to maintain their connections using rubberbanding. but the commands for rotating/flipping placed components that are found in the Edit menu are the same. From the pop-up menu that appears. and directly on the end of component pins. it can be controlled in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box. and values and model information. Menus and Commands. Click and drag a wire from the junction to the desired location and click to place. Complete the following steps to rotate a component: 1. The instructions below describe the pop-up menu method only. Pin numbers will rotate along with the associated pin. Or Choose 90 CounterCW to rotate the component 90 degrees counter clockwise. Refer to the Edit Menu section of Appendix A. Complete the following steps to make a connection from a placed junction: 1. on the workspace without them being attached to any other circuit element. for more information. 2. such as labels.Basics Note You can place junctions on wires. Note Text associated with the component. Rotating/Flipping Placed Components You can rotate or flip a placed component by using the pop-up menu or selecting the component and using commands from the Edit menu.com . 2. 2. Or Choose Flip Vertical to flip the component vertically. If you do not want this to happen. until the cursor changes to a crosshair ( ) symbol. If you place a junction over two intersecting wires. choose Flip Horizontal to flip the component horizontally.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Move your cursor close to the junction. From the pop-up menu that appears. Complete the following steps to flip a component: 1. Right-click on the component. NI Multisim User Manual 2-28 ni. Right-click on the component. choose 90 Clockwise to rotate the component 90 degrees clockwise. will be repositioned and rotated as a result of your action. they will be electrically connected.

Basics Note Text associated with the component. “R?” will match “R1”. 4. Complete the following steps to quickly find a component or net in the workspace: 1. For example. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Enter a string in the Find what field that represents all or part of a reference designator (RefDes) or net name as explained below. The Find Component dialog box appears. 3. for example: • “V1” finds only the exact string “V1” • “*1” finds any string ending with “1” • “V*” finds any string starting with “V” • “*V*” finds any string containing “V” • a “?” anywhere in the string will match exactly one character. select one of the following from the Search From drop-down: • Current Sheet—Search will be conducted on the contents of the current sheet only • Current Design—Search will be conducted on the contents of the current design only • All Open Sheets—Search will be conducted on the contents of all open sheets © National Instruments Corporation 2-29 NI Multisim User Manual . Any wires attached to the component are rerouted automatically. Choose Edit»Find. but is not flipped. but not “R12”. may be repositioned. In the Search Options box. model information and values. In the Search for box. 2. Finding Components in Your Circuit You can use the Find Component dialog box for larger schematic diagrams where you want to quickly locate a component or net. such as labels. select one of the following radio buttons: • All—Searches all elements for entered string • Parts—Searches all parts for entered string • Nets—Searches all nets for entered string • Off-Page Connectors—Searches all off-page connectors for entered string • HB/SC Connectors—Searches all HB/SC connectors for entered string. Wildcards are allowed.

if “1” is entered. search will be for entered string anywhere. Click the Find button. Optionally. search will yield “V1”. select one or both of the following checkboxes in the Search Options box: • Match case—Select if you wish to make the search case sensitive • Match whole word only—Click if you wish to find only whole words that match the entered string. and also select this option. and so on. “C1”. 5. 6.Basics • All Open Designs—Search will be conducted on the contents of all open designs. If you enter a wildcard (*) in the search string. not a wildcard. as shown in the example in the figure below. If not selected. Double-click on the desired search result in the Results tab. R1”.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . The results of your search are displayed in the Results tab of the Spreadsheet View. For example. the * will be treated as a character. NI Multisim User Manual 2-30 ni. as shown in the example in the figure below (1). 1 1 Search Results 7.com . The element is zoomed and selected on the workspace.

Value or None. Note You can also right-click on the desired result and select Go to from the pop-up that appears. © National Instruments Corporation 2-31 NI Multisim User Manual . “_” and “%”. 3. The selected attributes display with the component. 5. you could give the component the manufacturer name or a name that is meaningful to you such as “new resistor” or “revised May 15”. Select the component attributes to display by clicking in the Show column and selecting one of All. The Value field accepts letters. Double-click on the component. numbers. Enter or modify the component Attributes (which can be any name or value you choose to give them). 6. Labeling This section contains the following subjects: • Modifying Component Labels and Attributes • Modifying Net Names • Adding a Title Block • Adding Miscellaneous Text • Adding a Comment • Graphic Annotation • Capturing Screen Area Modifying Component Labels and Attributes Complete the following steps to assign a label or change the reference designator (RefDes) of a placed component: 1. “-” and “_”. numbers and underscores only—no special characters or spaces). Click the Label tab. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Click on the workspace to clear the shading from the display. The Name field accepts letters. numbers. 2. The component’s properties dialog box appears. “+”. “-”. 4. Click OK. Enter or modify the Label and/or RefDes (which must be composed of letters. “+”. For example.Basics 8.

Click OK.Basics Note If you assign the same RefDes to more than one component. you must change the RefDes or cancel before you can proceed. you can modify a net name to something more meaningful to the circuit design. as they are critical to your circuit’s connectivity as understood by simulation and PCB layout. Double-click on the net name and click Yes when prompted. Complete the following steps to unlock a net name that has been locked in place: 1. 2. Double-click on the net name and click Yes when prompted.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Or Right-click on the net name and select Lock/Unlock name position. Complete the following steps to modify a net name: 1. Modifying Net Names Multisim automatically assigns a net name to each node in the circuit. Or Right-click on the net name and de-select Lock/Unlock name position. However. Refer to the Global Nets section of Chapter 4.com . The net name for these is permanently set to “0”. there are some cautions that apply. you can change the label for the net by double-clicking on any wire attached to ground and entering a name in the Label field. Working with Larger Designs. Note You should exercise caution when changing net names. Note If you are planning to modify net names for certain “global” reserved nets such as VCC and GND. The Net dialog box appears. Double-click on the wire. NI Multisim User Manual 2-32 ni. you may wish to change a net name to “Output”. 3. For example. If desired. for more information. Complete the following steps to lock a net name in position so that it will not move when the wire is moved: 1. Because all RefDes’s must be unique. Change the net name as desired. Multisim warns you that this is not possible. Note You are not permitted to change the net name for any wires connected to ground.

bezier curves. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . 2. The selected title block appears attached to your cursor. ovals. Title blocks can include elements such as text. If necessary. Choose Place»Title Block. Entering the Title Block Contents Complete the following steps to edit the contents of the title block: 1. refer to the Title Block Editor section of Chapter 3. When designing the title block. Complete the following steps to add a title block to your circuit: 1. Drag and drop it to the desired location. To add a title block with a new format. Right-click on the title block and select Properties from the pop-up that appears. • Move to»Top Right—Places the title block in the top-right corner of the workspace. You can also move the placed title block by right-clicking on it and selecting one of: • Move to»Top Left—Places the title block in the top-left corner of the workspace. arcs. If desired. navigate to the titleblocks folder. and bitmaps. rectangles. arcs. • Move to»Bottom Right—Places the title block in the bottom-right corner of the workspace. a title block can be included on every page of your design. lines. You choose appropriate fonts depending upon your language of preference. typically the lower-right corner of the page. A standard Open dialog box appears. Or Double-click on the title block. 3. © National Instruments Corporation 2-33 NI Multisim User Manual . Schematic Capture . you can choose a pre-defined field or create your own. The Title Block dialog box appears. Various fields in the title block are automatically completed depending upon the context and various document properties. and then place the new title block on the circuit following the procedure above.Basics Adding a Title Block The Title Block Editor is where you create customized title blocks.Advanced Functions. Select the desired title block template and click Open. • Move to»Bottom Left—Places the title block in the bottom-left corner of the workspace.

NI Multisim User Manual 2-34 ni.Advanced Functions. Corresponds to the #DOC_N field that is placed using the Title Block Editor. select Title Block Editor.com . Note If a field in the Title Block dialog box contains information. • Title—Title of the circuit. Defaults to 0001. • Revision—Revision number of the circuit. Corresponds to the #CUSTOM_1 field that is placed using the Title Block Editor.Basics 2. Corresponds to the #APPROVED field that is placed using the Title Block Editor. Corresponds to the #TITLE field that is placed using the Title Block Editor. for more information. • Checked by—Name of person checking the circuit. Corresponds to the #SN and #TSN fields that are placed using the Title Block Editor. Corresponds to the #CHECKED field that is placed using the Title Block Editor. for example. If this occurs.—Document number. right-click on the title block. • Designed by—Designer’s name. Corresponds to the #DSCRPT field that is placed using the Title Block Editor. • Description—A description for your project. and that information does not appear in your title block. • Sheet—The number of the current sheet and the total number of sheets. • Approved by—Name of person approving the circuit.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Corresponds to the #DATE field that is placed using the Title Block Editor. it is because the field that contains that information was not placed in the title block. • Custom Field 1—Information entered here will be placed in Custom Field 1. The information that displays is described in this step. Corresponds to the #DESIGNED field that is placed using the Title Block Editor. and place the required field in the title block. • Size—Size of the sheet. • Date—Defaults to the date that the circuit was created. Sheet 2 of 3. Refer to the Placing Fields section of Chapter 3. Corresponds to the #REV field that is placed using the Title Block Editor. Schematic Capture . • Document No. For example. “A”. Corresponds to the #FMT field that is placed using the Title Block Editor. Defaults to Project 1. Defaults to the circuit’s filename. Make edits as desired and click OK.

the symbol will be replaced by text as described below: • &p—Page number • &P—Total number of pages • &d—Date • &t—Time • &s—Page name • &j—Project name • &&—Ampersand. The text in the title block will be as wide as the amount of text. It is also dependant on the font size. Caution The width of a field as displayed in the Title Block Editor is not the same as the actual text that is placed in that field in the title block. You can also place the following special symbols in the Title Block dialog box. • Custom Field 4—Information entered here will be placed in Custom Field 4. © National Instruments Corporation 2-35 NI Multisim User Manual . 2. for example to label a particular part of a circuit. Corresponds to the #CUSTOM_4 field that is placed using the Title Block Editor. When you return to the workspace. Corresponds to the #CUSTOM_3 field that is placed using the Title Block Editor. Adding Miscellaneous Text Multisim allows you to add text to a circuit. Click on the location where you want the text placed. Corresponds to the #CUSTOM_2 field that is placed using the Title Block Editor. • Custom Field 5—Information entered here will be placed in Custom Field 5. Choose Place»Text or right-click on the workspace and select Place Graphic»Text from the pop-up. Complete the following steps to add text: 1. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . So if two fields are placed closed to each other they may overlap.Basics • Custom Field 2—Information entered here will be placed in Custom Field 2. A text box with a blinking cursor appears. • Custom Field 3—Information entered here will be placed in Custom Field 3. Corresponds to the #CUSTOM_5 field that is placed using the Title Block Editor.

which can be used to show engineering change orders.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Adding a Comment Adding a comment permits “redlining”. Click elsewhere on the circuit window to stop adding text. NI Multisim User Manual 2-36 ni. When a component with an attached comment is moved. Choose Pen Color from the pop-up menu that appears. Right-click on the text box. 2. The text box correctly sizes when you finish typing and click elsewhere in the workspace. Complete the following steps to delete text: 1. You can “pin” a comment to the workspace. Right-click on the text box.com . Complete the following steps to change the font options for the text: 1. and choose the desired color. Type the text. Choose Delete from the pop-up menu that appears. for more information. 2. Move the cursor to the desired location and click to place the comment. Select the text and press Delete on your keyboard. and choose the desired font options. 2. Select Place»Comment. Complete the following steps to change the color of text: 1. Choose Font from the pop-up menu that appears. the comment also moves. Right-click on the text box. Complete the following steps to pin a comment to a component or the workspace: 1. Refer to the Pop-up From a Selected Text Block or Graphic section of Chapter 1. 2. 4. or directly to a component. to facilitate collaborative work among team members. or to allow background information to be attached to a design. User Interface.Basics 3. Or 1.

If you wish to show the note’s contents.Basics 1 2 1 Comment Pinned to Component 2 Comment on Workspace The figure above shows a comment “pinned” to a component (1). Otherwise. enable the Show popup window checkbox. Double-click on the placed comment and the select the Display tab. 4. for more information. the comment displays. Optionally. if the component is moved. Change this if desired. 3. To enter text without using the Comment Properties dialog box. as shown in the figure above (2). If you checked Show popup window in the Display tab. In the Size box. Type the desired text in the field at the bottom of the dialog. Click OK. Complete the following steps to enter text in the placed comment: 1. 5. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . the Comment icon displays. © National Instruments Corporation 2-37 NI Multisim User Manual . Refer to the Visibility Tab section of Chapter 1. the comment moves with it. 6. The layer on which the comment appears displays in the Drawing Layer list. select Edit Comment from the pop-up that appears and type the desired text. enter the Width and Height. Note “Tooltip” refers to the text that appears attached to the cursor if you hover it above a tool button. right-click on the placed comment. 2. It does not move when components are moved. The Comment Properties dialog box appears. A comment can also be placed on the workspace. Optionally. or enable Auto-Resize to have the info box automatically resize to show all content. set the Background and Text colors in the Color box. click on the Font tab to change the comment’s font. User Interface.

1 1 Drag Handles Note The size can also be changed from the Display tab of the Comment Properties dialog box. Hover the cursor over the comment. as in the example (1) in the figure below. Drag the handles that appear. Right-click on the desired Comment icon. 2.com . Move the cursor to hide the comment. Graphic Annotation Use Graphic Annotation to add the following graphic elements to your workspace: • Line • Multiline • Rectangle • Ellipse • Arc • Polygon • Picture • Comment. Complete the following steps to change the size of a displayed comment: 1.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Select Show Comment/Probe from the pop-up that appears. 2. NI Multisim User Manual 2-38 ni. Complete the following steps to see the contents of a hidden comment: 1. Select its textbox.Basics Complete the following steps to display a hidden comment: 1. 2.

double-click the mouse button.Basics Complete the following steps to add a graphic element: 1. The cursor changes to a crosshair. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . (To add an arrowhead. Place the crosshair where you wish to start the rectangle and click and hold the mouse button. right-click on the placed line and select Arrow from the pop-up). Place the crosshair where you wish to start the multiline and click the mouse button once. Drag the crosshair to where you wish to end the line and release the mouse button. The text box automatically sizes to display your text. (To add an arrowhead. The cursor changes to a crosshair. If the Graphic Annotation toolbar is not already showing. Then click on the workspace in the location where you wish to place the text and type in the desired text. Click on this button to draw a multiline. Click on this button to draw a line. click anywhere on the workspace. Or Right-click in the menu area and select Graphic Annotation from the pop-up that appears. Drag the crosshair to where you wish to end the rectangle and release the mouse button. When you have drawn the last segment of the multiline. Click on this button to draw a rectangle. which consists of multiple connected line segments. When finished. Repeat until all segments of the multiline have been drawn. Button Description Click on this button to place text on the workspace. Click on the button in the Graphic Annotation toolbar for the desired graphic element and follow the directions for that element from the table below. Move the crosshair to where you wish to end the current segment of the multiline and click the button once. The cursor changes to a crosshair. select View»Toolbars»Graphic Annotation. 2. right-click on the placed line and select Arrow from the pop-up). © National Instruments Corporation 2-39 NI Multisim User Manual . Place the crosshair where you wish to start the line and click and hold the mouse button.

double-click the mouse button. but when released. Place the crosshair where you wish to start the polygon and click the mouse button once. The arc will appear as an ellipse while it is being drawn. The cursor changes to a crosshair. Drag the crosshair to where you wish to end the arc and release the mouse button. When you have drawn the last segment of the polygon. Click on this button to draw an arc. Click on this button to place a picture on the workspace. Move the crosshair to where you wish to end the current segment of the polygon and click the button once. A dialog opens from where you can select the desired bitmap image. see Adding a Comment. You can place either a . NI Multisim User Manual 2-40 ni. Drag the crosshair to where you wish to end the ellipse and release the mouse button. Repeat until all segments of the polygon have been drawn.bmp or .Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . For details. Click on this button to place a comment on the workspace. Click on this button to draw a polygon. Place the crosshair where you wish to place the center of the ellipse and click and hold the mouse button. The cursor changes to a crosshair.dib file. Place the crosshair where you wish to place the center of the arc and click and hold the mouse button. The cursor changes to a crosshair.com .Basics Button Description Click on this button to draw an ellipse. thereby giving the arc. the right side only of the ellipse will be shown.

1 1 Drag Points Note Placed graphics can also be manipulated using the pop-up menu. as in the example (1) shown in the figure below. Select the graphic. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Select Tools»Capture Screen Area. indicating that the selection frame can be moved to a different location. Optionally. A selection frame appears on your workspace. you can paste it into the Circuit Description Box. A crosshair is added to the cursor. Capturing Screen Area You can capture an area of the screen and then manipulate the image as you would any other screen capture contained in the system clipboard. for more information. 2. • Drag the selection frame to the desired location. Refer to the Circuit Description Box section for more information. to move the frame to a different location: • Move your cursor to the border of the frame. Refer to the Pop-up From a Selected Text Block or Graphic section of Chapter 1. Complete the following steps to copy a section of your screen to the clipboard: 1. © National Instruments Corporation 2-41 NI Multisim User Manual .Basics Complete the following steps to change the size of placed graphic elements: 1. User Interface. Click and drag the drag points that appear. For example. 2.

Click the copy button at the top left corner of the selection frame. NI Multisim User Manual 2-42 ni. 4.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Optionally. The image inside the selection frame is copied to the system clipboard. To edit the contents of the Circuit Description Box. select Tools»Description Box Editor. Circuit Description Box In addition to adding text to a particular portion of a circuit.com . 5. The contents of the Circuit Description Box are viewed in the top pane of the Circuit Description Box window (select View»Circuit Description Box). You can also place bitmaps. Click the x at the top right corner of the selection frame to close it. • Drag the cursor to re-size the selection frame. sound and video in the Circuit Description Box.Basics 3. to re-size the selection frame: • Move the cursor to one of the sizing handles. you can add general descriptions to your circuit using the Circuit Description Box.

Refer to the Description Edit Bar section for more information. 3. When you are finished entering text. Complete the following steps to add or edit a description: 1. To print your description. • Insert Object Dialog Box—Use to select the type of object for insertion. © National Instruments Corporation 2-43 NI Multisim User Manual . Formatting the Circuit Description Box You can format the contents of the Circuit Description Box as listed below: • Paragraph Dialog Box—Use to enter paragraph formatting information. Refer to the Linking a Form to a Circuit section for more information. • Tabs Dialog Box—Use to enter tab settings. click the Print button. Use the Description Edit Bar to edit the contents of the Circuit Description Box as needed. etc. from the Edit Description window. or choose Insert» Insert Object to place a bitmap. Choose Tools»Description Box Editor. 4. • Date and Time Dialog Box—Use to place a formatted date and/or time.Basics Note The bottom pane of the Circuit Description Box contains any questions that you have entered using Multisim’s Forms functionality. Note Changes made in the Edit Description window are not reflected in the Circuit Description Box (selected by View»Circuit Description Box) until you exit the Edit Description window. 2. Enter text by typing directly into the window. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . The Edit Description window closes and you are returned to the main Multisim workspace. select File»Close. • Properties Dialog Box—Use to set measurement units and text wrapping settings. The Edit Description window appears.

Note The above commands are also available by selecting Format»Font. Note Refer to the Description Edit Bar section for more information. • Insert Bullet button—Click to insert a bullet at the beginning of the selected paragraph(s). • Bold button—Click to make the selection bold.Basics Formatting Circuit Description Box Text You can format currently-selected text in the Circuit Description Box by using the following commands from the Description Edit Bar: • Font button—Click to select the desired font settings. 2. Complete the following steps to enter paragraph formatting information for the Circuit Description Box: 1. Open the Edit Description window as described in the Circuit Description Box section. • Left Justification button—Click to align the selected paragraph(s) along the left margin.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . • Color button—Click to display a palette where you pick a color for the text. This palette will also display if you select Format»Font Color. You can also select Format»Align Center to perform this command. Select Format»Paragraph to display the Paragraph dialog box. You can also select Format»Insert a Bullet to perform this command. You can also select Format»Align Right to perform this command. • Right Justification button—Click to align the selected paragraph(s) along the right margin. • Italic button—Click to italicize the selection. You can also select Format»Align Left to perform this command. • Underline button—Click to underline the selection. NI Multisim User Manual 2-44 ni. Paragraph Dialog Box Use the Paragraph dialog box to enter paragraph formatting information for the Circuit Description Box. • Center Justification button—Click to center-align the selected paragraph(s).com .

In the Indentation box. Enter the desired position for the tab (for example 1. or center-aligned. Open the Edit Description window as described in the Circuit Description Box section. Date and Time Dialog Box Use the Date and Time dialog box to enter a formatted date and/or time in the Circuit Description Box. Click OK. enter the measurements in the following fields as desired: • Left—The distance the left side of the paragraph is indented from the left margin. 2. Open the Edit Description window as described in the Circuit Description Box section. Highlight the desired tab setting and click Clear. 2. Select Format»Tab to display the Tabs dialog box. select whether the paragraph is left-. In the Alignment drop-down list.25”) in the Tab Stop Position field and click Set. © National Instruments Corporation 2-45 NI Multisim User Manual . click Clear All. Complete the following steps to place a date and/or time in the Circuit Description Box: 1. Note You can also click in the top ruler bar to place a tab.Basics 3. • Right—The distance the right side of the paragraph is indented from the right margin. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . 5. Complete the following steps to enter tab settings for the Circuit Description Box: 1. 4. • First Line—The distance the first line of the paragraph is indented from the left margin. Tabs Dialog Box Use the Tabs dialog box to enter tab settings for the Circuit Description Box. Complete the following steps to remove a tab setting: 1. 3. To clear all tabs. right-.

Properties Dialog Box Use the Properties dialog box to select the measurement units and text wrapping settings used in the Circuit Description Box.Basics 2. enable Automatic Word Selection to select one word at a time when you drag the cursor. select one of Inches. 3. 2. Insert Object Dialog Box Use the Insert Object dialog box to select an object. Open the Edit Description window as described in the Circuit Description Box section. 2. Centimeters. • Wrap to ruler—Typed text will go to the next line when it reaches the page margin. 3. • Wrap to window—Typed text will go to the next line when it reaches the edge of the window. Select the desired date/time format from the Available formats list and click OK to place the selection. such as a bitmap or chart. Optionally. In the Measurement units box. 5. Picas. Complete the following steps to insert an object: 1.com . 6. 4. Select Insert»Insert Date to display the Date and Time dialog box.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . To create a new object. Select Insert»Insert Object to display the Insert Object dialog box. NI Multisim User Manual 2-46 ni. Click OK. Click at the location where you wish to place the date and/or time. 3. enable Create New. Complete the following steps to set the measurement units and text wrapping settings: 1. 4. to insert in the Circuit Description Box. Select Options»Rich Edit Options to display the Properties dialog box and click the Options tab. Click the Rich Text tab and select one of: • No wrap—Typed text will be on one line until you press the ENTER key. Points. clear this checkbox. If you wish to select one character at a time. Open the Edit Description window as described in the Circuit Description Box section.

Enable the Create from File button. Optionally. 6. graphics or video with events in the simulation. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture .Basics 4. 3. Enter the desired filepath and name in the File field. or click Browse and navigate to the desired file from the Browse dialog box that appears. enable Display As Icon to view an icon representing the file. as in the figure below. Complete the following steps to create an object from an existing file: 1. Scrolling with Events During Simulation Along with descriptive text and graphics. 5. Select the desired object from the Object Type list. Click OK. You do this by placing measurement probes in your design and setting the probe properties with the events that you would like to have synchronized with the scrolling or display of text. Any updates to the original file are reflected in the object. Enter text in the Circuit Description Box as desired. Optionally. 2. Scrolling Text During Simulation Complete the following steps to make text scroll automatically during a simulation: 1. 2. the Circuit Description Box lets you synchronize scrolling and display of text. Select Simulate»Instruments»Measurement Probe and click to place a probe at the desired point. The simulation must not be running. graphics or video. enable Link to link the object to the original file. © National Instruments Corporation 2-47 NI Multisim User Manual .

select Start Scrolling. The blinking text cursor moves to the Condition(s) field. 6. meaning the condition required to scroll the text will be achieved when the voltage at the probe equals 5 volts. 3. Note Refer to the Measurement Probe section of Chapter 9. 7. and click on the Description Box tab. When you run the simulation. type the scroll speed. In this case we are entering the condition “V=5”. In the Parameter field. Note To disable a trigger. 4. when the voltage is equal to 5 V. 9. 5.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Click Apply. highlight it in the Description Box Triggers area and deselect the Enabled checkbox.com . Click on the button to the right of the Condition(s) field and build the equation from the pop-up that appears. “100” (this equals a scroll rate of 100 pixels per 10 seconds). Instruments. Click New. For example. From the Action drop-down list.Basics This is the point where the desired event occurs. the text will scroll when the voltage at the probe equals 5 V. for more information on the probe. 8. Double-click on the placed probe to display the Probe Properties dialog box. for example. Click OK to close the dialog box. NI Multisim User Manual 2-48 ni.

Select Insert»Insert Object and select Create from File. If you wish to have changes to the original file reflected in Multisim. 4. The simulation must not be running at this point. © National Instruments Corporation 2-49 NI Multisim User Manual . Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . as in the example in the figure below. enable Link. Playing a Video Clip Complete the following steps to play a video clip during simulation: 1. The text in the Circuit Description Box will scroll when the conditions set in the Description Box tab of the Probe Properties dialog box are met. Click OK to place the clip. Click Run/Resume Simulation in the Simulation toolbar. Note Remember to leave the Circuit Description Box open when you click Simulate. The clip’s filename (in this case. “Filmclip. Enter the name of the label in the Label Name field of the Description Label dialog that appears and click OK. 8. Click once on the clip to select it and select Insert»Insert Label. 7. 6. Open the Edit Description window by selecting Tools»Description Box Editor. Click at the point where you wish to place the video clip. 2. Click Browse and navigate to the desired video clip. Select Simulate»Instruments»Measurement Probe and click to place a probe at the desired point.mpg”) appears enclosed in rails as shown in the figure below. 5. 3.Basics 10.

meaning the condition required to run the clip will be achieved when the voltage at the probe is 5 volts.com . 10. 16. For example. type the name of the label that you placed around the video clip in the Circuit Description Box. In the Parameter field. and the film clip. the voltage becomes equal to 5 V. 9. Description Label Dialog Box You can insert labels in the Circuit Description Box that mark points where a certain action is to occur during simulation. Click on the button to the right of the Condition(s) field and build the equation from the pop-up that apppears. For example. the video clip will play when the voltage at the probe equals 5 V. The blinking text cursor moves to the Condition(s) field. Use the Description Label dialog box to create a label to insert in the Circuit Description Box. You can also run audio clips during simulation using the above procedure. NI Multisim User Manual 2-50 ni. 13.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Double-click on the placed probe to display the Probe Properties dialog box. 15. are both marked with labels. In this case we are entering the condition “V=5”. The video clip will run when the parameters set in the Description Box tab of the Probe Properties dialog box are met. and click on the Description Box tab. we used Label 2. Click Accept. you might want to jump to a specific point in the text when the voltage at a specific node in the circuit drops below a pre-set value. When you run the simulation. select Play Media Clip.Basics Note This point is where the desired condition will occur. In this case. Note Remember to leave the Circuit Description Box open when you click Simulate. Click OK to close the dialog box. 12. (as described in the Scrolling with Events During Simulation section). Or. The specific point in the text. you may wish to run a film clip when another parameter has been met. Click Run/Resume Simulation in the Simulation toolbar. 14. These actions are set up in the Description Box tab of the Probe Properties dialog box. Click New. 11. From the Action drop-down list.

To rename a label. Open the Edit Description window as described in the Circuit Description Box section. If you wish the content of the label to display in the Circuit Description Box. 5. 2 1 1 Rails Indicate Label 2 Label Contents Edit Labels Dialog Box Complete the following steps to edit existing labels in the Circuit Description Box: 1. Select Edit»Labels to display the Edit Labels dialog box. Select a block of text or an object that you wish to label. enable the Show content in description bar checkbox. 6. Enter a name for the label in the Label Name field. (This will be the content of the label. Click OK to accept your selections and close the dialog box. enable/disable checkboxes as desired. highlight the desired label and click Remove. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . highlight the desired label and click Rename. enclosed by upper and lower rails (1). © National Instruments Corporation 2-51 NI Multisim User Manual . To show/hide the contents of labels in the Circuit Description Box. The label contents appear as show in the example in the figure below (2). Note The content of the label is the text or object that you selected in step 2.Basics Complete the following steps to insert a label: 1.) 3. Open the Edit Description window as described in the Circuit Description Box section. 2. 2. Select Insert»Insert Label to display the Insert Label dialog box. 4. To delete a label.

Refer to the Linking a Form to a Circuit section for more information. Description Edit Bar The Description Edit Bar contains the buttons described in the table below. where you select the format for the date and time. V=5). Button Description Add Question Link button. Refer to the Date and Time Dialog Box section for more information. Displays the Insert Object dialog box.Basics Other Actions You can set up the following actions in the Description Box tab of the Probe Properties dialog box: • Jump to Label—When the conditions entered in the Condition field are met (for example. Displays the Date and Time dialog box. Create New Label button. the text in the Circuit Description Box will jump to the label that you entered in the Parameter field. Refer to the Description Label Dialog Box section for more information. V=5). Displays the Options dialog box. • Stop Scrolling—When the conditions entered in the Condition field are met (for example. Insert Embedded Object button. the simulation will pause for the amount of time (in seconds) that you entered in the Parameter field. View and Select Options button. Refer to the Properties Dialog Box section for more information. Insert Date and Time button. • Pause Simulation—When the conditions entered in the Condition field are met (for example. Displays the Description Label dialog box. NI Multisim User Manual 2-52 ni. V=5). Refer to the Insert Object Dialog Box section for more information. scrolling of the text in the Circuit Description Box will stop. Inserts a question link at the current cursor position.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture .com . where you enter the name of the new label to be inserted. where you select measurement units and text wrapping settings. where you select the type of object to insert.

Displays the Paragraph dialog box. where you enter paragraph formatting information. where you enter tab formatting information. Insert Bullet button. Displays the Edit Labels dialog box. Aligns the selected paragraph(s) along the left margin. size and color of the selected text. Center-aligns the selected paragraph(s). Displays a color palette where you pick a color for the currently-selected text. Makes the selection bold. Refer to the Edit Labels Dialog Box section for more information. Makes the selection italic. Paragraph Format button. Changes the font. Italic button. Left Justification button. Bold button. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . Color button. Insert Tabs button. Underline button. Right Justification button. Refer to the Paragraph Dialog Box section for more information.Basics Button Description Edit Labels button. Font button. Center Justification button. Underlines the selection. Inserts a bullet at the beginning of the selected paragraph(s). © National Instruments Corporation 2-53 NI Multisim User Manual . Displays the Tabs dialog box. Aligns the selected paragraph(s) along the right margin. Refer to the Tabs Dialog Box section for more information.

• Data Entry—A field for limited data entry is provided. Once the form has been completed. • True/False—A statement is made on the form and either True or False is selected as the response. including the completed form. including the completed form. the circuit file. To access this dialog. The Edit Form dialog box displays.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . take the person completing the form directly to a linked question. • Free Form—A field for more extensive data entry is provided. The following sections discuss how to create a form. NI Multisim User Manual 2-54 ni. This is useful where clarification or further explanation of a specific question may require more text than you want to put on the form. select Edit»Forms/Questions. Education edition users will find this particularly useful for assignments and tests that are given to students to be completed remotely. or anywhere feedback on a design is needed. You can also insert links in the Circuit Description Box that will. can be returned to the originator via email.Basics Linking a Form to a Circuit You can use Multisim’s form functionality to send circuits for approval. Once the questions have been answered. Select Edit»Forms/Questions. please note that the dialog box where you enter the questions is called Edit Questions in the Education Edition of Multisim. Complete the following steps to create a form: 1. • Title—Text entered here appears as a title when the form is viewed. and how the recipient should complete and submit the form. Creating Forms When reviewing these instructions. the circuit file. how to set form submission options. design reviews. A form can include any of the following types of questions: • Multiple Choice—The correct response is selected from two or more possible responses. can be emailed to the instructor at the click of a button. how to link to the form from the Circuit Description Box. when double-clicked. Refer to the Linking to Questions section for more information.com .

4. the question types appear in the Form tree of the Edit Form dialog box as shown in the figure below.Basics • Instruction—Enter instructions as desired in this field. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . As you proceed. • Data Entry—Enter a question or instruction in the Question field. Use the up and down arrows to change the position of the selected question in the tree. The sequence of the questions in the tree will be reflected when you view the completed form in lower pane of the Circuit Description Box. • Free Form—Enter a question or instruction in the Free Form field. Click on the Remove Selected Question button to remove it completely. edit. 2. Click on the Add a question button and select the desired question type from the pop-up that appears. 3. or delete items in this area as desired. You can add. 5. click OK to close the Edit Form dialog box. • True/False—Enter a question requiring a true or false answer in the Question field. Once you have entered the desired questions. © National Instruments Corporation 2-55 NI Multisim User Manual . The Edit Form dialog box changes to reflect your selection. Enter the question based on the following: • Multiple Choice—Enter a question in the Question field and enter possible responses in the Candidate Answers fields. • User Profile—Each line entered here appears as a separate line with a user-editable field when the questions are viewed from the form. Click on a specific question in the tree to view its contents in the dialog box. Text entered here appears above the first question when the form is viewed.

please note that the dialog box where you enter the questions is called Edit Questions in the Education Edition of Multisim.Basics 6. Refer to the Circuit Description Box section for more information. NI Multisim User Manual 2-56 ni. select Edit»Questions. 3. 2. listing all questions that are on the current form. 5. Your changes. Note Refer to the Completing Forms section for more information. Highlight the question that you wish to link to and click OK. 7.com . The Select a Form dialog box appears. 4. Linking to Questions You can insert links in the Circuit Description Box that will. before it is sent for completion. The link is placed at the cursor’s positon. etc. including the links. 6. Place the cursor where you wish to insert a link and select Insert»Insert Question Link. appear in the Circuit Description Box. when double-clicked. When reviewing these instructions. Save the Multisim circuit file. Enter text. Select View»Circuit Description Box.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . To access this dialog. take the person completing the form directly to the linked question. Insert other links as desired and close the Description Box Editor. via email) to the desired recipients. The questions are displayed in the bottom pane of the Circuit Description Box. The completed circuit file can be electronically sent (for example. Double-click on a link in the Circuit Description Box to jump to the linked question in the lower pane of the Circuit Description Box. Create the form as detailed in the Creating Forms section. Select Tools»Description Box Editor. 7. graphics. Complete the following steps to insert links in the Circuit Description Box to specific questions in a form: 1. in the usual fashion. Setting Form Submission Options Form submission options are usually set by the person that creates the form. which now includes the form.

Select View»Circuit Description Box. • Body—Enter text to be placed in the body of the email message. A standard Print dialog appears. • To submit the completed questions by email. including the completed questions will be attached to © National Instruments Corporation 2-57 NI Multisim User Manual . • Subject—Enter text to be placed in the email’s subject line. Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . click Print. 2. 3. Click OK to close the Edit Form dialog box. Name. The circuit file. Enter the desired settings and click Print. Note Refer to the Creating Forms and the Completing Forms sections for more information. you can double-click on a link to jump directly to the associated question. Questions are answered directly from the Circuit Description Box. 3. 4. Completing Forms Complete and submit the form from a Multisim circuit that you received as explained below. Select Edit»Forms/Questions. Click Options in the Categories area and complete the following: • Email the circuit file to—Enable checkbox and enter the desired email address. Enter the default information in the fields found at the top of the form in the lower pane of the Circuit Description Box (for example. Tip If the Circuit Description Box contains links to questions . These fields may vary from circuit to circuit. Submit the completed questions as described below: • To submit the completed questions on paper. Date). 2.Basics Complete the following steps to set options for submitting completed questions: 1. click Submit. Complete the questions by selecting the desired response for multiple choice and true/false questions. • Display the message—Enable checkbox and enter text that you wish to appear in the message that appears on the Multisim workspace when you click Submit. or typing in answers to data entry and free form questions. Complete the following steps to answer questions: 1. The Edit Form dialog box displays.

• Current Circuit—Prints the window that is currently active on the workspace.Basics an email that is addressed as set up in the On Submit options. including: • whether to output in color or black and white. Complete the following steps to set the printing environment for circuits: 1. Select File»Print Options»Print Circuit Setup. 2. NI Multisim User Manual 2-58 ni. • Background—Includes the background in printed output. 3. • page margins for printing.com . • Entire Design—Prints all circuits. Refer to the Setting Form Submission Options section for more information. • Instruments—Prints the circuit and faces of the instruments used in the circuit on separate sheets. Working with Larger Designs. • scaling of the circuit’s image to fit the printed output. • Current and Subcircuits—Prints the currently active window and any subcircuits or hierarchical blocks that it contains. for more information about hierarchical blocks and subcircuits. Printing the Circuit Multisim allows you to control specific aspects of your printing. Use for color printers or white on black output. hierarchical blocks and multi-pages from the design which includes the currently active window. Send this email in the usual manner. This option is disabled if In Black/White is selected. • whether to include the background in the printed output. subcircuits. colored components print in shades of grey.Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . • which pages of a design to print. When disabled. Set the Page Margins. Zooms and Page Orientation options as desired. Set the Output Options as desired: • In Black/White—Prints the circuit in black and white (for non-color printers). Refer to the Hierarchical Design section of Chapter 4.

or click Set As Default to set the printing environment for all circuits. © National Instruments Corporation 2-59 NI Multisim User Manual . Chapter 2 Schematic Capture . To print the circuit file.Basics 4. To preview your file before printing. We recommend that you set your print options first. The circuit appears in a preview window where you can zoom in. move from page to page. and send the circuit to the printer using the provided tool buttons. choose File»Print Preview. Click OK to set the printing environment for the current circuit. choose File»Print.

• the model of the placed component. these properties determine some or all of the following: • the identifying information and labels about the placed component to be displayed on the circuit window. These properties affect only the placed component. • the component’s value or model and footprint. © National Instruments Corporation 3-1 NI Multisim User Manual .Schematic Capture . how the placed component will be used in analyses. for more information. for more information. Refer to the Modifying Component Labels and Attributes section of Chapter 2. • for some components. Placed Component Properties Each component placed on the circuit window has a set of properties that control certain aspects of it beyond those stored in the Multisim database. User Interface.Circuit Tab section of Chapter 1. Some of the features described in this chapter may not be available in your edition of Multisim. Schematic Capture - Basics. not other instances of that component in other circuits or other locations in this circuit. Refer to the Sheet Properties . Refer to the release notes for a list of the features in your edition. • user fields.Advanced 3 Functions This chapter describes the advanced functions involved in creating a circuit in Multisim. • the faults to be used for the placed component. Displaying Identifying Information about a Placed Component The settings in the Circuit tab of the Sheet Properties dialog box determine which identifying information is displayed on your circuit. Depending on the type of component.

Viewing a Placed Component’s Value/Model The Value tab of the “properties” dialog box for a component shows the value/model being used for the placed component. 4. “Virtual” components.Advanced Functions You can also override these settings for an individual placed component. 5. purchasable component with values that include footprints and package types for use in PCB layout programs. Double-click on the component. it corresponds to a real. and disable the identifying information you do not want displayed for this component. Note When this option is enabled. 3. they will give you an idea of how such a circuit will function when prototyped. the types of identifying information displayed for the selected component are controlled by the circuit’s settings. Disable Use Schematic Global Setting. the contents of the Value tab will differ when you double-click on a placed component. like Ultiboard. Click the Display tab.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Real Components In one sense of the word. all components found in Multisim are virtual.com . if you wish to hide the component’s reference designator. 2. However. Complete the following steps to set the identifying information to be displayed for a placed component: 1. you can replace the “virtual” NI Multisim User Manual 3-2 ni. give you a means to experiment with a specific component’s parameters early in the design process. Once you have determined the desired parameters. Depending on the component. when a “real” component is referred to in this manual. Enable the identifying information you want displayed for this component. however. Click OK to save your settings. A properties dialog box for the selected component appears. They are virtual representations of components like diodes and transistors. Wired together and simulated in Multisim. as described here. The “Show” options become available. disable Show RefDes. For example.

or capacitor: 1. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Change the parameters as desired. For real components. Double-click on the component and select the Value tab. Resistors. Click on Edit Component in DB. © National Instruments Corporation 3-3 NI Multisim User Manual . inductor. Component Editing. Complete the following steps to edit the component in the database: 1. 2. and click OK. Refer to the Introduction to Component Editing section of Chapter 6. 2.Advanced Functions component with a “real” component (for example. substitute a virtual diode with a 1N1199C diode). the tab looks similar to this: Note Refer to the Virtual Components section for information on virtual components. Inductors and Capacitors Complete the following steps to edit the value of a resistor.

Schematic Capture . Double-click the component to display its properties dialog box. Make a selection based on the following: • Current Instance Parameters field—Available for standard Cadence® PSpice® models that contain paramaters (PARAMS). Click Edit Model in the Value tab. • Cancel—Closes the window without making the changes.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . or capacitance model. The button becomes active when a change is made to the model information. refer to the Component Reference help file. Complete the following steps to edit the selected component’s model: 1. Edit Model Dialog Box You can edit the model of a placed component using the Edit Model dialog box. 4. changes made here apply to either the selected component.Basics. or all components for the same part on the active workspace. The Edit Model dialog box appears. NI Multisim User Manual 3-4 ni. inductors. Parameters for specific R. (that is. 5. Caution Depending on your selection in the above step. 2. Inductors or Capacitors section of Chapter 2. Enter edits to PARAMS here. The button becomes active when a change is made to the model information. as these are all generated using a common resistance. • Change All Models—Changes all models for the same part on the active workspace only. 3.com . or capacitors. inductance. or C devices are set during or after part placement. • Change Part Model—Changes the model information for the selected component only. They do not apply to the same component in the database from which it was selected. • Restore—Restores the model to its original state. Edit the model in the listbox (unlabelled) as desired. for more information. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box. The button becomes active when a change is made to the model information. L. Refer to the Placing Resistors. Note This procedure does not apply to resistors.Advanced Functions Note For complete details on the contents of the Value tab for these types of components. not in the database).

Component Editing. Virtual Components Virtual components are not real. these components will not be exported to PCB layout software. © National Instruments Corporation 3-5 NI Multisim User Manual . Complete the following steps to edit the selected component’s footprint: 1. Click OK. you could not go to a supplier and purchase them. but no footprint. This is to remind you that. They are provided for your convenience to allow you to simulate “what-if” scenarios. Refer to the Select a Footprint dialog box section of Chapter 6. Note Click Map Pins to display the Advanced Pin Mapping dialog. They have a symbol and a model. The Edit Footprint dialog box appears. Refer to the Advanced Pin Mapping Dialog section of Chapter 6. By default. Or Click Change to display the Change Footprint dialog box. Select the desired footprint. Component Editing. Multisim treats them slightly differently from real components. for more information. since they are not real.Advanced Functions Edit Footprint Dialog Box You can edit the footprint of a selected component using the Edit Footprint dialog box. 3. Click Select From Database to display the Select a Footprint dialog box. 2. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Enter the desired Footprint Manufacturer and Footprint Type and click OK to return to the Edit Footprint dialog box. Double-click on the component and click on Edit Footprint in the component’s Value tab. for information about using the Select a Footprint dialog box. that is. virtual components are shown in a different color from that of real components on your schematic.

Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . You can modify any of these fields. These components offer additional parameters in the Value tab. such as power sources. you can determine how they are to be used in any analyses you might perform on the circuit. the Value tab looks similar to this: Note The contents of the Value tab change depending on the component selected. whose value can be set manually.com . NI Multisim User Manual 3-6 ni. Controlling How a Placed Component is Used in Analyses For some components.Advanced Functions For virtual components.

4. Click OK. 3. Double-click on the component. for more information. Modify the settings as desired. The titles of the user fields are entered and edited from the Database Manager. Click the Value tab. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Editing a Placed Component’s User Fields Components have up to 20 user fields that provide user-specific information about the component (for example. Refer to the Modifying User Field Titles and Content section of Chapter 5. hyperlink).Advanced Functions Complete the following steps to control how the component is used in analyses: 1. 2. Components. The “properties” dialog box for the component appears. manufacturer. vendor. © National Instruments Corporation 3-7 NI Multisim User Manual .

Assigning Faults to Components You may want to assign faults to analog components for instructional purposes.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . 2. Double-click on the component. Complete the following steps to assign a fault to a placed component: 1. Note You cannot assign faults to digital components. as in the following example: Note The contents of the Fault tab vary depending on the component type. In the Value column. click in the field beside the desired user field Title and enter the desired information. Click the Fault tab and select the terminal(s) to which the fault should apply.com . such as troubleshooting exercises. NI Multisim User Manual 3-8 ni. Setting a Placed Component’s Faults You can assign a fault to any terminal of the placed component using the Fault tab of that component’s properties dialog box. Double-click on the component to display its properties dialog box. 2. The component’s properties dialog box appears. You can manually assign faults to individual components in a circuit or let Multisim randomly assign faults to various components across a circuit. Click on the User Fields tab.Advanced Functions Complete the following steps to edit the contents of a placed component’s user fields: 1. 3.

• Short—Assigns a very low resistance to the selected terminals. as if the wire leading to the terminals was broken. Use the up/down keys or enter numerical values directly in the Short. in parallel with the selected terminals. If you specify a number of leaks. • Leakage—Assigns the resistance value specified in the fields below the option. so the component has no measurable affect on the circuit. Click OK to save your changes. Note The Auto Fault option is disabled until a component is placed on the workspace. © National Instruments Corporation 3-9 NI Multisim User Manual . Note You cannot assign faults to digital components. Complete the following steps to use the auto fault option: 1. The Auto Fault dialog box appears. Using the Auto Fault Option When you use the Auto Fault option. that you want Multisim to assign to placed components in the circuit. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Choose Simulate»Auto Fault Option. 4. the number of faults per different type of fault. optionally. or enter a numerical value in the Any field to let Multisim randomly select the type of faults to assign (in the quantity entered). Enable the type of fault you want assigned to a terminal: • None—No fault. and Leak fields. • Open—Assigns a very high resistance to the selected terminals. 2. you specify the number of any type of fault or. 4.Advanced Functions 3. enter a number and unit of measurement in the Specify Leak Resistance fields. 3. Open. Click OK to apply the faults and return to the circuit window. Note You cannot assign faults to digital components. This causes the current to leak past the terminals instead of going through them.

• Min Width—Trace’s minimum allowable width. • Trace Width—Width of the traces after export to PCB layout. Schematic Capture .Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Spreadsheet View Nets Tab The Nets tab contains the following columns: • Net Name—The net’s name.Advanced Functions Spreadsheet View The Spreadsheet View allows fast advanced viewing and editing of parameters including component details such as footprints. Refer to the Electrical Rules Checking and the Result Pane sections for more information. • Go to—Selects the item on the workspace.com . Right-click on the desired result to display the pop-up menu. Select one of: • Copy—Copies entire contents of Results tab onto clipboard. • Sheet—The filename of the sheet on which the net is found. Default is based on the color scheme selected in the Circuit tab of the Sheet Properties dialog box. attributes and design constraints and provides a global perspective on object properties. The results of an Edit»Find command will also appear in the Results tab. 2. Unit of measure is set in Ultiboard. the Results tab will display the results of Electrical Rules Checks (ERCs). Unit of measure is set in Ultiboard. • Color—The net’s color. • Clear Results—Clears content of Results tab. for more information. Pop-up from the Results tab Complete the following steps to use the pop-up menu on the results of an ERC or Find: 1. Spreadsheet View Results Tab If you select Result Pane in the ERC Options tab of the Electrical Rules Check dialog box.Basics. Select desired row and then click in the field to edit. reference designators. Refer to the Finding Components in Your Circuit section of Chapter 2. Click to display a Color palette and select the desired color. NI Multisim User Manual 3-10 ni.

The restriction is then released and the iteration continues to the true solution. • Routing Layer—The copper layer where the net will be placed. Unit of measure is set in Ultiboard. • Trace to Via—Minimum allowable space between traces in the net and vias on any other net on the PCB. Unit of measure is set in Ultiboard.PCB Tab section of Chapter 1. Helps the program find the DC or initial solution by making a preliminary pass with the specified nodes held to the given voltages. • Type—Type of net. for more information. Can be Power. Unit of measure is set in Ultiboard. Click to display a drop-down list with the available selections. • Trace to Pad—Minimum allowable space between traces in the net and pads on any other net on the PCB. Click and type to make changes. User Interface. Unit of measure is set in Ultiboard. Unit of measure is set in Ultiboard.Advanced Functions • Max Width—Trace’s maximum allowable width. Ground or Signal. Select desired row and then click in the field to edit. • Min Length—Trace’s minimum allowable length. This drop-down is populated based on the selections made in the PCB tab of the Sheet Properties dialog box in the Number of Copper Layers field.NODESET line may be necessary for convergence on bistable or a-stable sircuits. Refer to the Sheet Properties . • Max Length—Trace’s maximum allowable length. (refer to the Sheet Properties - © National Instruments Corporation 3-11 NI Multisim User Manual . • Trace to Copper Area—Minimum allowable space between traces in the net and copper areas on the PCB. Unit of measure is set in Ultiboard. for more information. • NODESET—The net’s initial condition for DC Operating Point Analysis in Multisim. This group can be used in Ultiboard to keep nets together during the PCB layout process. • Net Group—Click in this field to enter a group for a net. • Net Specific Setting—If Use Net-specific Setting in the Sheet Properties dialog box is enabled. User Interface. • IC Initial Condition—The net’s initial condition for Transient Analysis in Multisim. Select desired row and then click in the field to edit. Select desired row and then click in the field to edit. Refer to the DC Operating Point Analysis section of Chapter 1. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Click and type to make changes. Click and type to make changes. • Trace to Trace—Minimum allowable space between traces in the net and traces in any other net on the PCB (printed circuit board). Unit of measure is set in Ultiboard. The . Click and type to make changes.

• Footprint—The physical footprint of the component. • Coordinate X/Y—The position of the component on the workspace. either Generic or a specific company. This field is read-only and changes as the component is moved on the workspace. Click on the field and type in desired text. the setting for the selected net is entered here.Advanced Functions Circuit Tab section of Chapter 1. Spreadsheet View Components Tab The Components tab contains the following columns: • RefDes—The component’s unique identifier (Reference Designator). • Section Name—The name of the section of a multi-section component. Refer to the Modifying Component Labels and Attributes section of Chapter 2. Click on the field to change the footprint. for more information. or the component’s model. • Value—The component’s value. Rotated 180 (180 degrees clockwise from original position). • Description—The component’s description. Double-click to edit the component’s model. Refer to the Editing a Component’s Footprint section of Chapter 6. Other selections are: Rotated 90 (90 degrees clockwise from original position). • Section—The section of a multi-section component such as a quad NAND gate. 2N2222A. • Rotation—Click to display a drop-down list of the selections available to rotate the component.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . • Sheet—The filename of the sheet on which the component appears. Component Editing. • Tolerance—The component’s tolerance. • Manufacturer—The component’s manufacturer. 5 V for a battery. Unrotated is the component’s original position. Schematic Capture - Basics. Can also be entered in the Label tab in the component’s properties dialog box. Choices are Show Net Name or Hide Net Name. Rotated –90 (90 degrees counter-clockwise from original NI Multisim User Manual 3-12 ni. Refer to the Component Tolerances in Multisim section of Chapter 1. for more information. • Family—The component’s database family. • Label—The component’s user-defined label. for more information. User Interface. for example.com . User Interface). for example.

Click to toggle between Yes and No. Flipped XY (a horizontal and a vertical flip from original position). Unit of measure is set in the PCB tab of the Sheet Properties dialog box. You can also rotate a component by right-clicking on it in the workspace. • Pin Swap—If enabled. Note You cannot assign faults to digital components. © National Instruments Corporation 3-13 NI Multisim User Manual . • Component Group—Click in this field to enter a group for a component. User Interface. • Gate Swap—If enabled. allows gates with same functionality. indicates that the part has the corresponding input. If not blank. Default is based on the color scheme selected in the Circuit tab of the Sheet Properties dialog box. • Component Spacing—Minimum distance between the component and another component when using the shove option in Ultiboard. You may choose to assign a netname from those power and ground nets that are placed on the schematic. If not blank. Refer to the Pop-up Menus section of Chapter 1. Click to display a Color palette and select the desired color. • Color—Component’s color. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . such as two NAND gates to be swapped during PCB layout process. • Fault—Double-click to display the Change Fault dialog box. allows pins for like-components to be swapped during the PCB layout process. Other selections are: Flipped X (horizontal flip from original position). User Interface.Advanced Functions position). This is the same information that is available in the Fault tab in the component’s properties dialog box. Refer to the Pop-up Menus section of Chapter 1. This group can be used in Ultiboard to keep components together during the PCB layout process. Unflipped is the component’s original position. • Flip—Click to display a drop-down list of the selections available to flip the component. • VDD—Supply voltage. Click to enter new data. for more information. for more information. You may choose to assign a netname from those power and ground nets that are placed on the schematic. You can also flip a component by right-clicking on it in the workspace. • VCC—Supply voltage. Click to toggle between Yes and No. Flipped Y (vertical flip from original position). indicates that the part has the corresponding input.

Ground or Unassigned. Spreadsheet View Simulation Tab The Simulation tab is where errors and warnings from SPICE netlist checks. • VPP—Supply voltage. • VSS—Usually ground. indicates that the part has the corresponding input. Click to toggle between Yes and No. • Routable—When enabled. indicates that the part has the corresponding input. You may choose to assign a netname from those power and ground nets that are placed on the schematic. If not blank.Advanced Functions • VEE—Supply voltage. • GND—Ground. User Interface. Enable the checkbox for each variant of the circuit that you wish the component to be included in. indicates that the part has the corresponding input. for more information. Power. If not blank. You may choose to assign a netname from those power and ground nets that are placed on the schematic. as well as simulation errors appear. If not blank. Refer to the Variants section of Chapter 4. You may choose to assign a netname from those power and ground nets that are placed on the schematic. If not blank.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Working with Larger Designs. for more information. • Variant—Displays a checkbox for each available variant. the layer can be routed during the PCB layout process.com . Refer to the Netlist and Simulation Errors section of Chapter 8. Double-click to display a drop-down list and choose from Signal. NI Multisim User Manual 3-14 ni. indicates that the part has the corresponding input. Spreadsheet View PCB Layers Tab The PCB Layers tab contains the following columns: • Layer Name—The contents of this column are set from the PCB tab of the Sheet Properties dialog box. • Type—Defines the type of layer. but for some components can be a negative supply voltage. You may choose to assign a netname from those power and ground nets that are placed on the schematic. Simulation. Refer to the Sheet Properties - PCB Tab section of Chapter 1. for more information.

Print button. Displays a standard Windows Save dialog where you save the selection as a file with comma-separated values. Finds and highlights the selected component or net on the workspace. © National Instruments Corporation 3-15 NI Multisim User Manual . Select All button. Find and Select button. Sort Descending button. Click to open a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet with the selected data displayed. This feature is not available in all versions of Multisim. Sort Ascending button. (You must have Excel installed to use this function). Sorts the selected column in descending order. Sorts the selected column in ascending order. Copies the selection to the clipboard.Advanced Functions Spreadsheet View Buttons The following buttons are available in the Spreadsheet View. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Copy button. Export to Excel button. Selects all elements in the spreadsheet. Export to CSV File button. Displays a standard Windows Save dialog where you save the selection as a textfile. Prints the data in the selected tab. Button Description Export to Textfile button.

com . Title Block Editor The Title Block Editor is a specialized graphics editor that allows you to create or modify a title block.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . you can insert and position title block data. multi-pages. subcircuits and hierarchical blocks in the current design.Advanced Functions Button Description All button. Before using. Replace Selected Components button. Invokes the Select a Component browser from which you can select a new component. For example. NI Multisim User Manual 3-16 ni. Displays all of the netlists or components (depending on the selected tab) from all sheets. select the desired component(s) in the circuit window to be replaced. Click OK to replace the old component(s) with the selected new one. change font properties and place or move graphic objects.

Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . which gives information on the currently selected object or action. which is where you build or modify your title blocks. • the Toolbars (2). which give quick access to the most commonly-used tools. • the Workspace (3). • the Status Bar (8). • the Spreadsheet View (7). which is where you find and edit various title block parameters. The Draw Grid (4) aids in the placement of graphic elements and Fields (5) inside the Boundary Box (6).Advanced Functions The Title Block Editor looks like this: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 Menu Bar 3 Workspace 5 Fields 7 Spreadsheet View 2 Toolbars 4 Draw Grid 6 Boundary Box 8 Status Bar The Title Block Editor consists of: • the Menu Bar (1). which contains the menus with their associated commands. © National Instruments Corporation 3-17 NI Multisim User Manual .

com . Enter the desired filepath and filename. • Title Block Editor Menus. • Placing Fields. start working from here. Select Tools»Title Block Editor. or to create a new title block: 1. Changes will apply to the selected title block only. select the desired title block and click Open. If this is a new title block. select File»Open. Edit the title block using the menus and toolbars as described in the following sections. The Title Block Editor appears with the selected title block loaded. • Title Block Editor Spreadsheet View. • Title Block Editor Toolbars.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . 2. NI Multisim User Manual 3-18 ni. Note In-Place Edit Mode displays at the bottom of the dialog box when the Title Block Editor is launched using the method described above. and click Save. The changes are reflected in the title block. Edit the title block as described in: • Enter Text Dialog Box. 3. 3.Advanced Functions Complete the following steps to edit a title block that is already in your circuit: 1. navigate to the Titleblocks folder. The Title Block Editor closes and you are returned to the main Multisim workspace. To create a new title block. Right-click on the desired title block and select Edit Title Block from the pop-up. Or To edit an existing title block. 4. Select File»Exit and click Yes when prompted to save changes. If it is an existing title block the changes are saved and the Title Block Editor closes. The Title Block Editor appears with a new un-named title block. Complete the following steps to edit a title block that is stored in the Title Block folder. a standard Save As dialog box appears. 2. Select File»Exit and click Yes when prompted to save your changes.

Type the desired text in the Enter Text field. Revision). Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Revision). For a field’s text to appear in the title block in Multisim. • Automatic drop-down list—Optionally.Advanced Functions The following sections describe the Title Block Editor functionality in more detail. Placing Fields Fields are placeholders for text that appears in the title block on your circuit schematic. 4. • Font Style field—Select desired style from the list. 3. • Size field—Select desired size from the list or type in. © National Instruments Corporation 3-19 NI Multisim User Manual . 2. move the cursor to the desired location and click the mouse to place the text. select a new color from the pop-up that appears when you click on the down-arrow. Select the desired field type from the Fields menu (for example. Change the formatting of the text as desired: • Font field—Select desired font from the list or type in. Select Graphics»Text to display the Enter Text dialog box. Click OK. Enter Text Dialog Box The Enter Text dialog box is used to enter and format text and place it on the title block. Note The actual text that appears in these fields is entered in the Title Block dialog box. Complete the following steps to place a field on the title block: 1. you must first place the field for that text in the title block using the Title Block Editor. Complete the following steps to enter text on a title block: 1. Or Click on the Text Field button in the Draw Tools toolbar and select the desired field type from the pop-up that displays (for example. which is accessed from Multisim’s main screen. • Text Orientation box—Select either horizontal or vertical orientation.

After completing any other edits to the title block.) Note Refer to the Field Codes section for a list of all field codes. • Automatic drop-down—Optionally. 1 2 1 Code for Placed Revision field 2 Placed text is not Highlighted 4.Advanced Functions The Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box displays the code for the selected field in the Title Block Attribute field. move the cursor to the desired location and click the mouse to place the field. for more information. All placed fields appear in green highlighting. as shown in the example below (1). This text is set in the Revision field of the Title Block dialog box. select a new color from the pop-up that appears when you click on the down-arrow. Placed text (2) is not highlighted. #REV appears. which is found in the main Multisim application. where the field code (#REV) has been replaced by text. Refer to the Entering the Title Block Contents section of Chapter 2.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . You are returned to the main Multisim screen. Change the formatting of the text as desired: • Font field—Select desired font from the list or type in. • Text Orientation box—Select either horizontal or vertical orientation. Click OK. • Font Style field—Select desired style from the list.com . select File»Exit and save the changes when prompted. shown in the example below (1).Basics. 3. Schematic Capture . (Since we selected Revision in this example. NI Multisim User Manual 3-20 ni. • Size field—Select desired size from the list or type in. 2.

If after placing the actual text in the title block using the Title Block dialog box. you find that text overlaps. for more information). or return to the Title Block Editor and adjust the positioning of the fields. you must either adjust the text. it is because the field corresponding to that text was not placed in the title block using the Title Block Editor.Basics. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Space used is also dependant on the font size. Note If text in the Title Block dialog box does not appear in your title block. Schematic Capture .Advanced Functions 1 1 Field Code Replaced by Text Caution The width of a field as displayed in the Title Block Editor is not the same as the actual text that is placed in that field using the Title Block dialog box (refer to the Entering the Title Block Contents section of Chapter 2. Field Codes The following are the available field codes: • Title—#TITLE • Description—#DSCRPT • Designed By—#DESIGNED • Checked By—#CHECKED • Approved By—#APPROVED • Document Number—#DOC_N • Date—#DATE • Current Sheet Number—#SN • Total Sheet Numbers—#TSN • Revision—#REV • Format—#FMT • Custom Field 1—#CUSTOM_1 • Custom Field 2—#CUSTOM_2 © National Instruments Corporation 3-21 NI Multisim User Manual .

Bold Italic. Dash-Dot. • Font Size—The font size. and vice versa. Four Pixels. Diagonal Downward. Dot. Select the desired row and click to display a list of pen types. excluding placed text. Select the desired row and click to display a list. Choices are: Not Scaleable. Horizontal. Choices are: Solid. active for placed text elements only. Dash. • Font—The font name. Italic.Advanced Functions • Custom Field 3—#CUSTOM_3 • Custom Field 4—#CUSTOM_4 • Custom Field 5—#CUSTOM_5 Title Block Editor Spreadsheet View The Spreadsheet View is where you find and edit various title block parameters. Dash-Dot-Dot. that have a fill. Select the desired row and click to display a list of sizes. Select the desired row and click to display a list of fill types. • Font Style—The font style. One Pixel. The following columns are found in the Title Block Editor Spreadsheet View: • Name—The type of graphic element. including placed text. • Pen Width—The width of the lines in graphic elements. Five Pixels. it is reflected on the title block in the workspace. active for placed text elements only. excluding placed text. Invisible. Select the desired row and click to display a color palette. Select the desired row and click to display a list of pen types. Invisible. • Brush Color—The color of the fill in elements such as polygons. Double-click to display a list of fonts. their distinct names and properties no longer appear in the Name column.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . • Pen Color—The color of lines for graphic elements. Note If objects are grouped using Edit»Group. The name for any grouped object appears as Group. Bold. Diagonal Cross. that have a fill. Solid Inside Frame.com . When you select an item on the workspace. Two Pixels. it is highlighted in the spreadsheet. NI Multisim User Manual 3-22 ni. • Brush Type—The style of the fill in elements such as polygons. Diagonal Upward. Select the desired row and click to display a color palette. active for placed text elements only. Vertical. Three Pixels. If you make a change to an item in the spreadsheet. Choices are: Solid. Choices are: Regular. • Pen Type—The appearance of lines for graphics elements. Cross.

If you already have one open. it will close first. Before exiting. after prompting you to save any changes. it will close first. after prompting you to save any changes. Edit Menu The following selections are available under the Edit menu: • Undo—Undoes the previous action. • Paste—Places a copy of the element(s) on the clipboard on the workspace at the cursor’s location. • Open—Opens an existing document in the Title Block Editor. If you already have one open. The title block is printed with the best fit to the page. • Save—Saves changes to the active document. • Copy—Places a copy of the selected element(s) on the clipboard. which shows the title block that is in the active document. © National Instruments Corporation 3-23 NI Multisim User Manual . • Exit—Closes the Title Block Editor and returns you to the main Multisim screen. you are prompted to save any changes to the active document. File Menu The following selections are available under the File menu: • New—Opens a new untitled document in the Title Block Editor.Advanced Functions Title Block Editor Menus The Title Block Editor menus contain the commands necessary to create and edit title blocks. • Print—Opens the standard Windows “Print” dialog box where you can enter the desired printing properties and print the title block. • Print Preview—Opens the Print Preview dialog box. • Save As—Opens the standard Windows “Save As” dialog box where you can save the active document under a new or existing name. • Cut—Removes the selected element(s) from the workspace and places them on the clipboard. • Redo—Undoes the previous “undo” action. • Print Setup—Opens the standard Windows “Print Setup” dialog box where you can enter the desired parameters for your printer. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . There are no other magnifications available for printing the title block.

• Flip Horizontal—Flips the selected element(s) horizontally. • Resize Boundary Box—Places a cursor at the lower-right side of the boundary box. • Select All—Selects all of the elements on the workspace. Drag it to the desired location to resize the boundary box. • Copy As Bitmap—Copies the title block on the workspace as a bitmap image. Drawing Toolbar. • Status Bar—Toggles the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen on and off. Draw Tools. • Group—Places selected elements in one group. Other elements appear in front of them. • Flip Vertical—Flips the selected element(s) vertically. You cannot make the boundary box smaller than the elements that it contains. • Ungroup—Returns an element that was made using the Group command. They are not placed on the clipboard.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . • Spreadsheet—Toggles the Title Block Editor Spreadsheet View on and off.Advanced Functions • Delete—Removes the selected element(s) from the workspace. • Snap To Grid—Snaps the selected element(s) to the Draw Grid that is found within the title block’s boundary box.com . View Menu The following selections are available under the View menu: • Toolbars—Toggles the following toolbars on and off: Standard Toolbar. • Rotate 90 Clockwise—Rotates the selected element(s) 90 degrees clockwise. • Bring To Front—Brings selected element(s) to the foreground on the workspace. back to its individual elements. Zoom Toolbar. NI Multisim User Manual 3-24 ni. Other element(s) appear behind them. • Send To Back—Sends selected element(s) to the background on the workspace. • Rotate 90 Counter CW—Rotates the selected element(s) 90 degrees counter-clockwise. • Copy As Picture—Copies the title block on the workspace as a metafile. Refer to the Title Block Editor Spreadsheet View section for more information.

The choices are: No Grid (select if you wish to draw an element that does not snap to the grid). Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Refer to the Placing Fields section for more information. where you enter formatting information for the Designed By field (#DESIGNED) and click OK to place the field on the title block. on and off. • Zoom In—Magnifies the elements(s) in the workspace. • Checked By—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. • Draw Grid Size—Sets the size of the Draw Grid. Small Grid. • Center By Mouse—When viewing the workspace at high magnifications. which displays inside the Boundary Box. where you enter formatting information for the Description field (#DSCRPT) and click OK to place the field on the title block. you can use this command to center the image on the workspace. • Designed By—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. • Zoom Out—Reduces the viewing size of the elements(s) in the workspace. The following selections are available under the Fields menu: • Select—Lets you select specific element(s) on the workspace. Select Center By Mouse and then click on the spot that you would like to be placed at the center of the workspace.Advanced Functions • Show Draw Grid—Toggles the Draw Grid. © National Instruments Corporation 3-25 NI Multisim User Manual . • Redraw—Redraws all elements in the workspace. • Zoom 100%—Displays the items in the workspace at their normal viewing size. • Description—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. This is the size that they will be displayed at in Multisim. When the Title Block Editor first opens. Fields Menu Fields are placeholders for text that appear in the title block on Multisim’s main screen. • Title—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. Large Grid. where you enter formatting information for the Title field (#TITLE) and click OK to place the field on the title block. where you enter formatting information for the Checked By field (#CHECKED) and click OK to place the field on the title block. Smallest Grid. Regular Grid. which displays inside the Boundary Box. the magnification is set to 100%.

• Date—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . NI Multisim User Manual 3-26 ni. • Custom Field 2—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. • Custom Field 3—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. where you enter formatting information for Custom Field 1 (#CUSTOM_1) and click OK to place the field on the title block. • Custom Field 4—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. where you enter formatting information for the Total Sheet Numbers field (#TSN) and click OK to place the field on the title block.Advanced Functions • Approved By—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. where you enter formatting information for Custom Field 2 (#CUSTOM_2) and click OK to place the field on the title block. • Format—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. • Custom Field 1—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. • Custom Field 5—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. where you enter formatting information for the Current Sheet Number field (#SN) and click OK to place the field on the title block. where you enter formatting information for Custom Field 3 (#CUSTOM_3) and click OK to place the field on the title block. where you enter formatting information for the Date field (#DATE) and click OK to place the field on the title block. • Total Sheet Numbers—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. • Current Sheet Number—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. • Document Number—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. where you enter formatting information for the Document Number field (#DOC_N) and click OK to place the field on the title block. where you enter formatting information for the Revision field (#REV) and click OK to place the field on the title block. where you enter formatting information for Custom Field 5 (#CUSTOM_5) and click OK to place the field on the title block.com . • Revision—Displays the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box. where you enter formatting information for Custom Field 4 (#CUSTOM_4) and click OK to place the field on the title block. where you enter formatting information for the Approved By field (#APPROVED) and click OK to place the field on the title block. where you enter formatting information for the Format field (#FMT) and click OK to place the field on the title block.

a dotted outline of the arc appears. then move and click the cursor twice more to form the final shape of the bezier. • Multiline—Draws a multiline on the workspace. Click to place the end point of the bezier. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . • Bitmap—Places a bitmap image on the workspace. Click once at the desired starting point and click again where you wish the diameter of the ellipse to end. Click to display a standard Windows “Open” dialog box. When the ellipse is the desired shape and size. • Circle—Places a circle on the workspace. As you move the cursor. then move the cursor on the workspace. click to place it on the workspace. As you move the cursor. Click to place the center of the circle. • Line—Draws a line on the workspace. As you move the cursor. click to place it on the workspace. click again to place the outer diameter point. • Ellipse—Places an ellipse on the workspace. a dotted outline of the bezier curve appears. © National Instruments Corporation 3-27 NI Multisim User Manual . • Half Ellipse Arc—Places half of an ellipse on the workspace. • Rectangle—Places a rectangle on the workspace. • Bezier—Places a bezier curve on the workspace. • Segment Arc—Places an arc on the workspace. Click once to place the center point of the arc. Click to place the start of the curve. Move the cursor and click to place the arc’s end point. Click to place the center of the ellipse. Refer to the Enter Text Dialog Box section for more information. a dotted outline of the circle appears.Advanced Functions Graphics Menu The following selections are available under the Graphics menu: • Text—Displays the Enter Text dialog box where you enter and format text to be placed on the workspace. then move the cursor on the workspace. a dotted outline of the ellipse appears. then move the cursor on the workspace. When the circle is the desired shape and size. • Polygon—Places a polygon on the workspace. As you move the cursor. As you move the cursor. Click again to place the outer point of the arc at the desired location. where you can select the desired bitmap. a dotted outline of the ellipse appears.

Refer to the Edit Menu section for more information. items in the pop-up will be greyed-out. Show Draw Grid. different context-sensitive pop-up menus appear. for more information. Draw Tools. Pop-up Menus Depending on where you right-click in the Title Block Editor.Advanced Functions Tools Menu The following selection is available under the Tools menu: • Customize—Displays the Customize dialog box. Drawing Toolbar. Rotate 90 Counter CW. Zoom Toolbar. Right-click in the workspace to display a pop-up that contains: Cut. Paste. If you do not right-click on a specific item in the workspace. Flip Vertical.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Draw Grid Size.com . Refer to the Customizing the Interface section of Chapter 1. Rotate 90 Clockwise. NI Multisim User Manual 3-28 ni. Flip Horizontal. • About Title Block Editor—Displays a splash dialog with information about the Title Block Editor. Help Menu The following selections are available under the Help menu: • Help Topics—Displays the help file. Right-click on the menu/toolbar area to display a pop-up which allows you to toggle the following toolbars on and off: Standard Toolbar. Snap To Grid. User Interface. Title Block Editor Toolbars The toolbars give access to the most commonly-used tools in the Title Block Editor. Copy.

Copy As Picture button. Cut button.Title Block Editor The buttons in the Standard toolbar found in the Title Block Editor are described below: Button Description New button. Copy button. Redo button. Places a copy of the selected element(s) on the clipboard. Print Preview button. Open button. There are no other sizes available. Removes the selected element(s) from the workspace and places them on the clipboard. after prompting you to save any changes. Opens an existing document in the Title Block Editor. If you already have one open. which shows the title block in the active document with the best fit to the page. © National Instruments Corporation 3-29 NI Multisim User Manual . Redoes the previous “undo” action. it will close first. Undo button. Save button. it will close first. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture .Advanced Functions Standard Toolbar . Opens a new untitled document in the Title Block Editor. Opens the Print Preview dialog box. Places a copy of the element(s) on the clipboard on the workspace at the cursor’s location. after prompting you to save any changes. Saves changes to the active document. Copy As Bitmap button. Paste button. Copies the title block on the workspace as a bitmap image. Undoes the previous action. Copies the title block on the workspace as a metafile. If you already have one open.

Places a rectangle on the workspace. NI Multisim User Manual 3-30 ni. When the Title Block Editor first opens. Rectangle button. Displays an “About” box with information about the Title Block Editor. Zoom Toolbar . Draw Tools Toolbar . Use to select element(s) on the workspace by clicking and dragging the mouse.Title Block Editor The buttons in the Draw Tools toolbar found in the Title Block Editor are described below: Button Description Select button. This is the size that they will be displayed at in Multisim. The title block is printed with the best fit to the page. Displays the items in the workspace at their normal viewing size. the magnification is set to 100%. About Title Block Editor button. Zoom Out button. Opens the standard Windows “Print” dialog box. There are no other magnifications available for printing the title block. Magnifies the elements on the workspace.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Zoom 100% button.Title Block Editor The buttons in the Zoom toolbar found in the Title Block Editor are described below: Button Description Zoom In button.Advanced Functions Button Description Print button.com . where you can enter the desired printing properties and print the title block. Reduces the viewing size of the element(s) on the workspace.

As you move the cursor. Places an ellipse on the workspace. Places a polygon on the workspace. Multiline button. Segment Arc button. Places a circle on the workspace. As you move the cursor. click again to place the out diameter point. Move the cursor and click to place the arc’s end point. As you move the cursor. then move the cursor on the workspace. Refer to the Enter Text Dialog Box section for more information. click to place it on the workspace. When the circle is the desired shape and size. Circle button. Places a bezier curve on the workspace. Click to place the center of the circle. Places an arc on the workspace. Half Ellipse Arc button. Ellipse button. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . click to place it on the workspace. Bezier button.Advanced Functions Button Description Line button. Places a half ellipse arc on the workspace. When the ellipse is the desired shape and size. Places a line on the workspace. Polygon button. Click to place the center of the ellipse. Displays the Enter Text dialog box. a dotted outline of the arc appears. Places a multiline on the workspace. then move the cursor on the workspace. © National Instruments Corporation 3-31 NI Multisim User Manual . Click once to place the center point of the arc. a dotted outline of the ellipse appears. where you enter and format text to be placed on the workspace. a dotted outline of the circle appears. Text button.

Moves selected objects horizontally so that their left sides line up with the left side of the left-most object. Custom Field 3.com . Custom Field 1. Moves selected objects horizontally so that their right sides line up with the right side of the right-most object. Align Top button. Snap To Grid button. Current Sheet Number. Approved By. Description. Designed By.Title Block Editor The buttons on the Drawing toolbar in the Title Block Editor are described below: Button Description Align Left button. Custom Field 5. At least two objects must be selected to enable this button. Checked By. where you can select the desired bitmap. Places a bitmap image on the workspace.Advanced Functions Button Description Bitmap button. Select to enter formatting information for a specific field. Custom Field 2. Custom Field 4. Align Right button. Text Field button. Moves the selected objects vertically so that their bottom sides line up with the bottom side of the bottom-most object. Align Bottom button. Moves selected objects vertically so that their top sides line up with the top side of the top-most object. At least two objects must be selected to enable this button. Displays a drop-down list with these choices: Title. Revision. Snaps the selected element(s) to the Draw Grid that is found within the title block’s boundary box. the Enter Title Block Attribute dialog box displays. When a choice is made. Refer to the Placing Fields section for more information. NI Multisim User Manual 3-32 ni. Drawing Toolbar . At least two objects must be selected to enable this button. Format. At least two objects must be selected to enable this button.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Click to display a standard Windows “Open” dialog box. Date. Total Sheet Numbers. Document Number.

Bring To Front button. Rotate 90 Counter CW button. Send To Back button. Returns an element that was made using the Group command back to its individual elements. Brings selected element(s) to the foreground on the workspace. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Rotates the selected element(s) 90 degrees clockwise. Flip Horizontal button. Other element(s) appear behind them. At least three objects must be selected to enable this button. Flips the selected element(s) horizontally on the workspace. At least three objects must be selected to enable this button. Flip Vertical button. You cannot make the boundary box smaller than the elements that it contains or smaller than is required for the pins that are attached to it. Places selected elements in one group. Group button.Advanced Functions Button Description Distribute Horizontal button. Rotates the selected element(s) 90 degrees counter-clockwise. © National Instruments Corporation 3-33 NI Multisim User Manual . Rotate 90 Clockwise button. Distribute Vertical button. Flips the selected element(s) vertically on the workspace. Resize Boundary Box button. Ungroup button. Sends selected element(s) to the background on the workspace. Places a cursor at the lower-right side of the boundary box. Other elements appear in front of them. Evenly spaces the selected objects vertically. Drag it to the desired location to resize the boundary box. Evenly spaces the selected objects horizontally.

Complete the following steps to run the electrical rules check: 1. error messages for other connection types. Note You can select whether or not to include specific pins in a component in the ERC. Set up the reporting options as described in the ERC Options Tab and ERC Rules Tab sections. When you run an electrical rules check (ERC). a power pin has been connected to an output pin.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Select Tools»Electrical Rules Check to display the Electrical Rules Check dialog box. you can check the connections for correctness based on the rules set up in the Electrical Rules Check dialog box. In the following examples. any anomalies are reported into a results pane at the bottom of the screen and the circuit is annotated with circular error markers. 4. All others pins have been left unconnected. you may wish to have warnings issued if some types of connections are present. which was defined as an error in the ERC Rules tab. Double-clicking on an error in the results pane will center and zoom on the error location. Click OK. You control the type of connections that are reported when Electrical Rules Checking is done by setting up the rules in the grid found in the ERC Rules tab of the Electrical Rules Check dialog box. Electrical Rules Checking creates and displays a report detailing connection errors (such as an output pin connected to a power pin) and unconnected pins. 3. Refer to the Component’s Pins Tab section for more information. Set up the rules as described in the ERC Rules Tab section. NI Multisim User Manual 3-34 ni. The results display in the format selected in the Output box in the ERC Options tab. Depending on your circuit. and no warnings or errors for other connections.Advanced Functions Electrical Rules Checking Once you have wired your circuit. 2.com .

© National Instruments Corporation 3-35 NI Multisim User Manual . errors and warnings are detailed in the Results tab of the Spreadsheet View as shown in the example in the figure below. Double-click on individual errors or warnings in the ERC list (1).Advanced Functions Result Pane If you select Result Pane to display your output. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . 2 1 3 1 ERC List 2 Selected Error’s First Pin 3 Selected Error’s Second Pin File If you select File in the Output box. and indicate either errors or warnings. the results of the ERC are saved to a text file in the filepath and name that you enter in the File field. This does not apply to unconnected pins. The error or warning is selected and zoomed and shown in (2) below. Double-click on the same error or warning to zoom to the other pin associated with the error or warning (3). The red circles are ERC markers.

a report displays as shown in the example below: Use the buttons detailed below as required: Button Description Save to a Text File button. Click to open a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet with the data from the dialog box displayed. Export to MS Excel button. Choose the desired filepath and click Save. Choose the desired print options and click OK. (You must have Excel installed to use this function. Print button. A standard Windows save dialog box appears.com . Click to display a standard Windows print dialog box.) NI Multisim User Manual 3-36 ni. Print Preview button. Click to display the Print Preview dialog box.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture .Advanced Functions List View If you select List View. Click to save the data in the dialog box to a text file.

hierarchical block or subcircuit. select as many of the following as desired: • Off-Page Connectors—Checks connections between pins connected through off-page connectors. In the Flow Through box. • Bus HB/SC Pins—Checks connections between pins connected to buses through Bus HB/SC (hierarchical block or subcircuit) connectors. • Whole Design—Runs the ERC on all subcircuits. 3. Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . • HB/SC Pins—Checks connections between pins connected through HB/SC (hierarchical block or subcircuit) connectors. In the Scope box. © National Instruments Corporation 3-37 NI Multisim User Manual . Select Tools»Electrical Rules Check to display the Electrical Rules Check dialog box and click on the ERC Options tab. Refer to the Electrical Rules Checking section for information about how to run an ERC. • Check Touched Pages—Is active when one or more of the above are selected. 2.Advanced Functions ERC Options Tab This section describes how to set up Electrical Rule Check (ERC) options. Complete the following steps to set up the ERC options: 1. Does not check any other pins on the associated hierarchical block or subcircuit unless Check Touched Pages is also selected. Does not check any other pins on the associated multi-page unless Check Touched Pages is also selected. select one of: • Current Page—Runs the ERC on the page displayed and selected on your workspace. When selected. Does not check any other pins on the associated hierarchical block of subcircuit unless Check Touched Pages is also selected. hierarchical blocks and multi-pages associated with the current design. • Bus Off-Page Connectors—Checks connections between pins connected to buses through bus off-page connectors. Does not check any other pins on the associated multi-page unless Check Touched Pages is also selected. ERC checks all connections on the associated multi-page.

3. • List View—The results display in a report format. • File—The results are saved in the filepath and name that you enter in the File field.Advanced Functions 4. • Excluded Pins—Checks pins that have been excluded from ERC in the Pins tab of the component’s properties dialog box. Select Tools»Clear ERC Markers to display the ERC Marker Deletion Scope dialog box. Refer to the Clearing ERC Markers section for information about clearing ERC markers without running an ERC.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . In the ERC Marker box. Select one of: • Current Page—To clear the ERC markers from the currently selected page. In the Report Also box. In the Output box. 5. Refer to the Result Pane section for an example. NI Multisim User Manual 3-38 ni. select the following as desired: • Unconnected Pins—Checks for pins that are not connected to anything. • Whole Design—To clear the ERC markers from all pages associated with the design. Click OK to delete the selected markers. any previous ERC results will be cleared from the Results tab when a new ERC is run. If you select Clear Pane. Refer to the Component’s Pins Tab section for more information.com . 6. 2. select the following as desired: • Clear ERC Markers—Clears existing ERC markers (red circles indicating errors and warnings) from the workspace when you run the ERC. Refer to the File section for an example. Refer to the List View section for more information. • Create ERC Markers—Places red circles indicating errors and warnings on the workspace. select one of: • Result Pane—Displays ERC results in the Results tab of the Spreadsheet View. Clearing ERC Markers Complete the following steps to o clear ERC markers without running a new Electrical Rules Check: 1.

Advanced Functions ERC Rules Tab This section describes how to set up the electrical rules used when running an Electrical Rules Check. The warning and error levels are shown in the Legend area (4). Select Tools»Electrical Rules Check to display the Electrical Rules Check dialog box and click on the ERC Rules tab. For clarity. The red button (2) indicates an error for connection of Oc (open collector) to Oe (open emitter) pin. Complete the following steps to set up the electrical rules: 1. © National Instruments Corporation 3-39 NI Multisim User Manual . Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Click until the desired color. 2. Set the desired warning or error levels by clicking on the button that appears at the intersection of the desired pin types in the grid found in the Definition box. The green button (3) indicates “OK” for connection of Pas (passive) to In (input) pin. Refer to the Electrical Rules Checking section for information about how to run an ERC. The ERC symbols are shown in (1). some examples are shown in the figure below. Refer to the Warning and Error Levels section for more information. 1 4 3 2 1 ERC Symbols 3 Green Button 2 Red Button 4 Warning and Errror Levels Note The table below details the pin types and their associated ERC symbols that are available on the various components in Multisim. based on the Legend appears.

74LS Active Driver. A warning message is displayed after an Electrical Rules Check. only if no other pin type is present. 74LS Bi-directional. • Warning*—Blue button. A warning message is displayed after an Electrical Rules Check. CMOS Active Driver. 74 STD Input. 74S Input.Advanced Functions Pin Type Pin Type from Multisim Component Editor ERC Symbol INPUT Input. 74S Open Collector. • Error*—Purple button. NI Multisim User Manual 3-40 ni. Schmitt Trigger. An error message is displayed after an Electrical Rules Check. only if no other pin type is present. ECL Input. 74LS Open Collector. Vcc. Vss Pwr NC NC (no connection) NC Warning and Error Levels The following explains the warning and error levels available: • Ok—Green button. PASSIVE Passive Pas POWER Power. Vee. 74STD Bi-directional.Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Vdd. OUTPUT Output. In CMOS Input. OPEN_EMITTER ECL Output. 74STD Open Oc Collector. 3-STATE 3-state. • Warning—Yellow button. 74LS 3-state. 74STD 3-state. Bi 74S Bi-directional. Active Driver. Vpp Pwr GND Gnd. CMOS Bi-directional. 74LS Input. An error message is displayed after an Electrical Rules Check. OPEN_COLLECTOR Open Collector. Out 74S Active Driver. 74STD Active Driver. Tri Bi-directional-3st. CMOS Open Collector.com . CMOS 3-State. Oe BI_DIRECTIONAL Bi-directional. 74S 3-state. • Error—Red button. No message is displayed after an Electrical Rules Check.

Chapter 3 Schematic Capture . Note You cannot change the NC state of a pin that is already wired to a net. Schematic Capture . Also. 2. © National Instruments Corporation 3-41 NI Multisim User Manual . • NC—Select Yes to add NC (no connection) markers to a pin. Set the cells in the following columns as desired: • ERC Status—Select either Include or Exclude for each of the component’s pins. If you try. Double-click on the desired component to display its properties dialog box and click on the Pins tab. Complete the following steps to set up which pins in a component to include or exclude from an ERC: 1. Click OK to close the dialog box.Advanced Functions Component’s Pins Tab Before running an Electrical Rules Check you can set which pins to exclude or include for specific components. A pin marked in this way will not have an unconnected pin error assigned to it when you run the ERC. Refer to the Marking Pins for No Connection section of Chapter 2. for more information. a warning appears indicating that this is not permitted. 3.Basics. you cannot wire to pins with NC markers.

Repeat for any other required off-page connectors. Select Place»Connectors»Off-Page Connector. 7. A “ghost” image of an off-page connector displays attached to your mouse pointer. Save the file and return to the main circuit window. 3. Enter the desired name and click OK. A blank circuit appears with the name that you entered above. © National Instruments Corporation 4-1 NI Multisim User Manual . Drag the “ghost” image to the desired location and click to place the connector. 4. 6. Place components and wire the circuit as desired. This allows you to place off-page connectors between different sections of your circuit. Drag the “ghost” image to the desired location and click to place the connector.Working with Larger Designs 4 This chapter describes features that are especially useful when dealing with larger. Complete the following steps to add another sheet to a circuit: 1. A “ghost” image of an off-page connector displays attached to your mouse pointer. Repeat for any other required off-page connectors. Select Place»Multi-Page. Wire the off-page connectors into the main circuit. 5. The Page Name dialog box displays. Flat Multi-Sheet Design In many instances circuit designs are too large to fit all components on a single sheet or for logical reasons it’s easier to think of a circuit design if it is divided. 8. Refer to the release notes for a list of the features in your edition. 2. In this case. you can use Multisim’s Flat Multi-Sheet Design feature. Wire the off-page connectors into the circuit. Select Place»Connectors»Off-Page Connector. more complicated designs. 9. Some of the features described in this chapter may not be available in your edition of Multisim. 10.

The connection between a block and the circuit in which it is placed is an active link—if you place the contents of circuit A as a block of circuit B. Highlight the page that you wish to delete and click OK. 2. you might build a library of commonly used circuits. or for dividing the work when multiple designers are working on the same design. For example. Those circuits could in turn be contained in other.com . Hierarchical blocks are useful when re-using nested circuits across multiple designs. for example. Note Refer to the Connecting Buses to HB/SCs section for more information. the “block” remains a separate schematic file which can be edited. and updated automatically. Delete Multi-Page Dialog Box Complete the following steps to delete a page from a multi-page circuit file. the name of the off-page connector in the main circuit must be the same as in the other page. “OffPage1” in the main circuit. Sub-circuits are easier to manage. Since the interconnected circuits are linked together. The connection method is the same for both using the HB/SC Connector. interconnected circuits for completion by individual team members. you can open circuit A separately. This lets you.Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Caution To achieve a connection between a point in the main circuit and a point in another page. as they cannot accidentally become separated from the circuit that references them. divide a complex project into smaller. Hierarchical blocks and subcircuits are similar except that subcircuits are saved with the original circuit and hierarchical blocks are individual circuit files that are referenced from a main file. increasing the reusability of your circuit designs and ensuring consistency across a group of designers. Select Edit»Delete Multi-Page to display the Delete Multi-Page dialog box. Multisim’s hierarchical functionality allows you to build a hierarchy of inter-connected circuits. more complex circuits. When using hierarchical blocks. will be connected to “OffPage1” in the other (flat) page. For example. 1. you can ensure that refinements made to one circuit are carried out in all related circuits as well. make any changes NI Multisim User Manual 4-2 ni. which could be used to create yet another level of circuit design. stored in a central location. Hierarchical Design Hierarchical blocks and subcircuits are used to organize functionally related parts of a design into manageable pieces.

Use instances are identified by a path formed by the names of the references used to reach them. Nested Circuits When a circuit file is opened or created in Multisim. Thus. there are two ways to reach “sub”: one via the reference X1 in Circuit1 and one via the reference X2. The Hierarchy tab in the Design Toolbox displays a graphical view of the open designs. any circuit (nested or otherwise). Each appearance is an instance of use of that nested circuit. With one notable exception (RefDes assignment). may comprise multiple pages for ease of understanding and printing. and will have more than one tab in the main workspace. In the simple example above. Different views are maintained of each use instance in order that simulation may distinguish them. embedded (subcircuit) or linked-to (hierarchical block) nested circuits. edits made to one instance of use are reflected in all others (because it is actually the same circuit that is being modified). it will appear more than once in the hierarchy view. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs necessary. All circuits may reference other. In addition. © National Instruments Corporation 4-3 NI Multisim User Manual . and those changes are reflected in circuit B the next time you open it and in any other circuits that use circuit A. which act as building blocks to control circuit complexity. it would show a different voltage than if it were dragged over the same net in the X2 instance. if a probe was dragged over the net IO1 in the X1 instance of sub. If the same nested circuit is used more than once in a design. by definition it is the top-level circuit of the current design.

the RefDes will also include a section identifier. This is because the same nested circuit may appear more than once in a design. sub. A RefDes is assigned by default when a component is placed by taking a single letter typical of the type of part being placed (R for resistors. we see Circuit1 referencing the same sub-circuit. In the above example. the wiring. C for capacitors. their placement. Were the RefDes to be associated with a nested circuit. a hierarchical block opened via top-level circuit 1 will have all the same components that are in the same hierarchical block opened via top-level circuit 2. The components.Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Refer to the Measurement Probe section of Chapter 9. after NI Multisim User Manual 4-4 ni. and so on) followed by the next highest available number. however they will have different RefDes. and the net names in the sub-circuit are identical in the two instances (because they are. such as R5. it is the top-level circuit that associates a RefDes with each part’s instance of use. twice. Thus. Component Numbering in Nested Circuits Every part in a design has a unique reference designator (RefDes). duplicate RefDes would appear. To combat this. for information on probes. and so on.com . U2. The assignment of RefDes to part is stored with the top-level circuit. so long as they are unique across a design. In the case of multi-section parts. Instruments. You may edit these to be anything you like. and not with any of the nested circuits.

IO1’ is the full name of net number IO1 in the sub-circuit referenced by the RefDes ‘X1’ from the top-level circuit. GND is a digital ground (it is common for the purposes of PCB layout to wish to isolate these two ground nets). be sure that the Connect digital ground to analog ground checkbox in the PCB tab of the Sheet Properties dialog box is de-selected before exporting your schematic to Ultiboard. net names may be repeated in nested circuits. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs all. VCC. however. User Interface. Caution If you want to keep the analog and digital grounds separate during the PCB layout process. as the “real” names of nets in nested circuits are formed by pre-pending a dot-separated path of references to reach the circuit instance. Net 0 corresponds to analog ground. VDD. In the figure below. However. and the Transferring from Multisim to Ultiboard for PCB Layout section of Chapter 13. and is the reference for all voltages during simulation. These reserved global nets are 0. GND. Transfer/Communication. for more information. VEE. it joins this net. Circuit1. However. Net Numbering in Nested Circuits Net names are unique across all the pages of a multi-page circuit. Global Nets Certain pre-defined named nets are global across an entire design—any time a global net at any level in the hierarchy or on any page is re-named to one of these reserved nets. ‘X1. the RefDes of their components are different. Refer to the Sheet Properties . the same sub-circuit: sub). and VSS. as the association of RefDes to component instance is stored with and managed by the containing design. This does not cause any ambiguity.PCB Tab of Chapter 1. © National Instruments Corporation 4-5 NI Multisim User Manual .

without the use of Off-Page Connectors.com . VCC was placed and then renamed to “power” by double-clicking on the component and changing the RefDes (1) to “power”. When a wire is attached to such a component. The net name automatically changed to “power” (2) to match the new component RefDes. placing a “T” component re-named to “power” and then attaching a wire to it would result in the net being simply called “power”. 1 RefDes 2 Net Name Nets created this way become accessible across pages in a multi-page circuit.Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Components like VCC and VDD that use the “T” symbol. Hence. This makes this net unique to any other net named “power” at the top-level or in any other nested circuit in the design (even other use instances of the same sub-circuit). This creates a virtual wiring situation between all such nets named “power”. NI Multisim User Manual 4-6 ni. as shown in (1) in the following figure. even when buried deeply into nested circuits. For example. in the figure below. If the symbol is placed into a nested circuit (SC or HB). For example. having a net named “power” in a sub-circuit referenced by X1 from the top-level circuit would normally re-write the name of the net to “X1. its net name is automatically changed to the name of the component. and joins any other nets at the top-level with the same name. can be renamed as desired. However. this is a mechanism by which nets may be declared to be of the top-most net namespace. or the GND component that uses the triangle symbol.power”. the attached net is renamed to be a top-level net.

Enter the number of pins desired and click OK. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs 1 Instances of “power” Adding a Hierarchical Block Complete the following steps to place a new hierarchical block: 1. Click where you want the hierarchical block to appear. Select Place»New Hierarchical Block to display the Hierarchical Block Properties dialog box. A “ghost” image of the new hierarchical block appears. Enter a filename. Place and wire components as desired in the new hierarchical block. 4. 5. A circuit window that contains only the entered pins displays. Or Click on Browse. © National Instruments Corporation 4-7 NI Multisim User Manual . navigate to the folder where you would like to save the hierarchical block and click Save. You are returned to the Hierarchical Block Properties dialog box. 2. Double-click on the new hierarchical block and select Edit HB/SC from the Label tab of the Hierarchical Block/Subcircuit dialog box that displays. 3.

com . In this case. the symbol for the HB will include pins for the number of connectors that you added. double-click on the placed HB’s symbol and select Edit HB/SC. Multisim will not be able to find it. Select Place»Connectors»HB/SC Connector. and place and wire the connector as desired. When you return to the main circuit. Placing a HB from an Existing File Complete the following steps to place a hierarchical block from an existing file: 1. Save the circuit.Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs 6. 7. Wire the hierarchical block into the circuit as in the example in the figure below. Note If you re-name or move a hierarchical block relative to the main circuit. Select Place»Hierarchical Block from File. You may need to add HB/SC connectors to the HB if they are not already present. 2. a dialog box will display asking you to provide the new location for the hierarchical block. The circuit is placed on the workspace. NI Multisim User Manual 4-8 ni. navigate to the desired file and click Open. To do this.

Select Place»Replace by Hierarchical Block. 3. Replacing Components with an HB Complete the following steps to replace a section of a schematic with a hierarchical block (HB): 1. © National Instruments Corporation 4-9 NI Multisim User Manual . Select which hierarchical block you wish to use to assign grouping information in the new hierarchical block and click OK. 2. select the desired components and nets. the following dialog displays: 3. The Hierarchical Block Properties dialog box appears. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs If you have already placed instances of the hierarchical block. In the workspace. The selection is replaced by a HB symbol that is correctly wired into the circuit. Enter the desired filename and click OK.

for example. The selection is replaced by a SC symbol that is correctly wired into the circuit. “PowerSupply” and click OK. 4. Select Place»New Subcircuit. 5. select the desired components and nets. 2. Repeat for any other required HB/SC Connectors. Complete the following steps to place another instance of the same subcircuit: 1. Enter the name you wish to use for the subcircuit and click OK. The Subcircuit Name dialog box appears. and place and wire the connector as desired. Select Place»Replace by Subcircuit. Select the desired subcircuit in the workspace and select Edit»Copy. In the workspace. the symbol for the subcircuit will include pins for the number of connectors that you added. Enter the name you wish to use for the subcircuit. 3. 6. 2. if necessary). Select Place»Connectors»HB/SC Connector. 7. The Subcircuit Name dialog box appears. Wire the subcircuit pins into the main circuit in the usual manner. 3.Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Adding a Subcircuit Complete the following steps to place a new subcircuit: 1. An empty circuit window appears. Click on the location in the circuit where you want the subcircuit placed (you can move it later. Select Edit»Paste to place a copy of the subcircuit on the workspace. Double-click on the new subcircuit and select Edit HB/SC from the Label tab of the Hierarchical Block/Subcircuit dialog box that displays.com . Your cursor changes to a “ghost” image of the subcircuit indicating that the subcircuit is ready to be placed. Replacing Components with an SC Complete the following steps to replace a section of a schematic with a subcircuit (SC): 1. 2. Place and wire components as desired in the new hierarchical block. NI Multisim User Manual 4-10 ni. The subcircuit appears in the desired location on the circuit window as an icon with the subcircuit name inside it. Note The copy must be pasted in the same file as the original subcircuit. When you return to the main circuit.

If you have multiple nested circuits and are viewing. you will not move to the top of the hierarchy. © National Instruments Corporation 4-11 NI Multisim User Manual . Note This command will move you to the next circuit upwards in the hierarchy. as in the example “V1”. • Locked—Yes indicates that the component will not be changed by either a Renumber or a Gate Optimizer command. Renaming Component Instances The Rename Component Reference Designators dialog box is used to rename/renumber components to. The columns in the dialog box contain the following information: • RefDes Path—The path for the component. for example. If the component is located on the main sheet (that is. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Viewing a Parent Sheet When you are viewing a subcircuit or hierarchical block you can quickly move to its parent sheet. If the component is not on the main sheet. a subcircuit within a subcircuit. or multi-page. the path will only contain the component’s reference designator (RefDes). eliminate gaps in numbering. • RefDes—The reference designator of the component as it appears on the workspace. hierarchical block. This should be done just before the circuit is exported to PCB layout. as in the example “X3.R1”. This indicates that R1 is found on the subcircuit referenced by X3. for example. the sheet on which it is located also shows. To view an active subcircuit or hierarchical block’s parent. • Section—The section of a multi-section component. not in a subcircuit. This is particularly useful when you have many circuits open at once. select View» Parent Sheet.

com . Click Renumber. 1 Resistors in Subcircuit X1 2 Resistors in Subcircuit X2 2. Click Gate Optimizer.Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Complete the following steps to renumber the components in a circuit: 1. Select Tools»Rename/Renumber Components. 2. In the example below. 1 Renumbered RefDes’s in X2 3. the RefDes’s in X2 have been renumbered (1). Select Tools»Rename/Renumber Components. The example in the figure below shows the resistors found in subcircuit X1 (1). and the resistors found in subcircuit X2 (2). Complete the following steps to optimize the circuit so that multi-section components are used as efficiently as possible: 1. The RefDes’s are renumbered in sequence. NI Multisim User Manual 4-12 ni. Click OK to close the dialog box and accept the changes.

Select Tools»Rename/Renumber Components to display the Rename Component Reference Designators dialog box. (1) and (2). If desired. This is useful when trying to identify components in a large design. 1.This section uses the example of two instances of the same subcircuit as shown in the figure below. 3. 2. © National Instruments Corporation 4-13 NI Multisim User Manual . for example “Beta”. enter a prefix for the components in the selection in the Prefix field. hierarchical block or multi-page. 1 X1 2 X2 Complete the following steps to set up renaming parameters: 1. The Reference Designator Prefix Setup dialog box appears. Select the item for which you wish to set up numbering parameters and enable Use RefDes Prefix. Click Setup. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Reference Designator Prefix Setup Dialog The Reference Designator Prefix Setup dialog box can be used to assign a unique numbering system for each subcircuit.

1 Prefix “Beta” 2 Component Numbering Sequence 7. The component numbering sequence for components in the instance of the subcircuit begins at “100” (2). In the example in the figure below. NI Multisim User Manual 4-14 ni. the prefix of “Beta” has been added to each component in the instance of the subcircuit (1).Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs 4. Click OK to return to the Rename Component Reference Designators dialog box. the prefix of “Beta” has been added to each component in the instance of the subcircuit (1). Click OK to accept the changes. Click Renumber.com . Enter the starting number for each RefDes in the selection in the Offset field. In the example in the figure below. for example “100”. 5. The RefDes’s are renumbered to reflect the changes to the setup that you made in the Reference Designator Prefix Setup dialog box. The component numbering sequence for components in the instance of the subcircuit begins at “100” (2). 6.

In net mode. Buses can be used within a page. This is illustrated in the figure below (1). across pages. Each time a wire is connected to a bus via a bus entry. or of adding that net to the bus. Buses operate in two modes. buses can be used to carry multiple nets. and down into nested circuits (subcircuits and hierarchical blocks). a bus is simply a collection of nets. you are given the choice of connecting that new wire to an existing net already in the bus. © National Instruments Corporation 4-15 NI Multisim User Manual . Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs 1 Prefix “Beta” 2 Component Numbering Sequence Buses In order to simplify wiring.

User Interface. Net mode is a more traditional way of using buses in schematic capture programs. declaration-before-use. you are encouraged to use either one style or the other for any given circuit (switching from busline mode to net mode loses information). Busline mode allows for a more modern. approach to designing buses that minimizes entry errors. you are prompted to specify which of the existing buslines the new wire should attach to. Although you can switch between the two modes.com . you can pre-define the number and names of buslines that are contained in that bus. Refer to the Sheet Properties . NI Multisim User Manual 4-16 ni.Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs In busline mode. All wires attached to the same busline are merged into the same net. 1 Net Mode 2 Busline Mode Note The bus wiring mode is set in the Wiring tab of the Sheet Properties dialog box. for more information. This is illustrated in the figure below (2).Wiring Tab section of Chapter 1. When connecting a wire to the bus via a bus entry.

When using the nested circuit. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Buses exist in multiple bus segments. 1 Bus Off-Page Connectors A nested circuit can use a Bus HB/SC Connector to specify that one of the pins of the hierarchical block or subcircuit should be a bus pin. If the bus in the parent circuit is empty. a bus off-page connector is used. attaching a bus to such a bus pin brings up a dialog box asking you to map the buslines (or nets) of the bus on the parent circuit to those in the nested circuit. These work analogously to regular off-page connectors in that they allow a bus to be continued onto a second or third page. To connect a bus to other pages of the same circuit. as in the example shown in the figure below (1). They need not all be connected physically. no dialog will be presented and the bus will be wired in the natural manner. This mapping is necessary as each instance of a nested circuit may in general be connected to a different bus. All bus segments with the same name are parts of the same bus. as shown in the figure below (1). © National Instruments Corporation 4-17 NI Multisim User Manual .

Wire the connector to the desired bus. vertically. This dialog allows you to select pins from multi-pin components to connect to the buslines. Click on the first point for the bus. and at 45 degrees.Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs 1 Bus HB/SC Connector To facilitate the use of buses. NI Multisim User Manual 4-18 ni. 2. 3. 3. 5. Place a bus on the multi-page. Buses can be placed horizontally. 4. Click on the next point for the bus. Double-click on the bus and change its name to match the bus name of the bus on the main page. 2. 4. Select Place»Bus. Double-click to mark the ending point of the bus. Continue to click on points until the bus is complete. a powerful Bus Vector Connect facility is provided that allows for multiple pins of a chip to be connected to a bus in a single operation. Placing a Bus across Multi-Pages Complete the following steps to place the same bus across multi-pages: 1. Select Place»Connectors»Bus Off-Page Connector to place a Bus Off-Page Connector on the workspace. and wire another Bus Off-Page Connector to the bus.com . Placing a Bus Complete the following steps to place a bus in your circuit: 1.

The example in the figure below shows a hierarchical block in a main circuit (1) and the contents of that hierarchical block (2). Place a hierarchical block or subcircuit on your workspace. 1 Hierarchical Block in Main Circuit 2 Contents of Hierarchical Block © National Instruments Corporation 4-19 NI Multisim User Manual . Attach wires to the bus as described in the Wiring to a Bus section. 4. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Connecting Buses to HB/SCs Complete the following steps to connect a bus to a bus on a hierarchical block (HB) or a subcircuit (SC): Note This example uses a hierarchical block. Place a bus on the workspace as described in the Placing a Bus section. 2. 3. 1. Place a bus in the HB/SC and attach wires to it as desired.

In the Bus pin box.com . Select Place»Connectors»Bus HB/SC Connector and place the connector in the HB/SC on the end of the bus. Click OK. 6. 7. The connection from the bus in the main circuit is made to the Bus IO pin as mapped above. 9. The Bus HB/SC Mapping Properties dialog box appears. In the main circuit. 8. select the buslines on the main page to which you wish to map the buslines that you selected above and click the down-arrow. Move the cursor to the BusIO pin on the HB/SC symbol and click to place. NI Multisim User Manual 4-20 ni. The symbol for the HB/SC in the main circuit will change to reflect the addition of the Bus HB/SC Connector. select the buslines from the Bus IO pin you wish to map and click on the activated down-arrow button. as shown in the example below.Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs 5. attach the bus to the BusIO pin on the HB/SC by hovering the cursor over one end of the bus and clicking when the cursor changes to a crosshair. Note If you add more nets to the bus. you must double-click on the Bus IO pin in the sub-circuit or hierarchical block symbol and map the new nets via the Bus HB/SC Mapping Properties dialog box. In the Bus box on the right.

“1”. 2. for example. If you wish to add a number of buslines. 3. Double-click on a placed bus to display the Bus Properties dialog box. 2. If you wish to add a single busline to the selected bus. • Number—The total number of buslines to add. Select the desired bus(es) in the Buslines (Net) list and click Delete. • Increment by—The size of the step between each number. Double-click on a placed bus to display the Bus Properties dialog box. for example. enable Add Bus Vector and enter information in the following fields as desired: • Prefix—The prefix for the entered buslines. Click Add to display the Add Buslines dialog box. Adding Buslines to a Bus When you are in the busline mode (refer to the Buses section for information) you can pre-enter buslines for use when wiring to a bus. The Add Buslines dialog box disappears. Click OK. Deleting Buslines from a Bus Complete the following steps to delete buslines from a bus: 1. for example. and the Bus Properties dialog box appears with the added buslines appearing in the Buslines (Net) list. Double-click on a placed bus to display the Bus Properties dialog box. Enter the desired name in the New Name field and click OK. delete and rename buslines from the Bus Properties dialog box. for example “Out”. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Bus Properties You can add. Select the desired bus(es) in the Buslines (Net) list and click Rename. Renaming Buslines in a Bus Complete the following steps to rename buslines in a bus: 1. 3. • Start value—The number from which the buslines will start numbering. “4”. The Rename Busline dialog box appears. 2. enable Add a Busline and enter the Name. “0”. 4. Complete the following steps to add buslines to a bus: 1. © National Instruments Corporation 4-21 NI Multisim User Manual .

In the Merged Bus area. Buslines with the same name in each of the merged buses will be electrically connected after the merge. Highlight the two buses and select Place»Merge Bus to display the Bus Merge dialog box. 1 Busline 2 Net to Which Busline is Connected Tip If you want to rename busline(s) before merging the buses. select the bus to use for the merged bus from the Name drop-down. NI Multisim User Manual 4-22 ni.com .Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Merging Buses Complete the following steps to merge two buses together so that they have the same bus name: 1. Note the example of a busline (1) and the net to which the busline is connected (2) in the figure below. 2. select the desired busline(s) and click Rename.

Click Merge. and clicking the Merge button in the Bus Properties dialog box. Wire the bus into your circuit by drawing a wire to any location on the bus. as shown in the example in the figure below. you must select the second bus from its Name drop-down list before clicking Merge. As well. Note You can also access the Bus Merge dialog box by double-clicking on a bus. In this case. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs 3. you can merge buses by wiring them together or renaming one bus with the name of another existing bus. © National Instruments Corporation 4-23 NI Multisim User Manual . Wiring to a Bus In Busline Bus Wiring Mode 1. The Bus Entry Connection dialog box appears as in the example in the figure below. Note that the two buses on the workspace now share the selected name.

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

You can use the default Busline name or type a new name into the Busline
field. Or, you can select one of the Available Buslines.
2. Select the desired busline and click OK.

Tip Make the 45 degree connection, as shown at Sig0 in the figure above, point in either
direction by adjusting the mouse position as you connect the wire to the bus.

NI Multisim User Manual 4-24 ni.com

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

Note After wiring, you can re-name the net, by double-clicking on it and editing the name
in the Net dialog box that appears.

Note You can select a bus entry to move it with the Arrow keys, or rotate it with
<Shift-R>.

Note You can double-click on a bus entry to edit its properties via the Bus Entry
Connection dialog box.

In Net Bus Wiring Mode
1. Wire the bus into your circuit by drawing a wire to any location on the
bus. The Bus Entry Connection dialog box appears:

2. Select the either the default net that appears in the Nets field, or select
one of the existing nets from the Nets in bus list, and click OK.

© National Instruments Corporation 4-25 NI Multisim User Manual

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

Note After wiring, you can re-name the net as usual, by double-clicking on it and editing
the name in the Net dialog box that appears.

Note You can select a bus entry to move it with the Arrow keys, or rotate it with
<Shift-R>.

Note You can double-click on a bus entry to edit its properties via the Bus Entry
Connection dialog box.

Bus Resizing
To resize a bus, click on the bus and drag one of the handles that appear on
the bus.

Complete the following steps to add to the bus:
1. Place the cursor over the end of the bus, and when it turns to a
crosshair, click the mouse.
2. Move the cursor to the desired location and double-click to complete
the bus.

Bus Vector Connect
Along with the method described in the Wiring to a Bus section, you can
also use the Bus Vector Connect command. This is the preferred method
for placing numerous connections from a multi-pinned device, such as an
IC, to a bus.

The following example details the connection of an IC to a bus. However,
the Bus Vector Connect functionality can be used to connect any multi-pin
device to a bus.

NI Multisim User Manual 4-26 ni.com

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

In Busline Bus Wiring Mode
Complete the following steps to connect a device to a bus in Busline bus
wiring mode:
1. Place the component that you wish to connect to the bus on the
workspace.
2. Place a bus on the workspace as described in the Placing a Bus section.

For best results, position the bus so that it is at right-angles to the pins
to be connected. The bus should be long enough to comfortably
accomodate the number of connections, as in the example in the above
figure.
3. Click once on the component to select it and select Place»Bus Vector
Connect to display the Bus Vector Connect dialog box.
4. In the Component box, select the side of the component from which
terminals should be connected from the Pins drop-down list. The list
below the Pins field is populated based on your selection.

© National Instruments Corporation 4-27 NI Multisim User Manual

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

5. Highlight the pins that you wish to attach to the bus, as in the example
below.

NI Multisim User Manual 4-28 ni.com

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

6. Click on the activated down-arrow button to move the selected pins to
the bottom left field.

Note If you move an incorrect item, highlight it and click on the up-arrow button to return
it to the Pins list.

© National Instruments Corporation 4-29 NI Multisim User Manual

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

7. In the Bus box, select the bus you wish to connect to from the Name
drop-down list.

NI Multisim User Manual 4-30 ni.com

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

8. In the Buslines field, select the buslines you wish to use and click on
the enabled down-arrow button to move the selection to the lower-right
field.

(If the Buslines field is empty, you can click on the Auto-assign button
to automatically create and assign busline names that correspond to the
pin names.)
9. Click OK. The connections to the bus are made as in the example in
the figure below.

© National Instruments Corporation 4-31 NI Multisim User Manual

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

In Net Bus Wiring Mode
Complete the following steps to connect a device to a bus in Net bus wiring
mode:
1. Place the component that you wish to connect to the bus on the
workspace.
2. Place a bus on the workspace as described in the Placing a Bus section.

For best results, position the bus so that it is at right-angles to the pins
to be connected. Also, the bus should be long enough to comfortably
accomodate the number of connections.
3. Click once on the component to select it and select Place»Bus Vector
Connect to display the Bus Vector Connect dialog box.
4. In the Component box, select the side of the component from which
terminals should be connected from the Pins drop-down list. The list
below the Pins field is populated based on your selection.

NI Multisim User Manual 4-32 ni.com

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

5. Highlight the pins that you wish to attach to the bus, as in the example
below.

© National Instruments Corporation 4-33 NI Multisim User Manual

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

6. Click on the activated down-arrow button to move the selected pins to
the bottom left field.

Note If you move an incorrect item, highlight it and click on the up-arrow button to return
it to the Pins list.

NI Multisim User Manual 4-34 ni.com

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

7. In the Bus box, select the bus you wish to connect to from the Name
drop-down list.

© National Instruments Corporation 4-35 NI Multisim User Manual

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

8. In the Nets in Bus field select:
• existing nets—For example, “1” and/or “2” in the above, and click
the down-arrow button to move them to the bottom-right field.
• <new>—To map new nets to the selected component pins. Each
time you click the down-arrow button when <new> is highlighted,
an instance of <new> appears in the bottom-right field.

Note You can also click Auto-assign to automatically assign new nets to the mapped pins.

NI Multisim User Manual 4-36 ni.com

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

9. Click OK. The connections to the bus are made as in the example in
the following figure, which shows the connections made using Bus
Vector Connect (1), and the previously existing nets (2).

1 Connections Made Using Bus Vector Connect 2 Existing Nets

Variants
A variant is a specific version of a circuit. As PCBs are manufactured for
distribution on a global scale, some designs may require modifications
depending on their target markets. For example, power supply
requirements for the European market differ from those of North America.
The variations in the power supply requirements may call for the use of
different components in a design. The designer would want to produce a
single PCB which would meet requirements for both the North American
and the European versions. The board itself must contain the traces as well
as land patterns/footprints for both variations of the design. The PCB would
then be populated with components according to the target market of the
device.

© National Instruments Corporation 4-37 NI Multisim User Manual

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

Setting Up Variants
Variants are defined in the Variant Manager dialog box.

In the following example variants are entered for North American (NA) and
European (EU) versions (that is, variants) of a design.

Complete the following steps to define circuit variants:
1. Open a circuit in Multisim. In this example, the circuit name is
“VariantTest”.
2. Select Tools»Variant Manager. The Variant Manager dialog box
appears.
3. Highlight the circuit in the hierarchy that is displayed in the left pane.
“Default1” is the default name for the initial variant.

4. Highlight “Default1” in the right pane. The Rename Variant button
becomes active.

NI Multisim User Manual 4-38 ni.com

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs

Note The Remove Variant button remains disabled, as there must be at least one variable
assigned to each circuit. This button becomes active when there are two or more variants
assigned to a circuit.

5. Click Rename Variant. The Rename Variant dialog box appears.
6. Enter a new name for the variant (in this example, “NA”, for North
America) and click OK. The name of the variant changes to the entered
name in the right pane of the Variant Manager dialog box.
The name of the European variant must now be entered.
7. Click on Add Variant in the Variant Manager dialog box. The Add
Variant Name dialog box appears.
8. Enter the name for the new variant (in this example, “EU” for Europe)
and click OK. The Variant Manager dialog box now appears as
shown in the figure below.

9. Click Close to return to the workspace.

© National Instruments Corporation 4-39 NI Multisim User Manual

Select the desired circuit in the left pane. The highlighted variant is removed. Enter the new variant name and click OK to return to the Variant Manager dialog box. 2. 4. Select Tools»Variant Manager to display the Variant Manager dialog box. The Rename Variant dialog box appears.com . Select Tools»Variant Manager to display the Variant Manager dialog box. 3. and the variant you wish to delete in the right pane. and the variant you wish to rename in the right pane. The Components for Delete dialog box appears. Select the desired circuit in the left pane. Complete the following steps to rename variants in your circuit: 1.Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Complete the following steps to delete variants from your circuit: 1. 4. Click Remove Variant. Complete the following steps to remove components that are not in any of the variants: 1. Click Close to return to the workspace. Click Close to return to the workspace. 3. 2. NI Multisim User Manual 4-40 ni. 5. Click on Remove Components in the Variant Manager dialog box. Click Rename Variant.

for example. each component is included in both the NA and EU variants of the circuit. Complete the following steps to place a part in a circuit containing variants: 1. as documented in the Using the Place Component Browser section of Chapter 2. you must enable the Variant Data checkbox in the Circuit tab of the Sheet Properties dialog box. de-select its checkbox. the circuit appears as follows. © National Instruments Corporation 4-41 NI Multisim User Manual . After wiring the parts in this example. Placing Parts in Variants This section continues the example of the variants for the North American (NA) and European (EU) markets used in the Setting Up Variants section. 2. EU)”. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs If you do not wish to remove a component. Schematic Capture - Basics. Note To display the variant status for the components. “In Variant (NA. Place the parts in the usual manner. Note that at this point. Click OK to remove the components from the workspace.

you must set which component belongs to which variant. After you have set up these variants. Add a 220 V. Add a 220V lamp to the circuit (also for the EU variant).) 3. NI Multisim User Manual 4-42 ni.com . Assign variant status (in this case NA or EU) to each component as described in the Assigning Variant Status to Components section. 50 Hz power supply to the circuit. Assigning Variant Status to Components This section continues the example of the variants for the North American (NA) and European (EU) markets used in the Setting Up Variants section. 4.Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs 2. (This is for the EU variant.

Open the desired circuit as in the following example: 2. Double-click on a component (for example V2) to display the component’s properties dialog box. Included in the Status column indicates that the selected component is included in both the EU and NA variants of the circuit. © National Instruments Corporation 4-43 NI Multisim User Manual . Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Complete the following steps to assign components to variants: 1. In the above example. and click on the Variant tab.

5. but exclude it from the NA (North American) variant. so we want to include it in the NA (North American) variant. 3. Refer to the Setting the Active Variant for Simulation section for information on how to set which variant is active on your workspace. 6. The label in V2 indicates that the component is only in the EU variant (In EU Variant (EU)). Click OK to close the component’s properties dialog box.com .Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs This is a 220V 50Hz power supply. Highlight the line that contains “NA” in the Variant Name column and then select Excluded from the Status column. so we want to include it in the EU (European) variant. double-click on V1 and select the Variant tab. In the above figure. Highlight the line that contains EU in the Variant Name column and then select Excluded from the Status column. V2 is dimmed. Continuing with this example. indicating that it is not present in the active variant. 7. This is a 120V 60Hz power supply. Click OK to close the component’s properties dialog box. 4. but exclude it from the EU (European) variant. NI Multisim User Manual 4-44 ni.

V1 is not dimmed. When you are done. using the Variant tab as described in the preceding steps. Refer to the Setting the Active Variant for Simulation section for information on how to set which variant is active on your workspace. 8. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs In the above figure. The label in V1 indicates that the component is only in the NA variant (In Variant (NA)). and X2 is rated at 220V. Set the variant status for the lamps X1 and X2. so it is for the European variant. the circuit will appear as shown below: © National Instruments Corporation 4-45 NI Multisim User Manual . so it is for the North American variant. indicating that it is present in the active variant. X1 is rated at 120 V.

Selected Excluded from the For New Variants drop-down list. NI Multisim User Manual 4-46 ni. This component will not be included in variants of this circuit that you may create in the future. Note If you create a new variant after setting the status to Excluded. it will still be included. and click on the Variant tab. Double-click on the desired component to display its properties dialog box.Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Complete the following steps to exclude a component from future variants of a circuit: 1. rename USA to North America and the two variants will be merged into one variant called North America. 2. In this case. For example. you may end up with a circuit that has variants (say USA and North America) that you may wish to combine. just rename one of them to match the other. as that is the default setting for new components. and then place an identical component from the database. You can do this using the Rename button in the Variant Manager dialog box.com . the pasted component will include the variants from the copied circuit. Tip If you copy a component with variants from one circuit and paste it into a circuit with other variants.

as in 120V as shown in the figure below. © National Instruments Corporation 4-47 NI Multisim User Manual . Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Assigning Variant Status to Nested Circuits The active variant for a nested circuit (HB or SC) is whichever variant is mapped to its parent circuit’s active variant. Setting the Active Variant for Simulation This section continues the example of the variants for the North American (NA) and European (EU) markets used in the Setting Up Variants section. Variants that are included in the active variant are shown by blue triangles. Right-click on the desired variant. you must select the variant for simulation from the available circuit variants as described below. See below for details. The active variant is shown by a blue square. Consequently. Only one variant of a design can be simulated at a time. Complete the following steps to assign variant status to a subcircuit or hierarchical block: 1. Note You can also assign the variant status in the Variant tab of the HB/SC’s properties dialog box. and select Include in Active Variant from the pop-up. as in NA in the example in the figure below.

Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Setting the Active Variant from the Design Toolbox Complete the following steps to set the active variant from the Design Toolbox: 1.com . the hierarchy tree for VariantTest is shown. active variants have white squares as in the example below (EU). as shown in the example in the figure below (NA). Click on the “+” beside the Variants folder to open the folder. and will not be simulated. Only the active components will be included when the above circuit is simulated. NI Multisim User Manual 4-48 ni. Click on the Hierarchy tab in the Design Toolbox. When NA is set as the active variant. the circuit appears as shown in the example below. In the example in the figure below. The dimmed components are inactive. 2. Active variants are indicated by the blue square.

2. The dimmed components are inactive. © National Instruments Corporation 4-49 NI Multisim User Manual . Select Tools»Set Active Variant. Highlight the variant you wish to make active and click OK. and will not be simulated. the circuit appears as shown below: Only the active components will be included when the above circuit is simulated. When EU is the active variant. Setting the Active Variant from the Menu Complete the following steps to set the active variant from the menu: 1. Right-click on the EU variant and select Set Variant Active from the pop-up that appears. The Active variant dialog box displays. as shown below. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs 3.

back them up. A project is a collection of files. Setting up Projects Complete the following steps to Complete the following steps to create a project for circuit files: 1. Note Even if a project contains a top-level circuit that references a hierarchical block. For example. and the folder where backups of the project file are to be placed. 2. If the folders do not already exist.Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Project Management and Version Control In order to help manage the various files associated with a design. and lock files within them so that no two designers accidentally work on the same file at the same time. for example). 3. Multisim Projects may be used. Click the button next to the location fields to browse for the desired location. This is a choice left entirely up to you. they will be created. all the circuit files making up a design may be grouped together in a project. it is not necessarily the case that the hierarchical block is in that same project. Click OK. the folder where the project files are to be stored. and PCB layouts generated with Ultiboard.com . Choose File»New Project. restore them. for example. Any file type may be grouped into a project. Facilities are provided to manage the files in a project as a whole: to version them. simulation output. It may not be desirable to backup and version that hierarchical block with the circuit that references it if. the hierarchical block is accessed from many different projects. as well as external design documentation (written in Microsoft Word. NI Multisim User Manual 4-50 ni. Specify the name for your project. The New Project dialog box appears. move them. The Project View tab of the Design Toolbox appears. reports.

choose either Open File or Open as Read-Only. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Complete the following steps to add circuit files to the project: 1. Right-click on the circuit file name in the Project View tab of the Design Toolbox. Working with Projects Complete the following steps to open a file within a project: 1. are logically the PCBs matching the schematic of the project. To save a project. For example. 2. Right-click on the folder for the desired type of file. document or report files to a project: 1. 3. select it and click Open. choose File»Close Project. Choose Add file from the pop-up menu that appears. 2. and a circuit file can be part of more than one project. • PCB folder—For circuits laid out in Ultiboard. 2. 4. Netlist Report. If the file is already open by another user. right-click on the file and choose Remove. From the pop-up menu that appears. Excel spreadsheet of costs • Reports folder—For reports generated by Multisim. navigate to the desired file and click Open. choose File»Save Project. Hover the cursor over the filename to view its complete filepath. for example. Right-click on the Schematic folder in the Project View tab. the © National Instruments Corporation 4-51 NI Multisim User Manual . Bill of Materials. Complete the following steps to add PCB. Navigate to the location of the circuit file you want included in the project. To remove a file from a project. • Documents folder—For documents you wish to collect for the project. A standard file selector window appears. MS Word description of project. In the file browser that appears. There can be mutiple circuit files in one project. The file is added to the project and its name appears in the project browser. for example. PCB and select Add file. The following folders appear in the Project View tab: • Schematic folder—For circuits drawn as schematics in Multisim. To close the project.

Double-click on a circuit file in the project browser. 2. Complete the following steps to lock the file. navigate to the correct folder and open the project file. Once the project is open. Or 1. you are prompted to open it as read-only.com . 2. Complete the following steps to see information on a file in a project: 1. NI Multisim User Manual 4-52 ni. unlock. Right-click on the file name in the project browser. If the file is not in use by another user. Choose File»Recent Projects and select the project from the list that appears. 2. Choose Lock File from the pop-up menu that appears. you will not be able to save your changes to that file. the project browser shows a list of all the files within that project. Note Files in use by another user are displayed with a different color in the project browser than files that are not in use. Working with Files Contained in Projects You can lock. Complete the following steps to open a project: 1. Right-click on the file name in the project browser. and see summary information about any file in a project. The File Properties dialog box appears. A standard Windows file browser appears. Choose Unlock File from the pop-up menu that appears. Choose File»Open Project. Right-click on the file name in the project browser. 2. If necessary. Or 1. preventing anyone else from opening it: 1. If it is in use. Choose Properties from the pop-up menu that appears. If you open the file as read-only. it opens. 2.Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Open File command will not be available. Complete the following steps to unlock a file: 1.

Complete the following steps to restore a backed up project folder: 1. The system generates a name for the backup. 2. You can then restore the folder as of that day and time. Note Restoring a backed up project folder replaces the current folder. If you wish. © National Instruments Corporation 4-53 NI Multisim User Manual . Close all circuits associated with the project. you can change this by typing a new name in the field. The Version Control dialog box appears. The Version Control dialog box appears. Complete the following steps to back up a project folder: 1. 5. 2. (The Location field shows where the backup versions of the listed projects are located. Choose File»Version Control. Enable Back up current version. based on the system date. 4.) 4. 3. Choose File»Version Control. Chapter 4 Working with Larger Designs Version Control You can back up the contents of a project folder. The project file is backed up to the filepath shown in the Location field. 3. Click OK. Select Restore project. save the folder to a new location or with a new name before proceeding. A list of the available backed-up project folders appears at the bottom of the dialog box. You are prompted to confirm that you want to over-write the existing project folder contents with the backed up version. Select the file you want to restore and click OK. If you want to keep the current folder as well as the backed up version.

the component information is saved with it. There are three levels of database provided by Multisim. simulation (models) and PCB layout (footprints). The Master Database is read only. it is a copy of the component that is placed onto the circuit. The User Database is private to an individual user.Components 5 This chapter introduces you to the underlying structure and organization of the Multisim component database. or any similar components previously placed on the circuit. It is used for components built by an individual that are not intended to be shared. When a designer chooses a component from the database and drops it onto the circuit. as well as other electrical information. merge databases. and contains components supplied by National Instruments. Various database management tools are supplied in order to move components between databases. Some of the features described in this chapter may not be available in your edition of Multisim. but will affect all subsequently placed ones. any edits made to the component in the database after a copy has been dropped do not affect the previously placed components. Any edits made to the component in the circuit do not affect the original database copy. It also explains how to access the database for parts and how to search the database for information. the user has the option to keep the loaded parts as is. All the databases are divided into groups and then into families within those groups. Structure of the Component Database The Multisim component database is designed to hold the information necessary to describe any component. It contains everything needed for schematic capture (symbols). to make copies © National Instruments Corporation 5-1 NI Multisim User Manual . and edit them. Refer to the release notes for a list of the features in your edition. When a circuit is saved. Likewise. The Corporate Database is used to store custom components that are intended to be shared across an organization. On load.

you must store it in either the User Database or Corporate Database. or to update similarly-named components with the latest values from the database.com . to ensure integrity of information. If you modify a component. Database Levels Components are stored in three different database levels: • the Master Database stores the components as originally shipped with Multisim. these remain available to any other selected users. You can build a circuit that contains components from any or all of the available databases. The Corporate Database is primarily intended for companies/institutions (or individuals) who work on projects where components with specific attributes are shared within a group or project. Classification of Components in the Database Multisim divides components into logical groups. imported or created by you. The User Database and the Corporate Database are empty when you first use Multisim. • the Corporate Database stores components selected and possibly modified or created by an individual user or company/institution.Chapter 5 Components to place into their user or corporate database. these cannot be edited. The groups are listed below: • Sources • Basic • Diodes • Transistors • Analog • TTL • CMOS NI Multisim User Manual 5-2 ni. You cannot modify the Master Database . these are available only to you. Each group contains families of related components. • the User Database stores components modified. thereby creating your own version. You can use the User Database to store frequently used components or components you create using component editing (which is described in the following chapter).

Searching for Components Multisim comes with a powerful search engine to help you quickly locate components in its database. Complete the following steps to perform a standard search of the database: 1. Click Search. text and/or numbers. Schematic Capture . which is the more common method. 4. for more information. 3. The Search Component dialog box appears. Refer to the Using the Place Component Browser section of Chapter 2. the browser dialog box that appears lets you browse for components anywhere in the Multisim database. for example. Select Place»Component to display the Select a Component browser. Optionally. © National Instruments Corporation 5-3 NI Multisim User Manual . Case is not considered. Enter alphanumeric characters. Locating Components in the Database You can locate components in a specific component family within a specific database by either browsing through the available data. Enter the desired Value for the user field Title you wish to search. click Advanced Search Using User Fields to display available user fields. Chapter 5 Components • MCU • Misc Digital • Mixed • Indicators • Power • Misc • RF • Electro-mechanical • Ladder Diagrams. These functions are described in this section. 2. Browsing for Components When you are placing a component.Basics. that is. Vendor. Enter your search criteria (you must enter at least one item) in the appropriate fields. or by searching for a component that meets specific criteria.

Types of Information Stored for Components The Multisim databases store information about components in pre-defined fields (that is. fields you can use to capture information that you want to record about a component). Tip The more specific your search criteria. Enter desired parameters and click Search. choose it from the list—the displayed fields change accordingly. To place the selected component. the Refine Search Component Result dialog box appears. 2. displaying information about the first component that matches your search criteria.Chapter 5 Components 5. their models. The Component list contains a list of all the components that match your criteria. 7. You can refine your search if your initial attempt yielded a large number of items. and their packages. click OK. select the desired component. Click Search. Multisim also offers a detailed report of information about components. From the Component list. where you can place the component by clicking OK. Note The original search parameters remain in the Refine Search Component dialog until a component is placed. for more information. When the search is complete. NI Multisim User Manual 5-4 ni. 6. Refer to the Component Detail Report section of Chapter 12. fields that are pre-filled in Multisim) and user fields (that is. Complete the following steps to refine your search: 1.com . Reports. You return to the Select a Component dialog box. Click Refine Search. the smaller the number of matching components. To view information about any component found by the search. The Refine Search Component dialog box appears.

for information about setting up and entering data into user fields. Tolerance Percent tolerance for the resistor. Not available for QUAD 2-INPUT NAND resistors.5 capacitor selected in the component list. Chapter 5 Components Pre-Defined Fields The following pre-defined fields appear in the Select a Component browser: Field Description Example Database Name of Multisim database in which the User component is stored.analog.com User Fields In addition to the fields of data that are pre-defined and filled with information before Multisim is shipped. Carbon film inductors or capacitors only. you can also create your own fields of data to be stored about components. Component Name of the individual component. Function Describes the component. Group Name of the group to which the component TTL belongs. Refer to the Editing User Fields section of Chapter 6. Component type Describes the construction of resistors. Model Manuf. © National Instruments Corporation 5-5 NI Multisim User Manual ./ Footprint for the component (real components DO14 Type only) and the package type. 74S00D Symbol Symbol used (either ANSI or DIN) to represent the component during schematic capture. Contents vary (for a resistor). inductors or capacitors. Hyperlink A link to a desired document. Footprint Manuf. depending on component selection./ID Name of the company that manufactures the Texas Instruments/74S00 component and the component’s ID. Used in Ultiboard or other vendors’ PCB layout products. inductor or 0. Component Editing. www. Family Name of family to which the component 74S belongs.

• Show User Data Columns list—Select the User fields to display. 4. Filtering Displayed Components Complete the following steps to filter the components that are displayed in the Components tab of the Database Manager dialog box: 1. Complete the following steps to invoke the Database Manager dialog box: 1. which lets you: • add and remove component families from the User Database or Corporate Database. • Select All—Click to display all User fields. 3. • Clear All—Click to clear all checkboxes. Or Choose Tools»Database»Database Manager. You cannot add or remove families in the Master Database. • set up or modify user field titles for any database. Click the Database Manager button on the Main toolbar. • Component field—Type the component name. 2.com . You can also use wildcards.Chapter 5 Components Managing the Database Multisim’s database is managed through the Database Manager dialog box. Make selections as described below: • Family list—Select the desired family. The Filters dialog box closes and your selections are reflected in the Components tab of the Database Manager dialog box. Select the desired database from the Database Name drop-down list. • add or change component toolbar button symbols for component families in the User Database or Corporate Database. NI Multisim User Manual 5-6 ni. Use the <Ctrl> and <Shift> keys with the left mouse button to select multiple items in the list. Click Filter to display the Filters dialog box. Click OK.

From the Database Name drop-down list. choose the database containing the component you want to remove (from the Corporate Database or User Database only). Click the Database Manager button on the Main toolbar. Click Delete. choose the database containing the components you want to copy. You are prompted to confirm the action. Click Copy. Select the components that you wish to copy. group and family that you want to copy the component(s) to and click OK. Select the components that you wish to delete. Select the Components tab in the Database Manager dialog box. From the Database Name drop-down list. The components are removed from the database. 6. 2. You can use the <Ctrl> and <Shift> keys with the left mouse button to select multiple items in the list. Copying Components Complete the following steps to copy an existing component to the Corporate Database or the User Database: 1. 4. Chapter 5 Components Deleting Components Complete the following steps to delete an existing component from the Corporate or User database: 1. The Select Destination Family Name dialog box appears. Click the Database Manager button on the Main toolbar. 6. Or Choose Tools»Database»Database Manager. 5. navigate to the database. © National Instruments Corporation 5-7 NI Multisim User Manual . 4. 2. 5. You can use the <Ctrl> and <Shift> keys with the left mouse button to select multiple items in the list. 3. In the Family Tree. Note You cannot delete a component from the Master Database. You are returned to the Components tab in the Database Manager dialog box. Select the Components tab. Click Yes. Or Select Tools»Database»Database Manager. 3.

NI Multisim User Manual 5-8 ni. Exporting Components Complete the following steps to export a selected component: 1. If necessary. click Close. When you are finished copying components.prz)—Select to export all fields in the database for the selected part. Click OK. 4. 5. Complete the following steps to save a placed component to the database: 1. A standard Windows save dialog appears. select one of: • Component packed file (*.csv file. and enter the desired File name. In the Save as type field. The Select Destination Family Name dialog box appears. Click Export. Click OK. click the Add Family button to create one. Saving Placed Components If you have made changes to a placed component (for example.txt)—Select to export the selected component’s user fields into a . Navigate to the desired component group and family in either the User Database or the Corporate Database. Select the component on the workspace and select Tools»Database»Save Component to DB. 3.csv)—Select to export the selected component’s user fields into a . • User fields only (Tab delimited) (*. click Add Family to create a family in the desired group. 2.txt file.com . 2. Navigate to the desired location. The Save Components to the Database dialog box displays with information about the component. Select the desired component in the Components tab of the Database Manager. Click Close. 4. 3. changed the footprint) you can save the placed component to either the User Database or Corporate Database. • User fields only (Comma delimited) (*. (You must import this file into Multisim to read it).Chapter 5 Components Note If there is not a component family in the group that you select. 7.

Choose Tools»Database»Database Manager. 4. or vice versa: 1. choose either the Corporate or User Database. 4. Select the components that you wish to move. Select the Components tab in the Database Manager dialog box. 2. Navigate to the desired component group and family in either the User Database or the Corporate Database. If necessary. Choose Tools»Database»Database Manager. click Add Family to create a family in the desired group. and click OK. Select the desired components and click Reset User Fields. 6. Chapter 5 Components Moving Components Between Databases Complete the following steps to move components from the Corporate Database to the User Database. 5. The Select Destination Family Name dialog box appears. Select Master Database in the Database Name drop-down list. Select the Components tab in the Database Manager dialog box. Click Add Family. You are returned to the Database Manager dialog box. 2. 3. You can use the <Ctrl> and <Shift> keys with the left mouse button to select multiple items in the list. 2. 3. Select the desired group from the Select Family Group drop-down. A default icon is automatically assigned to the new family. To change it. follow the procedure below. © National Instruments Corporation 5-9 NI Multisim User Manual . 4. Click Move. The New Family Name dialog box displays. Click OK to move the component. Select the Family tab in the Database Manager dialog box. 6. The newly-created family appears in the associated component group. 3. Resetting Master dB User Fields Complete the following steps to restore the contents of user fields for components in the Master Database to their original “factory” settings: 1. type the desired name for the new family in the Enter Family Name field. In the Database Family Tree area. Managing Families Complete the following steps to add a component family to the User Database or Corporate Database database: 1. 5.

You are prompted to confirm your deletion. 2. 2. The new toolbar button will be displayed in the Database Manager dialog box in the Family area and in the Family Tree area under the group where the family was added. You are prompted to confirm your command to delete all empty family folders. Navigate to the component family you wish to delete. With the desired component family selected.Chapter 5 Components Complete the following steps to load a component toolbar button: 1. Complete the following steps to delete a component family from the User Database or Corporate Database: 1. click Edit. 5. You can edit both the ANSI and DIN buttons by selecting the ANSI or DIN selector in the Family area of the Database Manager. 3. Edit the bitmap file to your requirements and then save and close the paint program.com . Modifying User Field Titles and Content There are twenty user fields that you can edit to provide user-specific information about the component. Modifying user field titles changes the titles for all databases. The component family is automatically removed. Your paint program is launched and the bitmap file of the button is opened. click Load. 3. 2. Complete the following steps to delete empty families from the User Database or Corporate Database: 1. 2. NI Multisim User Manual 5-10 ni. 3. Complete the following steps to edit the default family name button: 1. To proceed click Yes. You are prompted to navigate to the desired toolbar button file. The revised button will appear as the family name button. 4. Click Delete Family. Select the desired toolbar button file and click Open. not only the selected database. All empty family folders will be deleted from the Family list for the selected database. With the desired component family selected. Click Delete Empty Families.

Caution User field content for Master dB components is stored in the Corporate database. and the Save unique component on placement checkbox is enabled. Right-scroll to the desired user field for the selected component. 3. and C components found in the Master database are in fact a combination of the component’s value. Enter the desired names in the Title fields. Chapter 5 Components Complete the following steps to modify user field titles: 1. For the majority of non. the contents of the user fields are entered and edited from the Components tab of the Database Manager. Refer to the Modifying User Field Content for RLC Components section for information about resistors. Click the RLC Components tab in the Database Manager. Click the Components tab in the Database Manager. L. 2. tolerance. Right-scroll to the desired user field for the selected component. Modifying User Field Content for RLC Components Complete the following steps to modify user field contents for RLC components: 1. Caution R. Any user field information is also lost. component type. 3. © National Instruments Corporation 5-11 NI Multisim User Manual . or capacitors.R. or the links may not function when clicked. Enter the desired information in the user field. Consequently. Click Save. Complete the following steps to modify user field contents for non-RLC components: 1. 2. 2. Consequently. Click the User Field Titles tab in the Database Manager. L. Caution Do not change the title of the Hyperlink user field. Select the desired Database Name and component. 4. and footprint manufacturer/type. Enter the desired information in the user field. 4. these components no longer appear in the Master database. inductors. the contents of their user fields no longer appear in the Master database. Select the desired component. Whenever a unique combination of these values is selected in the Select a Component dialog box. the combination of these values is saved in the Corporate database. if the Corporate dB is deleted. or C components in the database. if the Corporate dB is deleted. 3.

Click Select Source Database Names. • Corporate—Corporate database. 3. as a new Master Database is loaded when you install Multisim. 2. Click the About button in the Database Manager dialog box. The title bar of the dialog box changes to reflect your selection. • Convert DB V6 ==> V10—Converts V6 (Multisim 2001) components to V10 format. Editing Components Refer to Chapter 6. In the Type drop-down list select one of: • Convert DB V8/V9 ==> V10—Converts V8 or V9 components to V10 format. The Convert Database dialog box appears. Component Editing. The Select a Component Database Name dialog box displays. Note The option to convert the Master Database is not available. Converting Databases If you are a user of an earlier version of Multisim. NI Multisim User Manual 5-12 ni. • Convert DB V7 ==> V10—Converts V7 components to V10 format. scroll down as desired.com . for detailed information about editing components. Select the type of database that you wish to convert from the Files of type drop-down list: • User—User database. Select Tools»Database»Convert Database. To view version and other information. 2. Complete the following steps to update your databases: 1. your User Database and Corporate Database must be converted to Multisim 10 format if you wish to use their components in Multisim 10.Chapter 5 Components Displaying Database Information Complete the following steps to review database information: 1. 4. The Database Information dialog box displays.

Select the desired option and click OK. 8. © National Instruments Corporation 5-13 NI Multisim User Manual . The Duplicate Component Name dialog box displays. • Auto-Rename—Import and automatically rename the duplicate components. Click Start. 7. Chapter 5 Components 5. • Overwrite—Replace the Multisim components with the older components. • Ignore—Do not import components with duplicate names. Click Close to close the Convert Database dialog box. 6. The database is converted. Highlight the desired database file (the one you wish to convert) and click Open. You are returned to the Convert Database dialog box.

com . they will be indicated by a Diff button in the appropriate column and a red arrow in a box to its right. refer to the Updating Similar Component Symbols section. you should update its components to match the current database by following the procedure below. If there are any differences. NI Multisim User Manual 5-14 ni. Complete the following steps to update components: 1.Chapter 5 Components Updating Components from Databases If you open a circuit that was created in an older version of Multisim. For information about similar components. Select Tools»Update Circuit Components. A dialog box similar to the following displays.

you may wish to select the Hide components that do not need to be updated checkbox. U4 in the figure in step 1. Optionally: • If a Diff button appears in the Symbol column. you can click any Similar button that appears. • Footprint column—Be sure that all components with a Diff button in this column have their corresponding “red arrow” box enabled. 3. click on it show the difference in footprints between the component on the workspace and the component in the current database. Chapter 5 Components 2. Updating Similar Component Symbols Components with a Similar button in the Symbol column do not need to be updated for the circuit to simulate correctly. Click Update to update the selected components. • If a Diff button appears in the Footprint column. or for the circuit to be exported to PCB layout software without error. • Model column—Be sure that all components with a Diff button in this column have their corresponding “red arrow” box enabled. be sure to enable its corresponding “red arrow” box before you click the Update button in the dialog box. Note To update all items in a Symbol. click on it to show the difference in symbols between the component on the workspace and the component in the current database. Model. or Footprint column. Consequently. Select the items to update as follows: • Symbol column—Be sure that all components with a Diff button in this column have their corresponding “red arrow” box enabled. click on it to show the difference in models between the component on the workspace and the component in the current database. If you wish to update a similar Symbol. If you choose not to enable this checkbox. • If a Diff button appears in the Model column. © National Instruments Corporation 5-15 NI Multisim User Manual . enable the Update checkbox to the right of the colum title. and determine whether or not to update it based on the information that appears. For example. 4.

The Database Merge dialog box appears. 2. Select Tools»Database»Merge Database. Click Start. The selected database is merged into your Corporate or User Database. Click Select a Component Database Name and navigate to the database that you wish to merge into your database and click Open. 5. 3. 4. You are returned to the Database Merge dialog box. Click Close. . Select the desired Target Database.Merging Databases Complete the following steps to merge the contents of another database into your User or Corporate Database: 1.

an existing component might now be available in a new package (originally pin-through hole. Tip Where possible. rather than create one. Introduction to Component Editing You can edit components in Multisim using the following methods: • Component Wizard—Use to create and edit new components. or delete a component. Refer to the Creating Components with the Component Wizard section for more information. Refer to the Editing Components section for more information. For example. You can modify any component stored in the Multisim component database. Some of the features described in this chapter may not be available in your edition of Multisim. we recommend that you modify an existing. You can easily copy the component information and change only the package details to create this new component. and how to create simulation models using Multisim’s Model Makers or code modeling.Component Editing 6 This chapter explains how to create. © National Instruments Corporation 6-1 NI Multisim User Manual . copy. You cannot edit the Master Database. edit. However. now surface mount). You can also create your own component and place it into the database or load a component from another source. • Component Properties dialog box—Use to edit existing components and is accessed from the Database Manager dialog box. similar component. It also explains how to load any models into the Multisim database that you may have developed. you can copy components to the Corporate or User database and then modify them as desired. obtained or purchased. Refer to the release notes for a list of the features in your edition.

where you can: • add and remove component families from the User or Corporate databases. If you do not give a new name. Refer to the Editing a Component’s Model section for more information. you must store the modified information in the User Database or Corporate Database database. Components can be organized in the Database Manager. Caution If you modify information about any component in the Corporate Database or User Database. • Model (information used to represent the actual operation/behavior of the component during simulation)—Necessary only for a component that will be simulated. you are prompted for a new name for the component. date and author)—refer to the Editing a Component’s General Properties section for more information. Note If you modify any information about a component in the Master Database. • modify user field titles for any database.Chapter 6 Component Editing Each component in the component database is identified by the following types of information. • User fields (if used to further define the components). each of which is in a specific tab in the Component Properties dialog box: • General information (such as name. • add and change family icons. Refer to the Editing User Fields section for more information. • Electronic parameters of the component. Refer to the Editing a Component’s Electronic Parameters section for more information. Refer to the Editing a Component Pin Model section for more information. • Footprint (the package that Multisim uses when exporting a schematic containing this component to a PCB Layout package such as Ultiboard). manufacturer. so the original User Database or Corporate Database component information is overwritten. Multisim saves the changes to the original location. NI Multisim User Manual 6-2 ni. Refer to the Editing a Component’s Footprint section for more information.com . • Symbol (pictorial representation of the component for schematic capture)—Refer to the Editing a Component’s Symbol section for more information. • Pin model (information used to represent the behavior of the pin during simulation).

Changes made to placed components in this manner will not be reflected in the database. Or Choose Tools»Component Wizard. Refer to the Placing Resistors. 2. Inductors or Capacitors section of Chapter 2. and the following characters: -+!@#$%^&()[]{}: • Author Name—Completed by system. 2uF. numbers. inductors and capacitors. Edits to individual components can also be made via the Spreadsheet View.Basics. 3. change if desired. This can be done using the component’s properties dialog box (double-click on the component to display) and changing parameters in the various tabs. Creating Components with the Component Wizard Multisim includes a Component Wizard that quickly steps you through the process of creating a component for use in schematic capture. This is useful because you can search the function field when looking for a specific type of component to place. © National Instruments Corporation 6-3 NI Multisim User Manual . Complete the following steps to create an analog component: 1. inductors and capacitors created using this procedure will only contain basic simulation model information. 2N2221. Select Analog from the Component Type drop-down list. as well as simulation or layout. • Function—A brief description of the component. resistors. Step 1 of the Component Wizard appears. Creating an Analog Component Analog parts such as diodes and transistors can be created following the procedure in this section. Those that are placed from the master database have additional temperature-related SPICE simulation parameters. it will contain the parameters that it had before it was edited. However. for more information. or both. If you place the same component from the database. Complete the following: • Component Name—The value of the component. Examples include 10 ohms. You can also create resistors. This field can only contain letters. Click the Create Component button in the Main toolbar. Chapter 6 Component Editing Tip You can also edit components that you have already placed on the workspace. Schematic Capture .

Select one of: • I will use this component for both simulation and layout (model and footprint)—To use the component for both simulation and PCB layout. Refer to the Select a Footprint dialog box section for more information on this dialog box. Click Select a Footprint. • Select the desired Database Name. select the database where the component will be stored and click on the Add button. Enter “Generic” in the manufacturer field and click OK. If you select Yes. The Add a Footprint dialog box appears. Note You can also enter values directly into the Footprint Manufacturer and Footprint Type fields instead of using the Select a Footprint dialog box. Click Next.Chapter 6 Component Editing 4. If you choose to use the component for both simulation and layout. for example. If you choose to use the component for simulation only. scroll down the list at the bottom of the dialog box and click the desired Footprint. Refer to the Add a Footprint dialog box section for more information. 6. where you select a footprint from one of the databases. The next step of the wizard appears. Be sure to place the name in the correct field. • Layout only (footprint)—To use the component for PCB layout only. Refer to the Add a Footprint dialog box section for more information. The Select a Footprint dialog box appears. Note If you do not wish to assign a footprint at this time. If you enter a value in either of these fields that does not exist in the Master or User Database. 5. • Simulation only (model)—To use the component for simulation only. Click Select. 7. you can create it later in Ultiboard. you will be prompted to confirm that you wish to add the information to a new footprint. Type in a name in the Footprint field. TO-39. You are returned to the Component Wizard. for example. the wizard includes eight steps. After you have named the footprint here. where you enter the component’s footprint information (if applicable). placeholder. for layout only it includes six steps.com . Note The number of steps you must complete depends on the selections you make in step 1. NI Multisim User Manual 6-4 ni. you will be presented with the Add a Footprint dialog box. The Footprint Manufacturer and Footprint Type fields have been populated based on the selected footprint. the wizard includes seven steps.

This is for multi-section components. This is where you enter symbol information for the component. select ANSI or DIN. GND (ground). 9. Schematic Capture .Advanced Functions. Chapter 6 Component Editing 8. click Edit to launch the Symbol Editor. Input. Common. If you select Multi-Section Component. to use the same symbol for both the DIN and ANSI Symbol Set. You can create a multi-section component with up to 96 sections. 10. Click Next to display the next step of the Component Wizard. Click Next to display the next step of the wizard. You can also use this button to copy the symbol of a multi-section component to another section in that component. • ERC Status column—Click in a field in this column and select whether to include or exclude the pin from Electrical Rules Checking. for more information. © National Instruments Corporation 6-5 NI Multisim User Manual . Refer to the Electrical Rules Checking section of Chapter 3. • Click Copy To. Output and PWR (power). the Number of Sections and Section Details elements are added to the dialog. Refer to the Copying a Component’s Symbol section for more information. Enter the component’s pin parameters as described below: • Add Hidden Pin button—Click to add hidden pins: Power. Refer to the Copying a Multi-Section Component’s Symbol section for more information. • Section column—Click in a field in this column and select the desired section for this pin. NC (no connection). Ground. in this example). Select Single Section Component or Multi-Section Component as required. to modify the symbol. The symbol you assign to this component appears when it is placed on the workspace. Complete these as required. • Click the Copy from DB button to browse the component databases if you wish to use an existing component symbol. • Type column—Click a field in this column and select the pin type from the drop-down list that appears. Specify the Number of Pins for the component (three. • In the Symbol Set area. Refer to the Creating and Editing a Component’s Symbol with the Symbol Editor section for more information. These pin types affect the ERC report and the pin drivers/receivers for digital components. Bidirectional. A hidden pin is part of the model and/or footprint that does not show in the schematic. • Optionally. 11. Choices are: Passive.

To accept the symbol information displayed. The symbol and footprint pins must accurately map in order to transfer correctly to PCB layout—refer to the Pins section for a more detailed explanation of symbol and footprint pins. inductor or capacitor. NI Multisim User Manual 6-6 ni. • For advanced pin mapping options. the desired model file. This model data will have only been copied to the selected section of the component. click Map Pins. Use to copy model information from a selected section of a multi-section component to the target sections that you select in the Select Target dialog box. Refer to the Advanced Pin Mapping Dialog section for more information. 13. and select. The mapping information you enter here will be displayed in the Footprint tab of the Component Properties dialog box. This would typically be used after using the Select from DB button to copy model data from another component. Refer to the Copying a Multi-Section Component’s Symbol section for more information.com . click Next. VCC. Refer to the Copying the Model of One Component to Another section for more information. This mapping is needed for exporting to a layout package. • Select from DB—Displays the Select Model Data dialog box.) The buttons in this step work as described below. you can copy the information into the remaining sections of the component. this step does not appear. Note If you are creating a basic resistor. where you copy model data from an existing component. Click Next to display the Select Simulation Model step. enter a corresponding footprint pin. • Model Maker—Displays the Select Model Maker dialog box. (If the component does not require simulation. This step is where you map symbol and footprint pin information. Refer to the Creating a Component Model Using the Model Makers section for more information. skip this step. Refer to the Loading an Existing Model section for more information. By using Copy to. • Load from File—Displays a standard file browser where you navigate to.Chapter 6 Component Editing 12. • Copy to—Displays the Select Target dialog box. where you can select model makers that automatically generate simulation models based on datasheet values. A symbol pin is the name of the pin in the symbol. The Advanced Pin Mapping dialog box displays. The footprint pin is the number or name of that pin on the footprint in PCB layout. for example. • For each symbol pin.

Capacitor(c). Navigate to the family where you want to save the component and click Finish. The Value fields changes to reflect your selection. for more information. Or Choose Tools»Component Wizard. Refer to the Placing Resistors. (This is for parts with simulation models only. 15. Inductor(l). for example. where you set mapping information between the symbol and the simulation model. for example 100 uF. Refer to the Managing Families section of Chapter 5. 2. • Value fields—Enter the desired value. © National Instruments Corporation 6-7 NI Multisim User Manual . 16.) • For each symbol pin enter a corresponding number to connect to its respective nodes in the model. Creating a Digital Component Complete the following steps to create a digital component: 1. created using the Component Wizard will only contain basic simulation model information. Step 1 of the Component Wizard appears. change if desired. The dialog box that appears lets you indicate where you would like the component to be saved. inductor or capacitor. Click Next. and the following characters: -+!@#$%^&()[]{}: • Author Name—Completed by system. for more information. 74ALS00M. inductor or capacitor. you can add a new family by clicking on the Add Family button. Note A basic resistor. Click the Create Component button in the Main toolbar. Complete the following as desired: • Component Name—The value of the component. The component is saved in the selected family. Click Next to display the next step. This field can only contain letters. numbers. The mapping information you enter here will be displayed in the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. If there is no family in the group that you want to save the component. Components. Chapter 6 Component Editing 14. Inductors or Capacitors section of Chapter 2. If you are creating a basic resistor. Schematic Capture - Basics. this dialog includes the following: • SPICE Model Type drop-down list—Select one of: Resistor(r). Those that are placed from the master database have additional temperature-related SPICE simulation parameters.

Note The number of steps you must complete depends on the selections you make in step 1. Refer to the Select a Footprint dialog box section for more information about this dialog box. The Add a Footprint dialog box appears. M14A. The Component Technology drop-down list appears—Select the desired techology. select the database where the component will be stored and click on the Add button. • Layout only (footprint)—To use the component for PCB layout only. You are returned to the Component Wizard. The next step of the wizard appears. for example. Note If you do not wish to assign a footprint at this time. 4. Enter “Generic” in the manufacturer field and click OK. Note You can also enter values directly into the Footprint Manufacturer and Footprint Type fields instead of using the Select a Footprint dialog box. where you enter the component’s footprint information. Refer to the Add a Footprint dialog box section for more information. scroll down the list at the bottom of the dialog box and click the desired Footprint. 5. • Select the desired Database Name. placeholder. 7. • Simulation only (model)—To use the component for simulation only. for example. Click Select a Footprint.com . Select digital from the Component Type drop-down list. the wizard includes seven steps. If you enter a value in either NI Multisim User Manual 6-8 ni. Click Next. for example. The Select a Footprint dialog box appears. If you choose to use the component for both simulation and layout. for layout only it includes six steps. the wizard includes eight steps. Select one of: • I will use this component for both simulation and layout (model and footprint)—To use the component for both simulation and PCB layout. Click Select. If you choose to use the component for simulation only. where you select a footprint from one of the databases. The Footprint Manufacturer and Footprint Type fields have been populated based on the selected footprint. 74ALS. 6. 3. Type in a name in the Footprint field.Chapter 6 Component Editing • Function—A brief description of the component.

this section will have different options available (for example. VCC). Refer to the Add a Footprint dialog box section for more information. Refer to the Creating and Editing a Component’s Symbol with the Symbol Editor section for more information. click Edit to launch the Symbol Editor. If you select Multi-Section Component. The symbol you assign to this component appears when it is placed on the workspace. You can also use this button to copy the symbol of a multi-section component to another section in that component. 8. Select Single Section Component or Multi-Section Component as desired. Chapter 6 Component Editing of these fields that do not exist in the Master or User Database. • Optionally. to modify the symbol. Ground. • Click Copy To. 9. you will be prompted to confirm that you wish to add the information to a new footprint. GND). Select the desired radio button. the Number of Sections and Section Details elements are added to the dialog. select ANSI or DIN. • Hidden Power Pins—Depending on the Component Technology selected in step 1. Complete these as desired. • In the Symbol Set area. This is where you enter symbol information for the component. you will be presented with the Add a Footprint dialog box. 10. Select the desired checkboxes. Refer to the Copying a Component’s Symbol section for more information. • Section column—Click in a field in this column and select the desired section for this pin. Click Next to display the next step of the wizard. Common. to use the same symbol for both the DIN and ANSI Symbol Set. this section will have different options available (for example. Refer to the Copying a Multi-Section Component’s Symbol section for more information. If you select Yes. Unconnected. • Click the Copy from DB button to browse the component databases if you wish to use an existing component symbol. • Hidden Ground Pins—Depending on the Component Technology selected in step 1. Enter the component’s pin parameters as described below: • Add Hidden Pin button—click to add hidden pins: Power. This is for multi-section components. Click Next to display the next step of the Component Wizard. © National Instruments Corporation 6-9 NI Multisim User Manual .

Refer to the Copying a Multi-Section Component’s Symbol section for more information. By using Copy to. The Advanced Pin Mapping dialog box displays. • Copy to—Displays the Select Target dialog box. • Load from File—Displays a standard file browser where you navigate to. click Next. 3-State. and select. where you copy model data from an existing component. This model data will have only been copied to the selected section of the component. Refer to the Loading an Existing Model section for more information. • ERC Status column—Click in a field in this column and select whether to Include or Exclude the pin from Electrical Rules Checking. you can copy the information into the remaining sections of the component.Chapter 6 Component Editing • Type column—Click a field in this column and select the pin type from the drop-down list that appears.com . click Map Pins. NI Multisim User Manual 6-10 ni. Choices are: Open Collector. The buttons in this step work as described below. Refer to the Advanced Pin Mapping Dialog section for more information. Schmitt Trigger. The symbol and footprint pins must accurately map in order to transfer correctly to PCB layout—refer to the Pins section for a more detailed explanation of symbol and footprint pins. 11. • For advanced pin mapping options. This is where you map symbol and footprint pin information. this step does not appear). the desired model file. This would typically be used after using the Select from DB button to copy model data from another component. 12. Input. Refer to the Electrical Rules Checking section for more information. The mapping information you enter here will be displayed in the Footprint tab of the Component Properties dialog box. Bi-Directional. This mapping is needed for exporting to a layout package. NC (no connection). GND (ground). • For each symbol pin. Use to copy model information from a selected section of a multi-section component to the target sections that you select in the Select Target dialog box. The footprint pin is the number or name of that pin on the footprint in PCB layout. and VCC. • Select from DB—Displays the Select Model Data dialog box. Refer to the Copying the Model of One Component to Another section for more information. To accept the symbol information displayed. enter a corresponding footprint pin. Active Drive. A symbol pin is the name of the pin in the symbol. Click Next to display the Select Simulation Model step. VCC. (If the component does not require simulation. for example.

only count the ports in the entity declaration. Refer to the Managing Families section of Chapter 5. Click Next. Complete the following steps to create a VHDL component: 1. this section details making a VHDL component for simulation only. The Component Technology drop-down list appears with VHDL selected. For simplification. 3. Components. where you set mapping information between the symbol and the simulation model. change if desired. If there is no family in the group that you want to save the component. select Simulation only (model) and click Next. 14. Set the number of pins to be equal to the number of ports you have in the VHDL component. Click Next to display the next step. • Function—A brief description of the component. • For each symbol pin enter a corresponding number to connect to its respective nodes in the model. you can add a new family by clicking on the Add Family button. The mapping information you enter here will be displayed in the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. 2. © National Instruments Corporation 6-11 NI Multisim User Manual . For this example. The dialog box that appears lets you indicate where you would like the component to be saved. Complete the following: • Component Name—The value of the component. and the following characters: -+!@#$%^&()[]{}: • Author Name—Completed by system. The component is saved in the selected family. numbers. Don’t count power or ground. Step 1 of the Component Wizard appears. 4. Or Choose Tools»Component Wizard. Click the Create Component button in the Main toolbar. This field can only contain letters. 15. Select VHDL from the Component Type drop-down list. for more information. 5. Chapter 6 Component Editing 13. Creating a VHDL Component The Component Wizard creates VHDL parts in a similar manner to analog and digital components. Navigate to the family where you want to save the component and click Finish.

Click Next and change the symbol using the Edit or Copy from DB button. reset: in std_ulogic.Chapter 6 Component Editing Note When you are creating your entity declaration in the VHDL source code. This section uses the following six-port example: entity QUIZSHOW is port ( clock: in std_ulogic. time_up: out std_ulogic ). contestantC: in std_ulogic. 6. If you are using vectors than assign one pin to each bit in the vector. then bi-directional ports. contestantB: in std_ulogic. NI Multisim User Manual 6-12 ni. Refer to the Creating and Editing a Component’s Symbol with the Symbol Editor section and the Copying a Component’s Symbol section for more information. and finally outputs. you must list inputs first. Be sure to select the desired Hidden Ground Pins and Hidden Power Pins. contestantA: in std_ulogic.com . end QUIZSHOW.

using the same names that you selected in the previous step under Hidden Ground Pins and Hidden Power Pins. Chapter 6 Component Editing 7. © National Instruments Corporation 6-13 NI Multisim User Manual . Be sure use the Add Hidden Pin button to add the power and ground pins. This is done in the Type column as shown below. Click Next and select the pin drivers to use with the component.

6 . 3 . and navigate to the VHDL file you wish to use. For VHDL. click Load from File.reset. Don’t forget to change the VCC and GND Symbol Pin’s Model Nodes to VCC and GND. you see that the order of the model pins used in this example is: 1 . This will have a . but the order here is critical.Chapter 6 Component Editing 8. Click Next. Earlier in this procedure. 5 . Click Next to display the next dialog where you will load the part’s model. Be sure that the Model Name matches the model name in the Model Data area. NI Multisim User Manual 6-14 ni.clock. Enter the desired Model Name.com . See below.contestantB. The symbol names do not need to be identical. In this step you will relate the symbol pins to the model nodes.time_up.contestantA. 4 .contestantC.vx extension. 2 . the order of the model pins is the order that they are listed in the port declarations of the entity. Make sure that you load the source file from MultiVHDL. 9.

Complete the following steps to create a symbol file: 1. be sure to place the appropriate power and ground components in the schematic. Select Tools»Symbol Editor. Chapter 6 Component Editing 10. Click Next and save the component to the database in the same manner used for analog devices. © National Instruments Corporation 6-15 NI Multisim User Manual . You will need to have the MultiHDL Verilog application that generates the Verilog source code referenced in the simulation model selection step. 11. 2. Note Verilog HDL parts can be created in a manner similar to that of VHDL parts. Using a Symbol File Created in the Symbol Editor This section demonstrates how to use a symbol that you create in the Symbol Editor when creating a new component using the Component Wizard. 3. In the symbol editor. When using the component. Select File»Save As and save the symbol into an easily accessible location such as your Desktop. create the desired symbol. Refer to the Creating and Editing a Component’s Symbol with the Symbol Editor section for more information.

2. Edit component information in the various tabs as described in the sections referenced below: • Editing a Component’s General Properties. enter the desired footprint and number of pins. In step 2 of the Component Wizard. The Component Properties dialog box appears.com . 4. Select the Components. NI Multisim User Manual 6-16 ni. 5. 5. Note If you make any changes to the symbol . Editing Components Complete the following steps to edit an existing component: 1.Chapter 6 Component Editing Complete the following steps to create a new component with the symbol saved in the above step: 1. In the Component List. the original symbol will be overwritten with the changes. 3. • Editing a Component Pin Model. click the Edit button. If you only wish to make changes for the specific component you are creating. Or Choose Tools»Database»Database Manager. Click Yes to save the new symbol for the new component. consisting of multiple tabs. select the component you want to edit. Click Edit. Click the Database Manager button on the Main toolbar. be sure to select File»Exit. 6. Select File»Exit. Refer to the Creating Components with the Component Wizard section for more information. You are prompted to save the symbol. Continue with the remaining steps in the component wizard. 2. • Editing a Component’s Model. In step 3 of the component wizard. • Editing a Component’s Symbol. Complete step 1 of the Component Wizard and click Next. The Database Manager dialog box appears. 3. Select Tools»Component Wizard. 7. Select File»Open and open the symbol file saved earlier. 4. The Symbol Editor appears. and select File»Save.

Remember. 8. Editing a Component’s Symbol The Symbol tab of the Component Properties dialog box allows you to: • edit a component’s symbol • give a component the same symbol as another component • create a symbol for a component. Chapter 6 Component Editing • Editing a Component’s Footprint. Editing a Component’s General Properties The General tab of the Component Properties dialog box allows you to modify the component’s name and change the functional description. The date and author are drawn from system information and cannot be changed. Click OK from any of the tabs to save the edited component. 7. Components. Note If you wish to add a family to the selected database. • Editing a Component’s Electronic Parameters. or add to. • Choose the Group in which you want the edited component stored and then click the Family name. • Editing User Fields. The New Family Name dialog box appears where you enter the desired Family information. 6. The Select Destination Family Name dialog box appears. the Master Database. for more information. click the Add Family button. so you must make your changes in either the Corporate Database or User Database. © National Instruments Corporation 6-17 NI Multisim User Manual . In the Family Tree area: • Choose the database where you want to store the edited component. Click OK to close the Select Destination Family Name dialog box. The OK button becomes active. Refer to the Managing Families section of Chapter 5. you cannot change information in.

Pins like VCC and GND are common to all gates in the IC.Chapter 6 Component Editing Set the following as desired: • Number of Pins—The number of pins in the component. • Copy from DB button—Use to copy a symbol from another component. • Section Name—This is optional. • Copy to button—Use to copy a symbol to another section of the component. • Edit button—Use to edit the component’s symbol.—The number of sections in the component.com . • Symbol Pin Table—This is where you map the Symbol Pins to the desired Section. • Number of Sec. NI Multisim User Manual 6-18 ni.

Or Click Copy to in the Create Component Wizard . Group. select ANSI or DIN from the Symbol Set box. The Select a Symbol dialog box appears. 2. To confirm the association of this symbol with your component. Creating and Editing a Component’s Symbol with the Symbol Editor The Symbol Editor is a specialized graphics editor that allows you to create or modify a component’s symbol. 2. Copying a Multi-Section Component’s Symbol Complete the following steps to copy the symbol of a multi-section component to another section in that component: 1. 3.Step 3 of 7 dialog box. use the In-Place Edit Mode. Refer to the In-Place Edit Mode section for more information. where the symbol associated with the selected component appears. Navigate through the Database. The Select Target dialog box displays. To edit the symbol for a single component in your active circuit. 4. The Symbol Editor functions in the “normal” mode when editing component symbols in the database. © National Instruments Corporation 6-19 NI Multisim User Manual . click Copy from DB. Family and Component lists to identify the component whose symbol you want to copy and click OK. Click Copy to in the Symbol tab of the Component Properties dialog box. Select the sections to where you would like to copy the symbol and click OK. The appropriate symbol appears in the upper part of the dialog box. In this case you are copying model information from a selected section of a multi-section component to the target sections that you select in the Select Target dialog box. Note The Select Target dialog box is also accessed from the Select Simulation Model dialog box of the Create Component Wizard. or creating a new symbol. (Click Close to cancel. Chapter 6 Component Editing Copying a Component’s Symbol Complete the following steps to copy a symbol from another component: 1. click OK. If you want to change the symbol set to be associated with this component. From the Symbol tab of the Component Properties dialog box.) Multisim returns to the Component Properties dialog box.

The Draw Grid (4) aids in the placement of graphic elements inside the Boundary Box (6). • the Workspace (3). 2. • the Toolbars (2). NI Multisim User Manual 6-20 ni. The Pin Grid (5) aids in the placement of pins. be sure you have selected the desired symbol set (ANSI or DIN).Chapter 6 Component Editing Complete the following steps to edit a component symbol: 1. The Symbol Editor appears. in the Symbol Set box. which is where you build or modify your symbols. Double-click on the desired component and click Edit Component in DB to display the Component Properties dialog box. Its size cannot be adjusted. Click Edit. displaying the selected symbol for you to edit. which give quick access to the most commonly-used tools. which contains the menus with their associated commands. The Symbol Editor looks like this: 1 Menu Bar 3 Workspace 5 Pin Grid 7 Spreadsheet View 2 Toolbars 4 Draw Grid 6 Boundary Box 8 Status Bar The Symbol Editor dialog box consists of: • the Menu Bar (1).com . In the Symbol tab of the Component Properties dialog box. 3.

Choices are: Line Pin. Dot-Clock Pin. Dot Pin. Regular (2 grids). Zero-Length Pin. The next sections describe the menus. Input Wedge Pin. • Name Orientation—Select a row and click in this field to set the orientation of the pin’s name on the symbol. When you select an item on the workspace. Choices are: Auto. Vertical. toolbars and Symbol Editor functionality in more detail. Choices are: Short (1 grid). © National Instruments Corporation 6-21 NI Multisim User Manual . as shown in the examples below: – ^MyPin negates all of the text. it is highlighted in the spreadsheet. Horizontal. • Length—Select a row and click in this field to display a list of pin lengths. – ^MyPin^ also negates all of the text. the pin name displays with a negation bar above all of MyPin. the list of pin lengths is not available in the Length field. Clock Pin. which gives information on the commands and actions associated with the position of the cursor. If you make a change to an item in the spreadsheet. it is reflected on the symbol in the workspace. • Name Font—The font used for the pin’s name. In this example. • Shape—Select a row and click in this field to display a list of pin types. Extra Long (4 grids). – My^Pin^ negates Pin only—a negation bar appears above Pin. Refer to the Pins section for more information about pins. Long (3 grids). Chapter 6 Component Editing • the Spreadsheet View (7). which is where you find and edit various graphical primitives and pin parameters. Pins Tab The Pins tab of the Symbol Editor Spreadsheet View contains the following columns: • Name—The pin’s name. Output Wedge Pin. and vice versa. The symbol changes to reflect your selection. • the Status Bar (8). Select the desired pin type. If Zero-Length Pin is selected in the Shape field. • Symbol Pins—Select a row and click in this field and select either Hidden or Visible to hide or show the pin name on the symbol. Symbol Editor Spreadsheet View The Spreadsheet View is where you find and edit various symbol parameters. You can perform full or partial negation on pin names by using the ^ symbol.

Chapter 6 Component Editing • Name Font Style—The style of font used for the pin’s name (for example. • Number Font Style—The style of font used for the pin’s number. Invisible. Solid Inside Frame. Diagonal Upward. arc. Horizontal. Dash-Dot-Dot. Draw Layer Tab The Draw Layer tab of the Symbol Editor Spreadsheet View contains the following columns: • Name—The type of graphic element. Vertical. Three Pixels. • Name Font Size—The size of the font used for the pin’s name. Choices are: Not Scalable. • Pen Width—The width of the lines in graphic elements. Select a row and click in this field to display a list of pen types. • Brush Type—The style of the fill in elements such as polygons. Choices are: Auto. including placed text. • Footprint Pins—Select a row and click in this field and select either Hidden or Visible to hide or show the footprint pin on the symbol. Diagonal Cross. • Font—The font name. Two Pixels. Horizontal. Select a row and click in this field to display a color palette. Dash. Choices are: Solid. Four Pixels. NI Multisim User Manual 6-22 ni. • Number Font Size—The size of the font used for the pin’s number. • Number Orientation—Select a row and click in this field to set the orientation of the pin number on the symbol. Five Pixels. Italic. Choices are: Solid. • Pen Color—The color of lines for graphic elements. Select a row and click in this field to display a color palette. Select a row and click in this field to display a list. Bold. Bold Italic. Invisible.com . for example. • Number Font—The font used for the pin’s number. Cross. Dash-Dot. • Font Style—The font style. excluding placed text. • Brush Color—The color of the fill in elements such as polygons. Select a row and click in this field to display a list of pen types. Bold). excluding placed text. that have a fill. • Pen Type—The appearance of lines for graphics elements. Select a row and click in this field to display a list of fill types. Diagonal Downward. Dot. active for placed text elements only. that have a fill. One Pixel. Vertical. active for placed text elements only. Select a row and click in this field to display a list of fonts. Choices are: Regular.

Pins There are three main parts to a pin. active for placed text elements only. These names are used to identify the actual name of the pin in the symbol and must be unique. Working with the Symbol Editor To use the Symbol Editor to create working symbols you need to be familiar with the elements required to make up a symbol in Multisim. GND2. – Add multiple pins that have the same basic name but append a digit to represent each occurence. There are two methods to handle components that have more than one pin with the same name: – Have one pin on the symbol that represents the duplicated pin (for example. you must add pins. “GND”) and match the footprint pins later to the one on the symbol pin. The key elements needed for a symbol are: • shape • pins These are described in more detail below. Note If objects are grouped using Edit»Group. Use the drawing capabilities of Multisim’s Symbol Editor to construct a shape that makes logical sense for the component you are creating or modifying. GND3. It is recommended that you use concise names as they display best on the workspace and on printed output. © National Instruments Corporation 6-23 NI Multisim User Manual . Once this is done. Select a row and click in this field to display a list of sizes. you could represent multiple ground connections as GND1. The simplest way to do this is to edit the shape of an existing component. Chapter 6 Component Editing • Font Size—The font size. For example. their distinct names and properties will no longer appear. most digital parts have pins named “VCC” and “GND”. These are the: • Name—This is the name of the pin and is usually the same as that given in the data sheet. Shape A symbol requires a shape to allow users to recognize its general function. etc. The name for any grouped object will appear as “Group”. For example.

Clock Pin. The shapes are used for identification purposes and do not have any impact on the operation of the component. Zero-Length Pin. Multisim provides seven pin shapes that you can use: Line Pin. This naming will match the naming used in PCB layout. Note The symbol and footprint pins must accurately map in order to transfer correctly to PCB layout. Refer to the Place Pin Toolbar section for more information. Both the footprint pins (1) and the symbol pins (2) appear.com . Within the Symbol Editor you only choose whether to display the footprint pin names by default.Chapter 6 Component Editing • Footprint Pin Name—This is the pin name on the footprint for the device. • Shape—The shape of the pin denotes the type of pin. Dot-Clock Pin. Dot Pin. The figure below shows a 555 timer’s symbol. Output Wedge Pin. 1 Footprint Pin 2 Symbol Pin NI Multisim User Manual 6-24 ni. or not. and their orientation on the workspace. Input Wedge Pin. as seen in the Symbol Editor.

Note Pins cannot be placed on top of each other or on corners of the boundary box. as seen in the Multisim workspace. 2. Default Pin Options Dialog Box Note Refer to the Pin Array Options Dialog Box section for information about the Pin Array Options dialog box. If you attempt to do so. Refer to the Editing a Component’s Footprint section for more information. Refer to the Pins Tab section for more information. 2. the cursor switches to a circle with a line through it. Click on the desired pin type in the Place Pin Toolbar. Click on the workspace where you want the pin to appear. © National Instruments Corporation 6-25 NI Multisim User Manual . Set the options in the Pin Name box: • Prefix field—Appears before the pin name. Note You can edit a pin’s properties in the Pins tab of the Spreadsheet View. A preview of the prefix appears in the Name Preview field. Chapter 6 Component Editing The figure shows the same 555 timer’s symbol. Complete the following steps to add a pin to a symbol: 1. 1 Footprint Pin 2 Symbol Pin The relationship of the Footprint Pin to the Symbol Pin is mapped in the Footprint tab of the Component Properties dialog box. Choose Pins»Default Pin Options to display the Default Pin Options dialog box. Complete the following steps to set up the default options for pins: 1. indicating that the action is prohibited. The footprint pins (1) and the symbol pins (2) appear slightly differently.

• Shape drop-down list—The shape of the pin. Pin Array Options Dialog Box Complete the following steps to place a pin array on a symbol: 1. turn off the Number Visible checkbox. Optionally. • Increment by field—The size of the steps between pin numbers. 2. turn off the Name Visible checkbox. This allows you to place pins one after the other.Chapter 6 Component Editing • Suffix field—Appears after the pin name. If you do not wish to show the pin name. Enter the quantity of the pins desired in the Number of Pins in Array field. NI Multisim User Manual 6-26 ni. enable the Continuous Pin Placement checkbox. Set the options in the Pin Properties box. • Start from field—The starting number for the pins in the array. based on the parameters entered in the above steps. A preview of the prefix appears in the Name Preview field. A preview of the suffix appears in the Name Preview field. Set the options in the Pin Name box: • Prefix field—Appears before the pin names. A preview of the suffix appears in the Name Preview field. Choose Pins»Place Pin Array to display the Pin Array Options dialog box.com . • Index checkbox—Enables the Start from and Increment by fields. • Index checkbox—Enables the Start from and Increment by fields. • Length drop-down list—The length of the pin. • Number Orientation drop-down list—The orientation of the pin number. 4. If you do not wish to show the pin number. • Start from field—The starting number for the pins. 3. • Name Orientation drop-down list—The orientation of the pin name. 3. • Suffix field—Appears after the pin names. • Increment by field—The size of the steps between pin numbers in the array. until the <Esc> button on your keyboard is pressed.

turn off the Name Visible checkbox. Schematic Capture . select a new color from the pop-up that appears when you click on the down-arrow. or Title Block Editor. Type the desired text in the Enter Text field. Caution If the boundary does not contain sufficient space to place the text. • Font Style field—Select desired style from the list. for information on the Title Block Editor. • Counterclockwise button—Pins are placed in ascending order counter-clockwise. it will be lost when you click the mouse. • Size field—Select desired size from the list or type in. Set the options in the Pin Properties box: • Shape drop-down list—The shape of the pin. Refer to the Title Block Editor section of Chapter 3. Click OK and place the array in the desired location. If you do not wish to show the pin number. Chapter 6 Component Editing 4. • Automatic drop-down—Optionally. • Name Orientation drop-down list—The orientation of the pin name. turn off the Number Visible checkbox. Complete the following steps to enter text on a symbol or title block: 1. • Length drop-down list—The length of the pin. 7. Enter the spacing of the pins (in grids) in the Distance between Pins in Array field.Advanced Functions. If you do not wish to show the pin name. 3. 6. Set the options in the Pins Order box: • Clockwise button—Pins are placed in ascending order clockwise. 4. You are not permitted to place the array if there is insufficient space. Change the formatting of the text as desired: • Font field—Select desired font from the list or type in. Select Graphics»Text to display the Enter Text dialog box. Enter Text Dialog Box This dialog box is accessed from either the Symbol Editor. • Number Orientation drop-down list—The orientation of the pin number. Click OK and place the text in the desired location. 2. • Text Orientation box—Select either horizontal or vertical orientation. © National Instruments Corporation 6-27 NI Multisim User Manual . 5.

it will close first. There are no other sizes available. The Symbol Editor launches in the In-Place Edit Mode. NI Multisim User Manual 6-28 ni. It does not change the symbol for other components of the same value within the active circuit. Note The In-Place Edit Mode only changes the symbol for the selected component.Chapter 6 Component Editing In-Place Edit Mode To edit the symbol for a component placed on the workspace. In the In-Place Edit Mode.com . If you already have one open. it will close first. the shape and placed text). after prompting you to save any changes. • Print—Opens the standard Windows “Print” dialog box where you can enter the desired printing properties and print the symbol. • Print Setup—Opens the standard Windows “Print Setup” dialog box where you can enter the desired parameters for your printer. If you already have one open. • Save—Saves changes to the active document. You can edit the symbol via the menus. • Open—Opens an existing document in the Symbol Editor. or in the database. toolbars and spreadsheet. • Save As—Opens the standard Windows “Save As” dialog box where you can save the active document under a new or existing name. You cannot add or remove pins as this would affect the footprint and model mapping. which shows the symbol in the active document with the best fit to the page. you can change the graphical elements of a symbol (for example. after prompting you to save any changes. right-click on the component and select Edit Symbol from the pop-up that appears. The symbol is printed with the best fit to the page. There are no other sizes available for printing the symbol. • Print Preview—Opens the Print Preview dialog box. Symbol Editor Menus The Symbol Editor menus contain all the commands necessary to create and edit component symbols. File Menu The following selections are available under the File menu: • New—Opens a new untitled document in the Symbol Editor.

Chapter 6 Component Editing • Exit—Closes the Symbol Editor and returns you to the main Multisim screen. They are not placed on the clipboard. For use with MS PaintBrush. Does not apply to pins. © National Instruments Corporation 6-29 NI Multisim User Manual . • Copy As Bitmap—Copies the symbol on the workspace to the clipboard as a bitmap image. if any. Does not apply to pins. you are prompted to save changes. If the clipboard contains pins and graphical elements. • Flip Horizontal—Flips the selected element(s) horizontally. Does not apply to pins. • Delete—Removes the selected element(s) from the workspace. • Cut—Removes the selected element(s) from the workspace and places them on the clipboard. • Copy—Places a copy of the selected element(s) on the clipboard. Does not apply to pins. For use with Winword. • Select All—Selects all of the elements on the workspace. • Copy As Picture—Copies the symbol on the workspace to the clipboard as a metafile. Does not apply to pins. Before exiting. Does not apply to pins. • Snap To Grid—Snaps the selected element(s) to the Draw Grid that is found within the symbol’s boundary box. • Rotate 90 Clockwise—Rotates the selected element(s) 90 degrees clockwise. • Paste—Places a copy of the element(s) on the clipboard on the workspace at the cursor’s location. • Ungroup—Returns an element that was made using the Group command. to the active document. Edit Menu The following selections are available under the Edit menu: • Undo—Undoes the previous action. only the graphical elements will be pasted. Does not apply to pins. Note that pin names cannot be copied separately. back to its individual elements. • Group—Places selected elements in one group. • Redo—Redoes the previous “undo” action. • Rotate 90 Counter CW—Rotates the selected element(s) 90 degrees counter-clockwise. • Flip Vertical—Flips the selected element(s) vertically.

Draw Tools. This is the size that they will be displayed at in Multisim. The choices are: No Grid. • Draw Grid Size—Sets the size of the Draw Grid. Select Center By Mouse and then click on the spot that you would like to be placed at the center of the workspace. Small Grid. View Menu The following selections are available under the View menu: • Toolbars—Toggles the following toolbars on and off: Standard Toolbar. the Pin Grid size cannot be changed. on and off. which displays inside the Boundary Box. • Status Bar—Toggles the Status bar at the bottom of the screen on and off. Pin Place Toolbar. • Zoom 100%—Displays the items in the workspace at their normal viewing size. Other elements appear in front of them. • Redraw—Redraws all elements in the workspace. • Send To Back—Sends selected element(s) to the background on the workspace.Chapter 6 Component Editing • Bring To Front—Brings selected element(s) to the foreground on the workspace. • Zoom Out—Reduces the viewing size of the element(s) in the workspace. • Resize Boundary Box—Places a cursor at the lower-right side of the boundary box. Drag it to the desired location to resize the boundary box. Drawing Toolbar. Other element(s) appear behind them. You cannot make the boundary box smaller than the elements that it contains or smaller than is required for the pins that are attached to it. Regular Grid. Large Grid. Does not apply to pins. For consistency throughout Multisim. When the Symbol Editor first opens. Refer to the Symbol Editor Spreadsheet View section for more information. • Show Draw Grid—Toggles the Draw Grid. NI Multisim User Manual 6-30 ni. which displays inside the Boundary Box. the magnification is set to 200%. Zoom Toolbar. • Show Pin Grid—Toggles the Pin Grid. on and off. which displays outside of the Boundary Box on the workspace. Does not apply to pins.com . Smallest Grid. • Zoom In—Magnifies the element(s) in the workspace. you can use this command to center the image on the workspace. • Spreadsheet—Toggles the spreadsheet view on and off. • Center By Mouse—When viewing the workspace at high magnifications.

• Segment Arc—Places an arc on the workspace. As you move the cursor. • Dot-Clock Pin—Places a dot-clock pin on the workspace. As you move the cursor. a dotted outline of the arc appears. • Place Pin Array—Displays the Pin Array Options dialog box where you enter parameters to place a pin array on the workspace. • Input Wedge Pin—Places an input wedge pin on the workspace. Refer to the Pin Array Options Dialog Box section for more information. • Zero-Length Pin—Places a zero-length pin on the workspace. Now move the cursor and click to place the arc’s end point. Chapter 6 Component Editing Pins Menu The following selections are available under the Pins menu: • Select—Use to select element(s) on the workspace by clicking and dragging the mouse. click again to place the outer diameter point. Refer to the Enter Text Dialog Box section for more information. • Clock Pin—Places a clock pin on the workspace. • Line Pin—Places a line pin on the workspace. Refer to the Default Pin Options Dialog Box section for more information. Click again to place the outer point of the arc at the desired location. • Line—Draws a line on the workspace. Graphics Menu The following selections are available under the Graphics menu: • Text—Displays the Enter Text dialog box where you enter and format text to be placed on the workspace. © National Instruments Corporation 6-31 NI Multisim User Manual . Click once to place the center point of the arc. • Dot Pin—Places a dot pin on the workspace. Click once at the desired starting point and click again where you wish the diameter of the ellipse to end. • Half Ellipse Arc—Places half of an ellipse on the workspace. Note Refer to the Pins section for information about pin types. a dotted outline of the ellipse appears. • Default Pin Options—Displays the Default Pin Options dialog box where you enter the default settings for the various pin types. • Output Wedge Pin—Places an output wedge pin on the workspace. • Multiline—Draws a multiline on the workspace.

Click to place the polygon’s corners and right-click to finish. Note Graphical primitives such as lines and rectangles can only be placed inside the boundary box. where you can select the desired bitmap. When the ellipse is the desired shape and size. the cursor will change to a circle with a line through it. use one of the following selections from under the Layout»Align menu: • Left—Left aligns the selected elements. Click to display a standard Windows “Open” dialog box. • Bitmap—Places a bitmap image on the workspace. Tools Menu The following selection is available under the Tool menu: • Check Symbol—Confirms that the symbol has no errors. When the circle is the desired size. As you move the cursor. As you move the cursor. Center—Vertically centers the selected items. a dotted outline of the ellipse appears. If you attempt to place them outside of the boundary box. click to place it on the workspace. Click to place the start of the curve. indicating that the action is prohibited. • Vert. • Horiz. a dotted outline of the bezier curve appears. NI Multisim User Manual 6-32 ni. Layout Menu To align two or more graphic elements.Chapter 6 Component Editing • Bezier—Places a bezier curve on the workspace. • Polygon—Places a polygon on the workspace. • Bottom—Aligns the selected elements along their bottom edges. • Right—Right aligns the selected elements. • Rectangle—Places a rectangle on the workspace. Click to place the center of the ellipse. then move the cursor on the workspace. Click to place the center of the circle. • Top—Aligns the selected elements along their top edges. Center—Horizontally centers the selected elements. then move the cursor on the workspace. then move and click the cursor twice more to form the final shape of the bezier. click to place it on the workspace. such as duplicate pin names. a dotted outline of the circle appears. As you move the cursor.com . then move the cursor on the workspace. Click to place the end point of the bezier. • Circle—Places a circle on the workspace. • Ellipse—Places an ellipse on the workspace.

it will close first. Pin Place Toolbar. Symbol Editor Toolbars The toolbars give access to the most commonly-used tools. Flip Vertical. Standard Toolbar The buttons in the Standard toolbar found in the Symbol Editor are described below: Button Description New button. Rotate 90 Counter CW. Chapter 6 Component Editing • Customize—Displays the Customize dialog box. Flip Horizontal. Right-click from a menu to display a pop-up which allows you to toggle the following toolbars on and off: Standard Toolbar. Rotate 90 Clockwise. Draw Tools. If you already have one open. Copy. Draw Grid Size. it will close first. after prompting you to save any changes. If you already have one open. Refer to the Customizing the Interface section of Chapter 1. Opens a new untitled document in the Symbol Editor. Open button. Opens an existing document in the Symbol Editor. Paste. after prompting you to save any changes. for more information. Refer to the Edit Menu section for information about these commands. Drawing Toolbar. Right-click in the workspace to display a pop-up that contains: Cut. Snap To Grid. • About Symbol Editor—Displays a splash window with information about the Symbol Editor. Pop-up Menus Depending on where you right-click in the Symbol Editor. different pop-up menus appear. Show Draw Grid. User Interface. Help Menu The following selections are available under the Help menu: • Help Topics—Displays the help file. © National Instruments Corporation 6-33 NI Multisim User Manual . Zoom Toolbar.

Copies the symbol on the workspace as a bitmap image. The symbol is printed with the best fit to the page. Places a copy of the selected element(s) on the clipboard. Copy button.com . Redo button. Redoes the previous “undo” action. Saves changes to the active document. There are no other magnifications available. Print button. Copy As Picture button. which shows the symbol in the active document with the best fit to the page. About Symbol Editor button. There are no other magnifications available for printing the symbol. Undoes the previous action. Opens the standard Windows “Print” dialog box. Paste button. Displays a splash screen with information about the Symbol Editor. Removes the selected element(s) from the workspace and places them on the clipboard. Undo button. Cut button. Copy As Bitmap button. NI Multisim User Manual 6-34 ni. Print Preview button.Chapter 6 Component Editing Button Description Save button. Places a copy of the element(s) on the clipboard on the workspace at the cursor’s location. where you can enter the desired printing properties and print the symbol. Opens the Print Preview screen. Copies the symbol on the workspace as a metafile.

Magnifies the elements on the workspace. Places a line on the workspace. Button Description Zoom In button. When the circle is the desired shape and size. Zoom Out button. Zoom 100% button. Click to place the center of the circle. This is the size that they will be displayed at in Multisim. © National Instruments Corporation 6-35 NI Multisim User Manual . As you move the cursor. Circle button. Draw Tools Toolbar The buttons in the Draw Tools toolbar found in the Symbol Editor are described below: Button Description Select button. When the Symbol Editor first opens. click to place it on the workspace. Displays the items in the workspace at their normal viewing size. a dotted outline of the circle appears. Chapter 6 Component Editing Zoom Toolbar The buttons in the Zoom toolbar found in the Symbol Editor are described below. then move the cursor on the workspace. Line button. Use to select element(s) on the workspace by clicking and dragging the mouse. the magnification is set to 200%. Rectangle button. Reduces the viewing size of the element(s) on the workspace. Places a circle on the workspace. Places a rectangle on the workspace.

click to place it on the workspace. NI Multisim User Manual 6-36 ni. a dotted outline of the bezier curve appears. Click to place the end point of the bezier. such as duplicate pin names. Check Symbol button. Refer to the Enter Text Dialog Box section for more information. Bitmap button. Click to place the center of the ellipse. Polygon button. Places a bezier curve on the workspace. Click once to place the center point of the arc. Places a bitmap image on the workspace. Multiline button.Chapter 6 Component Editing Button Description Ellipse button. Text button. where you can select the desired bitmap. Places a polygon on the workspace. then move the cursor on the workspace. Click to display a standard Windows “Open” dialog box. Now move the cursor and click to place the arc’s end point. As you move the cursor. Places a multiline on the workspace. Click to place the start of the curve. then move and click the cursor twice more to form the final shape of the bezier. a dotted outline of the ellipse appears. where you enter and format text to be placed on the workspace. Confirms that the symbol has no errors. As you move the cursor. a dotted outline of the arc appears. Segment Arc button. Places an ellipse on the workspace. As you move the cursor. click again to place the out diameter point. Half Ellipse Arc button. then move the cursor on the workspace. Places an arc on the workspace. When the ellipse is the desired shape and size. Displays the Enter Text dialog box. Places a half ellipse arc on the workspace.com .

Places a line pin on the workspace. Dot-Clock Pin button. Input Wedge Pin button. Note Refer to the Pins section for information about pin types. Line Pin button. Zero-Length Pin button. Chapter 6 Component Editing Place Pin Toolbar The buttons on the Place Pin toolbar found in the Symbol Editor are described below. Places a dot-clock pin on the workspace. Dot Pin button. Places an output wedge pin on the workspace. Output Wedge Pin button. Use to place a pin array on the workspace. Places an input wedge pin on the workspace. © National Instruments Corporation 6-37 NI Multisim User Manual . Clock Pin button. Button Description Place Pin Array button. Places a dot pin on the workspace. Places a clock pin on the workspace. Places a zero-length pin on the workspace.

Does not work for pins. Moves selected objects horizontally so that their left sides line up with the left side of the left-most object. Distribute Horizontal button. Brings selected element(s) to the foreground on the workspace. Distribute Vertical button. Other element(s) appear behind them. Does not work for pins. Does not work for pins. NI Multisim User Manual 6-38 ni.Chapter 6 Component Editing Drawing Toolbar The buttons in the Drawing toolbar found in the Symbol Editor are described below: Button Description Align Left button. Moves selected objects vertically so that their top sides line up with the top side of the top-most object. Other elements appear in front of them. Does not work for pins.com . Bring To Front button. Align Top button. At least two objects must be selected to enable this button. Does not work for pins. Moves selected objects horizontally so that their right sides line up with the right side of the right-most object. Evenly spaces the selected objects horizontally. Align Right button. Sends selected element(s) to the background on the workspace. Snap To Grid button. Evenly spaces the selected objects vertically. Send To Back button. At least two objects must be selected to enable this button. At least three objects must be selected to enable this button. Align Bottom button. At least two objects must be selected to enable this button. Moves the selected objects vertically so that their bottom sides line up with the bottom side of the bottom-most object. Snaps the selected element(s) to the Draw Grid that is found within the symbol’s boundary box. At least two objects must be selected to enable this button. Does not work for pins. Does not work for pins. Does not work for pins. At least three objects must be selected to enable this button. Does not work for pins.

Returns an element that was made using the Group command back to its individual elements. Does not work for pins. Flips the selected element(s) vertically on the workspace. Rotates the selected element(s) 90 degrees counter-clockwise. it must have a model. Places selected elements in one group. Group button. Does not work for pins. Does not work for pins. Does not work for pins. • Model Data area—Displays the SPICE model data of the selected component. Rotate 90 Clockwise button. Places a cursor at the lower-right side of the boundary box. Flips the selected element(s) horizontally on the workspace. Editing a Component’s Model If you wish to simulate a component. Does not work for pins. You cannot make the boundary box smaller than the elements that it contains or smaller than is required for the pins that are attached to it. Resize Boundary Box button. Rotates the selected element(s) 90 degrees clockwise. Displays the names of the pins associated with the symbol. Does not work for pins. © National Instruments Corporation 6-39 NI Multisim User Manual . • Symbol Pins column—Found in the Pin Mapping Table. Flip Vertical button. Drag it to the desired location to resize the boundary box. Flip Horizontal button. Ungroup button. The following are found in the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box: • Model Name area—Displays the list of models associated with the component. Chapter 6 Component Editing Button Description Rotate 90 Counter CW button.

Refer to the Loading an Existing Model section for information. Making a typing error or removing a character by mistake could cause the model to function improperly. If you want to modify a model for a specific component. Alternatively. Refer to the Creating a Component Model Using the Model Makers section for more information. • Delete a Model button—Use to delete a model or number of models from the model list in the Model Name area. Unless you are experienced at creating/editing models. • Copy to button—Use to copy model information to other sections of a multisection component. • Add from Comp button—Use to select a component. Note If you modify a model. You can import or load an existing model.com . be very careful when entering information. whose model you wish to use. the model changes for all other components within the same database. • Add/Edit button—Use to add or edit a new or existing model in the Multisim database. you can copy a model whose model template matches what you want.Chapter 6 Component Editing • Model Nodes column—Found in the Pin Mapping Table. from the existing Multisim database. • Show Template button—Use to display template of pins connected to their respective nodes in the model. you can create your own model using the Model Makers. Depending on your edition of Multisim. Note If you select a component from the Master Database. you will not be able to modify its model information. save the modified model with a name similar to that of the component. Caution If you choose to edit a model’s data or template directly. it is recommended that you copy a model that has the same template information you require. The Model Data and Pin Mapping Table areas contain the information that make up the model itself (and are thus the most important parts for simulation purposes). NI Multisim User Manual 6-40 ni. whose models are based on that template. Displays the order in which the Symbol Pins are represented in the model data.

The Select a Model dialog box appears: • Add button—Adds a new model name to the selected database. • Delete button—Deletes any of the models listed in the Model ID List. • Rename button—displays a dialog where you rename the selected model. • Link Info button—Displays a list of components with the selected model through the Component List dialog box. Click the Add/Edit button on the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. • Filter button—Displays the Filter dialog box. you can create a model by writing a SPICE model or using the available Model Makers. load a model from a file. Complete the following steps to create a model and save it to the User Database or Corporate Database: First add a new model ID to the Database. 4. VHDL. Click the Add button. enter information into the model. • Load Model from File button—Use to select a model from a file in SPICE. Highlight the model you just created in the Model ID List. • Start Model Maker button—Accesses Multisim’s Model Makers to create a SPICE model for the selected model. • Copy to button—Copies the selected model to either the Corporate or User Database. 3. or copy existing model data information directly into the Model Data field. Is only active for the Corporate or User Database. Is only active for the Corporate or User Database. 5. These models can then be used when creating components or editing a component’s model. Next. Select the database in the Database Name field where you want the new model to be stored. Verilog. or Code Model format. The name of the model appears in the Model ID List of the database you selected. © National Instruments Corporation 6-41 NI Multisim User Manual . The Set Parameters dialog box appears. 1. Enter the name that you would like to call the new model and click OK. 2. Chapter 6 Component Editing Adding a Model to a Component Multisim allows you to create models and place them in either the Corporate Database or User Database. Notice there is no model data provided. where you select the manufacturer and model ID to display.

Select the Model Maker you wish to use to make a model. 3. 5. Click Link Info in the Select a Model dialog box. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. Select the Model ID in the Select a Model dialog box. Creating a Model Using a Model Maker Complete the following steps to use a model created by the Model Makers: 1. It supports models created using standard SPICE syntax. 6. The Component List dialog box displays. 3. For RF model makers. Creating a Primitive Model Certain devices have primitive SPICE models. click OK. For analog Model Makers. A primitive model is a model that is defined by a collection of parameters. by assigning values to the parameters of a primitive model. Select a model in the Model ID list in the Select a Model dialog box. 4. When you have entered all the required information in the Model Maker dialog box. Click Accept to continue to start the process of making a model. • C—Semiconductor capacitor model. refer to the Creating a Component Model Using the Model Makers section for information about using specific Model Makers. 2. Click the Start Model Maker button.com . NI Multisim User Manual 6-42 ni. Click Cancel to return to the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. Click OK to close the dialog. RF. They are used as basic building blocks in circuits and in subcircuits: • R—Semiconductor resistor model. The data for the model you have just created will appear in the Model Data field. You can create a model using the Model Makers. Creating a SPICE Model for a Component Multisim is based on industry standard SPICE 3F5. or by creating a subcircuit model. Some of these devices are listed below.Chapter 6 Component Editing Component List Dialog Box Complete the following steps to display a list of components with a selected model: 1. refer to the RF Model Makers section of Chapter 14. 2.

45081e-13 NE=1. In the example below the model name is “2N2222A” and the primitive type is “NPN”.1 XTI=1 +EG=1.00231e-13 +NC=1.75 MJS=0.0772534 ISE=1.428633 XTB=0.4 MJC=0. • URC—Uniform distributed RC model.83883e-07 PTF=0 KF=0 AF=1 For further information regarding primitive models. • PNP—PNP BJT model.99688 +RE=0. Multisim SPICE Reference.eecs. An example of a primitive model for a 2n2222a NPN BJT Transistor follows. Refer to Chapter 7.1 CJS=0 VJS=0. .0857267 RC=0.98587 RB=3. for more information. The first line of a primitive model begins with the statement.09697 VAF=10 +IKF=0. Details regarding the parameters are found in the Component Reference help file.0793144 +CJC=3.99688 IRB=0.100004 ISC=1.05 CJE=1. • NMF—N-channel MESFET model.39296 BR=0.16782 VAR=100 IKR=0.5 +TR=3. • LTRA—Lossy transmission line model.edu/Classes/IcBook/SPICE).463 NF=1.1941e-11 VJC=0.23 +TF=2. • D—Diode model. any that are omitted are assigned default values.901093 +FC=0. • PMF—P-channel MESFET model.22776 VTF=25. • PMOS—P-channel MOSFET model. please consult the component Component Reference help file or the SPICE 3F5 user manual (http://bwrc. • CSW—Current controlled switch.2 RBM=3.MODEL 2N2222A NPN +IS=2. The rest of the lines of the model define the parameters of the NPN BJT.berkeley.96787e-10 XTF=9.85 XCJC=0.481975 +NR=1. Note that they begin with a “+”.09913e-11 VJE=0. You do not need to define all of the parameters. • NPN—NPN BJT model. • NJF—N-channel JFET model.2257 ITF=0. Chapter 6 Component Editing • SW—Voltage controlled switch. . followed by the model name and then the primitive type. • NMOS—N-channel MOSFET model. © National Instruments Corporation 6-43 NI Multisim User Manual .MODEL.04566e-13 BF=296. • PJF—P-channel JFET model.99 MJE=0.

SUBCKT followed by the SPICE subcircuit name and the external nodes of the SPICE subcircuit that will be connected to other components.000e+003 C1 2 0 1.003866 + CJO = 1.75 + TT = 3.233e-10 + RS = 0. to define that a 100kΩ resistor with the reference designator R1 is connected between nodes 4 and 5 you would write: R1 4 5 100k An example of a SPICE subcircuit follows: .MODEL D1N3909 D ( + IS = 6.ENDS.0E-6 R2 1 0 3. and/or other SPICE subcircuits. A SPICE subcircuit is built from a collection of devices that contain primitive models. All SPICE subcircuits must begin with a line that begins with .132e-10 + VJ = 0.SUBCKT SampleSubcircuit 4 2 R1 1 2 1. voltage and/or current sources.SUBCKT <SubcircuitName> <N1> <N2> <N3> <N4> … . . For example. SPICE subcircuit are used to capture the characteristics of these models.11 NI Multisim User Manual 6-44 ni.com . The SPICE subcircuit must end with the statement . but are still well suited as SPICE models. You can either create a SPICE subcircuit from scratch by typing it into the model data window or you can first draw the circuit in Multisim and export the SPICE netlist and then modify it for use as a SPICE subcircuit.699e-07 + M = 0.ENDS SubcircuitName A SPICE subcircuit is defined by naming and connecting the internal devices that make up the subcircuit.2711 + BV = 100 + N = 1.505 + EG = 1.0k D1 0 2 D1N3909 .Chapter 6 Component Editing Creating a SPICE Subcircuit Many electronics devices are not represented by primitives.

Loading an Existing Model Complete the following steps to load or import an existing VHDL. © National Instruments Corporation 6-45 NI Multisim User Manual . Verilog.5 + IBV = 0. Click Load Model From File in the Select a Model dialog box. The resistors.cir or . but the diode has additional parameters defined using the . allowing you to choose the file type.ENDS This is the subcircuit for the following circuit drawn in Multisim: Note that nodes 1 and 2 are the two nodes that will be connected outside of the subcircuit model. and diode are all primitives. Chapter 6 Component Editing + XTI = 3 + KF = 0 + AF = 1 + FC = 0. capacitor. Multisim SPICE Reference. Xspice and Cadence® PSpice® netlists end in extensions .model statement. Ccode model. Most Bspice. name and location of the files to be loaded. or SPICE model for your component: 1. They are defined as external nodes by including them in the first line of the subcircuit model. Before loading a netlist. make sure you know what folder it is in. A standard file browser appears. The only parameters defined for the resistors and capacitor are their values. Refer to Chapter 7.net.0001 + TNOM = 27 + ) . for more information.

Note Cadence® PSpice® is not an industry standard. 2. Multisim has been designed to support Cadence® PSpice® models as extensively as possible. but is proprietary to the Orcad SPICE simulation tool. Multisim will not allow you to save the modifications to this named model. Select the database you want to choose the model from in the Database drop-down list. Multisim SPICE Reference. Select the Group and Family of the component you want to choose the model from. 3. Modify a Model’s Data Models can only be modified if they are in the Corporate or User database. The Select Model Data dialog box appears. Copying the Model of One Component to Another Complete the following steps to copy the model information from an existing component: 1. 2. Since some component vendors make models for their components available in Cadence® PSpice® format. However. Select the file to load and click OK. You will have to change the name of the model. Click Add From Comp in the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. Note If the model that has been modified is being used by a component in the database where it is located (Corporate or User) a message window will appear indicating that the model has been linked to a component in the component database. Select the Save button to save any changes that were made to the model. 3. you will not be able to share models or circuits with other SPICE users or tools. Complete the following steps to modify a model in the Corporate or User database: 1. Select the model you wish to edit by clicking on it in the Model ID List in the Select a Model dialog box.Chapter 6 Component Editing 2. The model data appears in the Model tab fields of the Component Properties dialog box. NI Multisim User Manual 6-46 ni. The model data can be modified by making changes directly in the Model Data area of the Select a Model dialog box. Refer to the Compatibility Modes section of Chapter 7.com . Multisim does not allow information stored in the Master Database to be edited. for more information.

In the Component list. where the expression evaluates to the difference between nets <net name1> and <net name2>. © National Instruments Corporation 6-47 NI Multisim User Manual . and syntax are described in this section. 7. if you require a comparator for a PWM based circuit. choose the component whose model template most closely matches what you want. Analog Behavioral Modeling and Controlled Source Syntax Analog Behavioral Modeling (ABM) is an extremely powerful feature which provides an efficient way to macro model signal processes through non-linear mathematical and conditional expressions. instead of modeling the inner working of the comparator. 5. Positive current polarity is taken from the positive net to the negative net of the voltage source. Accessing net voltages and branch currents in ABM expressions Expressions may contain net voltages relative to ground using the syntax V(<net name>). the simple "if(Vin1 > Vin2. The model’s manufacturer and footprint type appear in the Model manuf. where <refdes> is the reference designator of the voltage source. For example: B1 net1 net2 v={V(3)+V(7. If a branch current is required that does not contain an appropriate voltage source. Chapter 6 Component Editing 4. The supported functions. Click OK to return to the Component Properties dialog box. ABM-based voltage and current sources are based on mathematical expressions of circuit voltages and currents. Alternatively./Type fields. For instance. 0)" expression can be used. constants./ID and Footprint manuf. click the Model button. 6. simply break the branch and insert a 0-volt voltage source. <net_name2>). The model name is added to the list of models associated with the component. 10. operators. expressions may contain differential net voltages using the syntax V(<net_name1>. To view the model of the component you selected.2)} Expressions may contain branch currents through voltage source elements using the syntax I(<refdes>). where <net name> is the name of a net.

) Note The Section column displays the section of a multi-section component. click in the corresponding field in the Type column and select the pin type from the drop-down list that appears. Use the <Ctrl> and <Shift> keys to select the desired pins and then select the desired type from one of the selected Type fields. 3. Note Symbol Pin is the name of the pin. most digital parts have pins named “Vcc” and “GND”.com .Chapter 6 Component Editing Multisim supports referencing current through five types of SPICE primitive voltage sources: Independent source (“V” source). 4. Voltage Controlled Voltage Source (“E” source). Complete the following steps to enter pin parameters: 1. and Inductors. For example: B1 net1 0 v={ 5+ I(V2)+3*I(E5)-2. Current Controlled Voltage Source (“H” source). Select the desired Symbol Pin. Select whether or not you wish to include each symbol pin in the Electrical Rules Check by clicking in the corresponding field in the ERC Status column and selecting either Include or Exclude.2*I(B2)} Editing a Component Pin Model The Pin Parameters tab of the Component Properties dialog box is where you assign the pin type for each of the symbol pins in a component. NI Multisim User Manual 6-48 ni. the ABM source (“B” source). For example. For each symbol pin. The type for all of the selected symbol pins changes to reflect your selection. Tip You can assign the same pin type to multiple symbol pins at once. This column is read-only. (The default is Include. Select the type of component in the Component Type drop-down list. Select the technology in the Component Technology drop-down list. 5. 2.

• Symbol Pin to Footprint Pin Mapping Table—Shows the symbol pin names of the component and the footprint pins they are associated with in the package. If the database containing the part is already open in the Select a Footprint dialog box in Multisim when you create or edit the part in Ultiboard. The Select a Footprint dialog box appears: • Database Name list—The database the footprints are in. This appears in the preview field and the Footprint column (if the footprint name is changed) of the Select a Footprint dialog box. Click the Add From Database button in the Footprint tab of the Component Properties dialog box. for information. Note When you create or edit a part with a custom land pattern (footprint) in Ultiboard. Note A footprint in the Master Database cannot be modified. you must select a different database and then reselect the original database to view the change. • Change button—Displays the Change Footprint dialog box. Select a Footprint dialog box Complete the following steps to modify or enter package information: 1. • Delete button—Use to delete any of the footprint packages assigned to the component in the Footprint Manufacturer\Type area. © National Instruments Corporation 6-49 NI Multisim User Manual .Advanced Functions. • Map Pins button—Displays the Advanced Pin Mapping dialog box. the change is automatically synchronized in Multisim. Schematic Capture . • Data List—Shows the footprints in the selected database. • Add From Database button—Use to add a footprint package to the component from a list of footprints in the selected database. To modify a footprint a copy must be added to the Corporate Database or User Database. Chapter 6 Component Editing Editing a Component’s Footprint The Footprint tab of the Component Properties dialog box allows you to specify/modify package information for a component and map footprint and symbol pins of a component: • Footprint Manufacturer\Type area—Shows the manufacturer and footprint name associated with the component. Refer to the Edit Footprint Dialog Box section of Chapter 3.

The Set Parameters dialog box appears prompting you to place it in the Corporate Database or User Database. In the Symbol Pin to Footprint Pin Mapping Table.com . Click the Save button. Select the Database Name where the footprint is that you want to edit. • Copy to button—Use to copy a footprint from one database to another. using information from the component’s datasheet. If the footprint is in the Master Database. 3. 6. Click OK. • Delete button—Use to delete a footprint from the Corporate or User Database. 3. • Add button—Use to add a footprint to the User or Corporate Database. The footprint is copied to the database you indicated and you are returned to the Select a Footprint dialog box. If you choose not to save. Click the field of the footprint you want to modify. Refer to the Filter dialog box section for more information. Note Once a footprint is modified. for each Symbol Pin: • Select its corresponding footprint pin from the drop-down list in the Footprint Pins column. the modifications will be lost. Note Refer to the Pins section for information about the differences between symbol pins and footprint pins.Chapter 6 Component Editing • Filter button—Use to filter the contents of the Data List. NI Multisim User Manual 6-50 ni. The modifications are saved. Refer to the Add a Footprint dialog box section for more information. Enter the appropriate information. • Link Info button—Displays a list of components with the selected footprint through the Component List dialog box. 2. 7. select the footprint in the Data List and click the Copy To button. 4. Navigate to the Footprint tab of the Component Properties dialog box. 5. Complete the following steps to map symbol and footprint pins: 1. Select the footprint you wish to make modifications to in the Footprint Manufacturer\Type box. 2. you will be prompted to save the footprint with the modifications.

The Filter dialog box closes and the Select a Footprint dialog box displays with the Data List populated according to the parameters you entered in the Filter dialog box. 2. Chapter 6 Component Editing • Select its swap group from the drop-down list in the Swap Group column. For example. for example). Pins in the same swap group can be interchanged during the PCB layout process. Click Add Row. © National Instruments Corporation 6-51 NI Multisim User Manual . Enter desired parameters as shown below: • Column—Corresponds to the columns in the Select a Footprint dialog box. 3. Complete the following steps to filter contents of the Data List: 1. Starts with. The dialog box will resemble the following: 4. Filter dialog box You can filter what is displayed in the Data List of the Select a Footprint dialog box by using the Filter dialog box. you may wish to view a specific footprint from a specific device manufacturer only. Click Filter in the Select a Footprint dialog box to display the Filter dialog box. • Value—A value you would expect to see in the selected Column ( “16”. NOT =. for example). • Operator—Select one of: =. Click in the field and select the desired value from the drop-down list that appears (“Footprint”. Click OK. Contains.

NI Multisim User Manual 6-52 ni. Click Add Row and enter parameters as shown above. 7. select the filter and click Delete Row. 3. 6. To display all available footprints in the Select a Footprint dialog box. 4. Refer to the Select a Footprint dialog box section for more information. Optionally. Click on Add in the Select a Footprint dialog box. 2. Click OK to return to the Select a Footprint dialog box. click Clear Filter and OK from the Filter dialog box. For BGAs (Ball Grid Arrays): • Enable the Enable alpha-numeric BGA functionality checkbox. Enter the required information in the Database Name.com . 5. Ultiboard Footprint. The Add a Footprint dialog box displays. Add a Footprint dialog box Complete the following steps to add a footprint to the User Database or Corporate Database: 1. Select either Corporate Database or User Database in the Database Name field of the Select a Footprint dialog box. Manufacturer. • Alpha (Depth)—Enter the number of rows of footprint pins in the BGA. 5. and Number of Pins fields.Chapter 6 Component Editing Note Filter On remains visible until Clear Filter is clicked in the Filter dialog box. • Numeric (Width)—Enter the number of columns of footprint pins in the BGA. click Filter to display the Filter dialog box and enter more parameters. Tip Add as many filters as necessary to reduce the items in the Data List to an easily scrollable quantity. The contents of the dialog now reflect the two filters that you entered in the Filter List. Select either SMT (surface mount) or TH (through-hole) in the SMT/TH field. Footprint. To clear an individual filter from the Filter dialog box.

2. The functionality described in this step allows the footprint pins to be renamed to match the alpha-numeric pin naming method used in Ultiboard. This example shows the pin mapping for an LM3301N. B2. Click the Map Pins button in either the Footprint tab of the Component Properties dialog box. Quad High Gain Norton Op-amp. The COM tab shows pins common to all sections. are named in a matrix array starting with A1.. or the Edit Footprint dialog box. A2…Ax. Click OK. 6. The footprint pins display in the preview pane on the right side of the dialog box. The all tab shows all pins in the component. Chapter 6 Component Editing As you change the values in the above two fields.Bx. Complete the following steps to display the Advanced Pin Mapping dialog box: 1.. B. etc. Note BGA pins in Ultiboard (Circuit Design Suite’s PCB layout software). C & D show pins from individual sections. Tabs A. When creating this symbol in Multisim. the next row would be B1. the Footprint Pins values are updated as in the example shown below. This feature is especially useful for BGAs with large numbers of pins that would otherwise have to be manually renamed. Advanced Pin Mapping Dialog The Advanced Pin Mapping dialog box is used to map symbol pins to footprint pins and is especially useful for more complex components. the footprint pins are initially named 1. step 5 of the Component Wizard. 3 etc… . © National Instruments Corporation 6-53 NI Multisim User Manual .

Mapping Pins The following example uses the Advanced Pin Mapping dialog box with the footprint pins displayed in the right pane. Display the Advanced Pin Mapping dialog as described earlier in this section.Chapter 6 Component Editing To reverse the display so that the symbol pins appear in the right pane. In the preview pane. a grey footprint pin number indicates that that pin has been selected in the table on the left. as with footprint pin 1 in the example below. To remove all pin mapping.com . click Clean Map. click Switch. a blue footprint pin number indicates an unmapped footprint pin. Complete the following steps to map footprint to symbol pins: 1. If you wish to display the symbol pins in the right pane. click Switch. a red footprint pin number indictes a mapping duplication. NI Multisim User Manual 6-54 ni. The same mapping techniques will apply. a black footprint pin number indicates that the footprint pin has been mapped to a symbol pin.

Click Copy Up to copy the selected pin assignments upwards. 3. Or Click Copy Down to copy the selected pin assignments downward. Complete the following steps to use the Copy Up and Copy Down buttons: 1. © National Instruments Corporation 6-55 NI Multisim User Manual . 2. Chapter 6 Component Editing Tip Hover the cursor over a pin in the right pane to display a tooltip that shows the pin’s mapping. Select a symbol pin in the left column and click on a blue (unmapped) footprint pin in the right pane. 2. You can also click-and-drag a symbol pin to footprint pin in the right pane to create a mapping (or vice versa). Use the <Shift> and/or <Ctrl> keys to select a number of pins symbol pins in the left column. The footprint pin’s color turns black to indicate that it is mapped.

com . stock number. The information is particularly useful in reports and in searching the database for the most appropriate component. • Thermal Resistance Case—Enter or modify the thermal characteristics of the whole package (component) in watts or degrees centigrade. you might use these fields to record the cost of a component (the price you pay to the supplier or vendor). Typically. Editing User Fields User fields can be used for any purpose you wish. • Derating Knee Point—Enter or modify the temperature (degrees centigrade) at which the power of the component/package begins to be de-rated. • ESD Rating—Enter or modify the electro-static discharge rating for the component. and field values are unique to an individual component. • Power Dissipation—Enter or modify the power dissipation of the component. preferred supplier. Field titles are shared across databases (that is. Operating Temperature—Enter or modify the lowest ambient temperature at which the component can operate reliably in degrees centigrade. a manager or project leader would populate this level of the database. For example. in watts or degrees centigrade. • Min. in watts. These are: • Thermal Resistance Junction—Enter or modify the thermal characteristics within the component (from the junction to the case). The Common Parameters are common to all components. in order to operate the device in its safe operating range. Operating Temperature—Enter or modify the highest ambient temperature at which the component can operate reliably in degrees centigrade. NI Multisim User Manual 6-56 ni. User fields consist of two elements: the field title and the field value. and so on.Chapter 6 Component Editing Editing a Component’s Electronic Parameters The Electronic Param tab consists of two sets of fields. all components in all the databases have the same user field titles). • Max. The Device Specific Parameters vary depending on the type of component. lead time for ordering.

The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. preset values are provided for a specific model. 2. This guide gives suggestions on methods for selecting points in the procedures for the Model Makers. For each Model Maker. © National Instruments Corporation 6-57 NI Multisim User Manual . other information is given in the form of a chart or graph. using data from a databook. From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. When working with databooks. and you can select numerical values based on the component you are interested in. Click the appropriate Title until a frame appears around it. note that different databooks provide parameters for a component model in different styles. The Select a Model dialog box appears. even though the names or labels and descriptions of parameters are different. This name will appear in the Component Properties dialog box for all components in all databases. you will need to enter the operating point and the value that you want. Click the Database Manager button from the Standard toolbar. However. 3. Click Start Model Maker. 2. Or Choose Tools»Database»Database Manager. In the case of tables or lists. Complete the following steps to set up or modify user field titles: 1. Chapter 6 Component Editing Note User fields must be given titles before they can be used to record values. click Add/Edit. Model Makers will save you time and effort but do require experience for you to become proficient with them. Creating a Component Model Using the Model Makers Multisim offers advanced Model Makers which automatically generate simulation models for you when you give them databook values as input. Also. AC Motor 1. In the case of charts or graphs. note that the information provided by databooks is usually the same from one manufacturer to another. Click the User Field Titles tab. Enter or change the name for the Title. the way you select the points from the appropriate curves will have an impact on the accuracy of the parameters of the final model. While some information is given numerically in tables or lists for a specific operating point. Both types of information are required by Multisim’s Model Makers. 4. these are not default values.

Enter values in the BJT Model dialog box as described in the sections below. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab. If desired. enter the type of semiconductor. Locate data information for the BJT model from a databook. change the default value set by Multisim for Nominal Temperature. Click Start Model Maker. 2. click OK to complete the model. 2. click Add/Edit. 5.Chapter 6 Component Editing 3.) The 3 Phase AC Motor dialog box appears. or click Cancel to cancel. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab. select AC Motor and click Accept. From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears.com . Complete the following steps to enter General data: 1. 4. 3. From the Model Maker List. Enter desired values in the 3 Phase AC Motor dialog box. 5. Note The BJT Model dialog box shows preset values for the MPS2222 model. BJT Model Maker 1. Enter NPN or PNP in the Type of BJT field. When all values are entered. Entering General and Table Data 1. This is usually found written next to the component type. 2. 4. NI Multisim User Manual 6-58 ni. select BJT and click Accept. 4. In the BJT Model dialog box. The Select a Model dialog box appears. This is typically found in the top left corner of the “Electrical Characteristics” table in the databook. 3. click the General tab. change the default value for Base Temperature for Input. This is usually found on the first page of the data book. click OK to complete the model. When all values are entered. From the Model Maker List. If desired.) The BJT Model dialog box appears. In the Type of Semiconductor field.

enable Check if data not available. © National Instruments Corporation 6-59 NI Multisim User Manual . Chapter 6 Component Editing Complete the following steps to enter Maximum Ratings data: 1. locate the “Maximum Ratings” table—for example: 2. and find the values for Output Admittance—for example: If data are not available. locate the “Small Signal Characteristics” table. Complete the following steps to enter Output Admittance data: 1. In the databook for the BJT. Find the value for Emitter-Base Voltage and enter the value in the Emitter-Base Maximum Voltage (VEBO) field. In the databook.

find the “Switching Characteristics” table—for example: 2. Based on the table data. enter: • Output Admittance (hoe) • Collector Current (Ic1) • Collector-Emitter Voltage (Vce) Note Databooks provide maximum and minimum values for the Output Admittance parameter.Chapter 6 Component Editing 2. Select a typical value of output admittance. In the databook. enter: • Storage Time (ts) • Collector Current (lc2) • Base Current (Ib1) • Base Current (Ib2) NI Multisim User Manual 6-60 ni. Complete the following steps to enter Switching Characteristics data: 1. Based on the table data.com .

or the end point. Reverse Voltages (RV)” graph—for example: Complete the following steps to enter Emitter-Base Capacitance (Input Capacitance) data: 1. 2. locate the point corresponding to the lowest voltage. On the same curve. locate the point corresponding to the maximum voltage. Use the coordinates of this point to enter values for: • Capacitance (Ceb4) • Hi-Value of Reverse Voltage © National Instruments Corporation 6-61 NI Multisim User Manual . Click the Capacitances tab. or the beginning point. In the databook. Use the coordinates of this point to enter values for: • Capacitance (Ceb1) • Low-Value of Reverse Voltage 2. Chapter 6 Component Editing Entering Capacitances Data 1. of the Ceb curve. locate the “Ceb and Ccb vs. On the Ceb curve.

2. locate the hFE vs. Ic graph. repeat steps 1 through 3 above to enter values for: • Capacitance (Ccb1) • Low-Value of Reverse Voltage • Capacitance (Ccb2) at Reverse Voltage • Capacitance (Ccb3) at Reverse Voltage • Capacitance (Ccb4) • Hi-Value of Reverse Voltage Entering DC Current Gain Chart data 1. to avoid excessive error in the model. Ensure that they are not too close. Using the Ccb curve from the same “Ceb and Ccb vs.Chapter 6 Component Editing 3. Use the coordinates of the first and second points to enter values for: • Capacitance (Ceb2) at Reverse Voltage • Capacitance (Ceb3) at Reverse Voltage Complete the following steps to enter Collector-Base Capacitance Chart (Output Capacitance) data: 1. Ic) tab.com . Click the DC Current Gain Chart (hFE vs. To enter Intermediate Values. In the databook for the BJT. Reverse Voltages (RV)” graph. NI Multisim User Manual 6-62 ni. select two intermediate points close to the left side in the low voltage region.

select the one whose Vce is most likely the operating point for the transistor. Use the coordinates of this value to enter: • DC Current Gain (hFE1) • Minimal Collector Current 3. 2. and enter its DC Current Gain value in the Max Value of DC Current Gain (hFE_Max) field. Ic curves at the base temperature for the BJT. Among the hFE vs. Select a point from the low Ic region of the same curve. Chapter 6 Component Editing Complete the following steps to enter DC Current Gain (hFE) at base Temperature data: 1. For example: Note You must select a curve with the same voltage as the Ic-Vbe curve you will use to enter data on the last tab of this dialog box. Find the highest point on the curve. Find the point on the curve corresponding to the minimal collector current. Use the coordinates of this point to enter: • DC Current Gain (hFE2) • Intermediate Collector Current (low values range) 4. © National Instruments Corporation 6-63 NI Multisim User Manual . Refer to the Entering “On” Voltages and Current-Gain Bandwidth Data section for more information. or the beginning point of the curve.

) For example: 2. find a curve at a different temperature from the base temperature. 5. Complete the following steps to enter DC Current Gain (hFE) at another Temperature data: 1. Refer to the Entering “On” Voltages and Current-Gain Bandwidth Data section for more information. NI Multisim User Manual 6-64 ni. (This can be any other temperature. Refer to the Entering “On” Voltages and Current-Gain Bandwidth Data section for more information. Enter the temperature of the selected curve in the Another temperature on the Chart (t2) field. Ic graph. Find the two points corresponding to 0.5 Max DC Current Gain (high values range) Note You must note the Ic value of the point in the low Ic region to plot points on the Ic-Vbe curve you will use to enter data on the last tab of this dialog box.Chapter 6 Component Editing Note You must note the Ic value of this point to plot points on the Ic-Vbe curve you will use to enter data on the last tab of this dialog box.5 of the maximum DC current gain value.com . one in the low Ic region and one in the high Ic region.5 Max DC Current Gain (low values range) • Collector Current (Ikf) at 0. Using the hFE vs. Use these points to enter: • Collector Current (IL) at 0.

Find the highest point on the curve. Use the coordinates of this point to enter: • DC Current Gain (hFE2_t2) • Intermediate Collector Current (low values range) 5. Vbe graph. or the beginning point of the curve. Ic (same as hFE curve) field. Chapter 6 Component Editing 3. Find a point corresponding to 0. Enter its Vce value in the Collector-Emitter Voltage for Vbe vs. locate the Ic vs. 6. 2. Click the “On” Voltages. In the databook. Use the coordinates of this value to enter: • DC Current Gain (hFE1_t2) • Minimal Collector Current 4. Select a point from the low Ic region of the same curve. Current-Gain Bandw tab. and enter its DC Current Gain value in the Max Value of DC Current Gain (hFE_Maxt2) field. Find the point on the curve corresponding to the minimal collector current. Complete the following steps to enter DC Current Gain (hFE) at Base Temperature data: 1.5 Max DC Current Gain (low values range) field. For example: © National Instruments Corporation 6-65 NI Multisim User Manual . On the graph. Entering “On” Voltages and Current-Gain Bandwidth Data 1.5 of the maximum DC current gain value in the low Ic region and enter its value in the Collector Current (IL_t2) at 0. locate the curve with the same Vce as the one used in the hFE data.

Using the Ic vs. Using the Ic vs. At the point of the maximum DC Current Gain (hFE). Enter the voltage for this point in the “On” Base-Emitter Voltage (Vbe_hFEMax) at Max Gain field. locate the Ic-hFE curve at the base temperature that was used to enter data on the third tab of this dialog box. Use the coordinates of this point to enter: • “On” Base-Emitter Voltage (Vbe1) • Low-Value of Collector Current 3. hFE graph from the previous section. hFE graph from the previous section. At the point corresponding to 0. 6.5 Max Gain Collector Current (low values range) field. For example: NI Multisim User Manual 6-66 ni. find the point corresponding to this coordinate for Ic on the curve used in steps 1 to 3. or the beginning point of the curve. Vbe graph. On the Ic-Vbe graph.5 of the maximum DC Current Gain (hFE).com . 4. find the point corresponding to this coordinate for Ic on the curve used in steps 1 to 4. Using the Ic vs.Chapter 6 Component Editing 2. note the coordinate for the collector current (Ic). Enter the voltage for this point in the “On” Base-Emitter Voltage (Vbe_iL) at 0. Find the point on this curve corresponding to the minimal Ic value. On the Ic-Vbe graph. 5. note the coordinate for the collector current (Ic). Complete the following steps to enter Vbe(sat)-Ic data: 1. locate the curve whose Vbe(Sat)@Ic/Ib=10. locate the Ic-hFE curve at the base temperature that was used to enter data on the third tab of this dialog box.

Use the coordinates of this point to enter: • Saturation Base-Emitter Voltage (Vbe2_sat) • Hi-Value of Collector Current 3. Chapter 6 Component Editing 2. Use the coordinates of this point to enter: • Saturation Collector-Emitter Voltage (Vce1_sat) • Collector Current in the high values range © National Instruments Corporation 6-67 NI Multisim User Manual . Using the Ic vs. Select a point on the curve in the high values range of the collector current. locate the curve whose Vbe(Sat)@Ic/Ib=10. Use the coordinates of this point to enter: • Saturation Collector-Emitter Voltage (Vce2_sat) • Highest Value of Collector Current 3. Select a point on the curve in the high values range of the collector current. Vbe graph. Find the highest point on the curve. Use the coordinates of this point to enter: • Saturation Base-Emitter Voltage (Vbe1_sat) • Collector Current in the high values range Complete the following steps to enter Vce(sat)-Ic data: 1. For example: 2. Find the highest point on the curve.

of the curve.Chapter 6 Component Editing Complete the steps below to enter Current-Gain Bandwidth Product Chart (fT) data: 1. In the databook. Complete the following steps to enter Temperature Coefficients Chart data: 1. Locate the maximum fT value. locate the “Temperature Coefficients” chart—for example: NI Multisim User Manual 6-68 ni. or the highest point. locate the “Current-Gain Bandwidth Product versus Frequency” graph—for example: 2. Enter this value in the Maximum Value of Current-Gain Bandwidth Product field.com . In the databook.

Converters Buck Converter A buck converter is a step-down converter that can be represented by the equivalent circuit shown in the figure below. On the base-emitter temperature coefficient curve. Chapter 6 Component Editing 2. Refer to the Buck Converter section for information about this Model Maker. or the lowest point. and enter this value in the Lowest Value of Base-Emitter Voltage Temperature Coefficient field. Boost Converter A boost converter is a step-up converter that can be represented by the equivalent circuit shown in the figure below. find the minimum value. Refer to the Boost Converter section for information about this Model Maker. © National Instruments Corporation 6-69 NI Multisim User Manual .

The Select a Model dialog box appears.Chapter 6 Component Editing Buck-Boost Converter A buck-boost converter is a step-down—step-up converter that can be represented by the equivalent circuit shown in the figure below. NI Multisim User Manual 6-70 ni. Refer to the Cuk Converter section for information about this Model Maker. Click Start Model Maker.) The Boost Converter Model dialog box appears. click Add/Edit. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab. From the Model Maker List. 3. From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. 2. Boost Converter 1.com . Refer to the Buck Boost Converter section for information about this Model Maker. select Boost Converter and click Accept. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. Cuk Converter The cuk converter can be represented by the equivalent circuit shown in the figure below.

Cuk Converter 1. 3. click Add/Edit. 5. select Cuk Converter and click Accept. When all values are entered. Click Start Model Maker. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab. Buck Converter 1. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. Enter desired values in the Buck Boost Converter Model dialog box. 5. From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. When all values are entered. 4. From the Model Maker List. 4. 2. From the Model Maker List. Click Start Model Maker. select Buck Boost Converter and click Accept. click Add/Edit. Enter desired values in the Cuk Converter Model dialog box. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. click OK to complete the model. The Select a Model dialog box appears. 4. The Select a Model dialog box appears. From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. Click Start Model Maker. When all values are entered. From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. 3. When all values are entered. Buck Boost Converter 1. 5. 3. Enter desired values in the Buck Converter Model dialog box. From the Model Maker List. select Buck Converter and click Accept. © National Instruments Corporation 6-71 NI Multisim User Manual . click OK to complete the model. 2. 2. 5.) The Cuk Converter Model dialog box appears. Chapter 6 Component Editing 4. Enter desired values in the Boost Converter Model dialog box.) The Buck Converter Model dialog box appears. click OK to complete the model. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab.) The Buck Boost Converter Model dialog box appears. click Add/Edit. The Select a Model dialog box appears. click OK to complete the model.

Select a point on the graph that represents the mid-point of the horizontal direction. 4. Entering General Data 1. click Add/Edit. find the “Reverse Voltage vs. locate the graph that indicates the ambient temperature of 25° C. Enter values in the Diode Model dialog box as described in the following sections. Look up data information for the diode in a databook. Use the coordinates of this point to enter values for: • Reverse Breakdown Voltage (BV) • Reverse Breakdown Current (IBV) NI Multisim User Manual 6-72 ni. 2. 2. Complete the following steps to enter Reverse Characteristics data: 1. Reverse Current” chart. find the “Maximum Ratings and Electrical Characteristics” table. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. 4. Based on information in this table. enable Check if data not available.Chapter 6 Component Editing Diode Model Maker 1. Click the General tab. select Diode and click Accept.com . 3. 2. 2. The Select a Model dialog box appears. click OK to complete the model. On the chart. Note The Diode Model dialog box shows preset values for the IN4001 model. If no data are available. From the Model Maker List. 3. as indicated in the chart. Click Start Model Maker.) The Diode Model dialog box appears. In the databook. 5. From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. enter the following values: • Maximum repetitive peak reverse voltage (VRRM) • Maximum DC reverse current at VRRM (IR) • Typical reverse recovery time (trr) Complete the following steps to enter Reverse Breakdown data: 1. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab. When all values are entered. In the databook.

Chapter 6 Component Editing Complete the following steps to enter Instantaneous Forward Characteristics data: 1. Use the coordinates of this point to enter values for: • Lowest forward current (IF1) • Lowest forward voltage (VF1) 3. Using your eye or a ruler. which will look like a straight line. If the graph is provided in linear format. locate the “Typical Instantaneous Forward Characteristics” graph—for example: 2. plot the data in logarithmic fashion and follow the ruler procedure. In the databook. Where the curve begins to diverge from your ruler. which is usually the case. or the end point on the curve. at beginning point of the curve. a good way to find this point is to place a ruler along the beginning of the curve in the lower voltage area. Use the coordinates of this point to enter values for: • Highest forward current (IFM) • Highest forward voltage (VFM) 4. use this point as your intermediate point. © National Instruments Corporation 6-73 NI Multisim User Manual . Note Guidelines for selecting the intermediate point vary from one databook to another. find the second or intermediate point on the curve which you think best identifies the transition point in the curve. Find the point of highest forward voltage. If the graph is provided in logarithmic format. Find the point of lowest forward voltage.

Find the point of highest reverse voltage. If this information is not given in the databook. greater than the lowest reverse voltage but in the lower range of the reverse voltage. In the databook. Select two additional intermediate points on the graph. enable Check if data not available. 7. Find the point of lowest reverse voltage.com . Click the Junction Capacitance Chart tab. or the end point on the curve) and enter the coordinate values in the Junction capacitance (CJ4) and Highest Reverse Voltage (Vr4) fields. Use the coordinates of this point to enter the values for: • Junction capacitance (CJ1) • Lowest Reverse Voltage (Vr1) 5. 4. 6. Use the coordinates of this point to enter the values for: • Forward current (IF2) • Intermediate forward voltage (VF2) Entering Capacitance data Complete the following steps to enter Junction Capacitances data: 1. 2. find the “Typical Junction Capacitance” chart—for example: 3. Use the coordinate values of the second point to enter: NI Multisim User Manual 6-74 ni. or the beginning point of the curve. Find the junction capacitance at zero reverse voltage and enter it in the Junction capacitance at zero reverse voltage (CJO) field.Chapter 6 Component Editing 5.

6. 3. 2.) The Ideal Transformer Model dialog box appears. click Option 1 or Option 2 to quickly select which Primary Input Voltage to use. © National Instruments Corporation 6-75 NI Multisim User Manual . From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. Click OK to complete the model. 4. select Ideal Transformer (Multiple Winding) and click Accept. click Add/Edit. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab. Optionally. Chapter 6 Component Editing • Junction capacitance (CJ2) • Second to Lowest Reverse Voltage (Vr2) 8. Click Start Model Maker. Use the coordinate values of the third point to enter: • Junction Capacitance (CJ3) • Second to Highest Reverse Voltage (Vr3) Transformers The following transformer models are available in Multisim: • Ideal Transformer (Multiple Winding) • Linear Transformer (Multiple Winding) • Linear Transformer with Neutral Terminal • Two Winding Linear Transformer • Non-linear Transformer (Multiple Winding) Ideal Transformer (Multiple Winding) 1. In the Primary box. 5. increase the number of secondary outputs in the Secondary Output Number field. From the Model Maker List. Or Enter a value directly into the Primary Input Voltage fields. The Select a Model dialog box appears. The number of Output Voltage fields increase to match the entered number.

Two Winding Linear Transformer 1. Or Enter values directly into the Primary Input Voltage. 3. 5. Click Start Model Maker. 3.) The Linear Transformer with Central Terminal in Secondary Side dialog box appears. select Linear Transformer with Neutral Terminal and click Accept. In the Primary box. Optionally. 6. Click OK to complete the model. click Add/Edit. From the Model Maker List. click Add/Edit. 2. Leakage Inductance. increase the number of secondary outputs in the Secondary Output Number field. 2. Leakage Inductance. The Select a Model dialog box appears. From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. Click Start Model Maker. click Add/Edit. Linear Transformer with Neutral Terminal 1. and Winding Resistance fields. select Linear Transformer (Multiple Winding) and click Accept. and Winding Resistance fields increase to match the entered number. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. Click Start Model Maker.Chapter 6 Component Editing Linear Transformer (Multiple Winding) 1. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. click Option 1 or Option 2 to quickly select which primary properties to use. 2. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. Enter the desired values in the dialog box. From the Model Maker List. 4. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab. 4. NI Multisim User Manual 6-76 ni. From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab.com . The number of Output Voltage. From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. Click OK to complete the model. The Select a Model dialog box appears. Magnetizing Impedance. The Select a Model dialog box appears. 5.) The Linear Transformer Model dialog box appears.

© National Instruments Corporation 6-77 NI Multisim User Manual . Leakage Inductance. Leakage Inductance and Winding Resistance fields. select Non-Linear Transformer (Multiple Winding) and click Accept. 5. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. and Winding Resistance fields increase to match the entered number. From the Model Maker List. Click OK to complete the model. Enter desired values in the dialog box. Click OK to complete the model. Non-linear Transformer (Multiple Winding) 1.) The Non-Linear Transformer Model dialog box appears. From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. Or Enter values directly into the Primary Input Voltage. Enter desired values in the Non-Linear Transformer Model dialog box as described in the following sections. Enter the desired parameters for each of the secondary outputs in the Output Voltage. 4. Click Start Model Maker. 2. 3. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab. Leakage Inductance. Entering General Data 1.) The Two Winding Linear Transformer Model dialog box appears. Chapter 6 Component Editing 3. Click OK to complete the model. From the Model Maker List. Optionally. increase the number of secondary outputs in the Secondary Output Number field. and Winding Resistance fields. 4. 4. 5. click Option 1 or Option 2 to quickly select which primary properties to use. The Select a Model dialog box appears. In the Primary box. 2. click Add/Edit. The number of Output Voltage. 5. 3. select Two Winding Linear Transformer and click Accept. Click on the General tab. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab.

Entering General and Output Characteristics Data 1. to continue. 4. This is the title of the datasheet and is found at the top of the datasheet. Note The MOSFET Model dialog box shows preset values for the BSS83 model. From the Model Maker list. Enter the Primary Turns. Click OK to complete the model. Click the General tab.com . click Accept. or enter your own B-H Curve parameters. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. Complete the following steps to enter General data: 1. From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. Look up data information for the MOSFET in a databook. Click OK.Chapter 6 Component Editing Entering Advanced Data 1. 2. click Add/Edit. Click Start Model Maker. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab.) The MOSFET Model dialog box appears. NI Multisim User Manual 6-78 ni. 2. enter the Max Drain Current. Core Length and Core Area parameters as required. 2. The Select a Model dialog box appears. 3. 3. Sample 2 or Sample 3). 4. 5. Use one of the pre-set sample B-H curves (Sample 1. Enter values in the MOSFET Model dialog box as described in the following sections. 2. select MOSFET and. Enter the Channel Type of MOSFET. 3. Click on the Advanced tab. MOSFET (Field Effect Transistor) Model Maker 1. From the data given in the table. Find the “Ratings” table for the MOSFET.

find the Id vs. locate the saturation region of the curves.) For example: © National Instruments Corporation 6-79 NI Multisim User Manual . Enter the Id value of this point in the Drain Current (Ids_Ohmic) field. (The curve corresponding to the highest VGS does not have a saturation region. 5. Enter this Vgs value in the Vgs for the curve (Vgs_ohmic). 4. Locate the curve with the highest Vgs. Vds graph—for example: 2. Using the same graph as above. The saturation region is the steady state situation of the curves where points along the curve fit on a straight line. Locate a point in the ohmic region of the same curve. 3. Enter the Vds value of this point in the Vds when drain current is Ids_Ohmic (Vds_Ohmic) field. From the MOSFET data information. Complete the following steps to enter other output characteristics: 1. Chapter 6 Component Editing Complete the following steps to enter Output Characteristics in Ohmic Region data: 1.

(This excludes the topmost curve of the Id-Vds graph.) 8. 4. Use the coordinates of the end point to enter: • Drain Current (Ids_f01) • Vds_f01 (higher Vds) 7. To enter data for the Ids_Vds curve 3 (for highest Vgs) fields. or the area where the points fit along a straight line.Chapter 6 Component Editing 2. Enter the Vgs value of this curve in the Vgs for this curve (Vgs_f0) field. Use the coordinates of the beginning point to enter: • Drain Current (Ids_f00) • Vds_f00 (lower Vds) 6. To enter data for the Ids_Vds curve 1 (for lowest Vgs) fields. for this curve. 3.com . find the curve with the lowest Vgs value. Repeat steps 3 through 7 to enter values for: • Vgs for this curve (Vgs_f2) • Drain Current • Vds_f20 (lower Vds) • Drain Current (Ids_f21) • Vds_f21 (higher Vds) NI Multisim User Manual 6-80 ni. Using your eye or a ruler. find the curve with the highest Vgs value. but which still has a saturation region. locate the beginning and end points of the saturation region. 5.

you will be prompted to enter data in the Option A or Option B fields on the same dialog box. 2. click the Transfer Characteristics . Note If the graph contains more than one Vsb curve. Repeat steps 3 through 7 to enter values for: • Vgs for this curve (Vgs_f1) • Drain Current (Ids_f10) • Vds_f01 (lower Vds) • Drain Current (Ids_f11) • Vds_f11 (higher Vds) Entering Transfer Characteristics data Complete the following steps to select Transfer Characteristics options: 1. © National Instruments Corporation 6-81 NI Multisim User Manual . find the curve in the middle point between the curves corresponding to the lowest Vgs and the highest VGS with a saturation region. 10.Option C tab. the dialog box will prompt you to Go to Option C (Next Page). 3. it implies that source and bulk (substrate) are not connected together. To enter data for the Ids_Vds curve 2 (for intermediate Vgs) fields.Option A. In the databook. B tab. Click the Transfer Characteristics . under Vds for Id-Vgs curve and Multi Id-Vgs curve. Vgs graph. If the latter option is not enabled. To go to Option C. Depending on the available data. enable the appropriate options. locate the Id vs. If the latter option is enabled (as it is in our example). Chapter 6 Component Editing 9.

Use the coordinates for this point to enter: for Option A: • Drain Current (Ids_A1) • Vgs_A1 (lower Vgs) for Option B: • Drain Current Ids_B1 • Vgs_B1 (lower Vgs) NI Multisim User Manual 6-82 ni. 3. If you are using Option C. locate the curve with the lowest Vsb. 4.com . B. If you are using Option C. or C): 1. or the highest point of the curve. If you are using Option A. enter the Vsb value in the Vsb for this curve (Vsb_C1) field. Look at the data in the Ids vs. Gate-to-Source Voltage) data for all three options (Option A. Find the maximum Id. Vgs graph—for example: 2. enter the Vds value in the Vds for Ids-Vgs curve field. If you are using Option B. proceed to step 3. proceed to step 4. to enter data in the Ids-Vgs Curve for lowest Vsb fields. If you are using Option B.Chapter 6 Component Editing Complete the following steps to enter Transfer Characteristics (Drain Current vs.

To enter data in the Ids-Vgs Curve for Intermediate Vsb fields. To complete the Option C dialog box. to enter data in the Ids-Vgs Curve for highest Vsb. Chapter 6 Component Editing for Option C: • Drain Current (Ids_C11) • Vgs-C11 (lower Vgs) 5. find the curve with the highest Vsb value. Use the coordinates of this point to enter: for Option A: • Drain Current (Ids_A2) • Vgs_A2 (higher Vgs) for Option B: • Drain Current (Ids_B2) • Vgs_B2 (higher Vgs) for Option C: • Drain Current (Ids_C12) • Vgs_C12 (higher Vgs) 6. and repeat steps 3 through 5 above to enter data for: • Vbs for this curve (Vsb_C3) • Drain Current (Ids_C31) • Vgs_C21 (lower Vgs) • Drain Current (Ids_C32) • Vgs_C22 (highest Vgs) 7. select the curve corresponding to a Vsb value in between the highest and lowest Vsb. Repeat steps 3 through 5 above to enter data for: • Vsb for this curve (Vsb_C2) • Drain Current (Ids_C21) • Vgs_C21 (lower Vgs) • Drain Current (Ids_C22) • Vgs_C22 (highest Vgs) © National Instruments Corporation 6-83 NI Multisim User Manual . Find the point on the curve which corresponds to 10% of the maximum Id on the same curve.

The Select a Model dialog box appears. 2.Chapter 6 Component Editing Entering Capacitances Data Complete the following steps to enter Conditions: 1. you may enter data in the Capacitances vs. In the databook. 4. click OK to complete the model. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab. locate the “Capacitances vs. In the databook. Click the Junction Capacitance Chart tab. and use the datasheet to enter capacitances. Complete the following steps to enter Capacitance values from datasheet: 1. Click Start Model Maker. If it is available. The first is to check the schematic of the device where the internal connections of the MOS transistor are shown. Determine whether the bulk and source of the model are connected. and select the appropriate answer beside Bulk and Source connected. select Operational Amplifier and. 3. Enter values on the Operational Amplifier Model dialog box as described in the following sections. find the “Characteristics” table. 2. click Add/Edit. NI Multisim User Manual 6-84 ni. From the Model Maker list. When all values are entered. From the table. enter data for: • Feedback capacitance • Input capacitance • Output capacitance • Drain-Substrate Voltage Operational Amplifier Model Maker 1. it suggests that source-bulk (substrate) are not connected together. Note The second is to check the Id-Vgs graph. 3. The substrate condition can be determined by two means. Drain-to-Source Voltage” chart. 2. enable Coss-Vds and Crss-Vds curve NOT available. 5. Drain-to-Source Voltage fields. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears.) The Operational Amplifier Model dialog box appears. click Accept. If the graph contains more than one Vsb curve. From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box.com . If it is not available. to continue.

you can also find it in a chart called © National Instruments Corporation 6-85 NI Multisim User Manual . Note This information is optional. Complete the following steps to enter General data: 1. If the type of the input transistor is not important. its variations with frequency are also provided in a chart called “Common-Mode Rejection Rate Vs. as the op-amp model can be based on any type of input transistor. In the databook. use the CMRR value for the lowest frequency possible. Chapter 6 Component Editing Note The Operational Amplifier Model dialog box shows preset values for the uA741 model. Complete the following steps to enter input data: 1. Input tab. Click the General. 2. find the two tables labeled “Electrical Characteristics at specified free-air temperature”. If its value is not available. Look up data information for the operational amplifier in a databook. Note While the typical value for the Common-Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR) is provided in the “Electrical Characteristics” table. If you use this chart. 2. In the Transistor Type field. select the type of transistor used in the input stage. Note While the typical value for Large Signal Differential Voltage Amplification (Avd) is provided in the “Electrical Characteristics” table. This can be determined by looking at the schematic of the internal structure of the op-amp. select Don’t Care. Entering General and Input Data 1. Frequency”. choose 2 Gohm as the default. Use the data from these tables to enter: • Input Capacitance (Ci) • Input Offset Current (I1o) • Input Bias Current ((I1b) • Input Offset Voltage (V1o) • Common-mode Input Resistance (Rcm) • Differential-mode Input Resistance (R1) • Common-mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR) • Voltage Gain Avd Note The Common-Mode input resistance is usually very high.

find higher frequency poles using the curve mentioned above. However.com . To enter High frequency pole and zero data. Click the Gain frequency curve poles and Zero tab. NI Multisim User Manual 6-86 ni. If the value is provided in V/mV. or the point on the curve where the first horizontal line transitions into a slope. 2. use the Avd value at the lowest frequency. In the databook. If you use this chart. or the point where the slope transitions into a sharper slope. If these pieces of information are not available. Find the second pole on the curve. you should convert the numerical values: value in dB = 20 * log[1000 * (value in V/mv)] Entering Poles and Zero Data Complete the following steps to enter Gain-frequency curve poles and Zero data: 1. 4. Note Databooks provide Avd gain in either dB or V/mV. you can still enter the data in dB. Enter the frequency value for this point in the Pole 1 frequency (fr1) field. Find the first pole on the curve. locate the “Avd-Open-Loop Single Differential Voltage Amplification vs.Chapter 6 Component Editing “Open-Loop Large Signal Differential Voltage”. web sites or books. Frequency” chart—for example: 3. Enter the frequency value for this point in the Pole 2 frequency (fr2) field. enable Not Available.

Chapter 6 Component Editing Entering Output Data 1. or can accept if it is shorted to the positive power supply. From the Model Maker list. select SCR and. Note The SCR Model dialog box shows preset values for the 2N6504 SCR. From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. Use the data from these tables to enter: • Output Resistance (Ro) • Maximum Source Current (Isr) • Maximum Sink Current (Isn) Note Databooks normally provide the short circuit output current. click Accept. When all values are entered. 2. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab. This is the maximum value of the output current which the output node can provide if it is connected to the negative power supply. You should enter its value regardless of its sign. locate the “Operating Characteristics” table. 3. Silicon Controlled Rectifier Model Maker 1. 5. Click Start Model Maker. Click the Output tab. 3. 4. click Add/Edit. Refer to the “Electrical Characteristics” tables mentioned in the previous section.) The SCR Model dialog box appears. In the databook. click OK to complete the model. to continue. 4. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. © National Instruments Corporation 6-87 NI Multisim User Manual . Use the data from this table to enter: • Slew Rate (SR+) (non-inverting mode) • Slew Rate (SR-) (inverting mode) Note Databooks may provide only one value for both inverted and non-inverted slew rates. The Select a Model dialog box appears. Enter values on the SCR Model dialog box as described in the following sections. 2.

enter: • Holding Current • Gate Trigger Current • Gate Trigger Voltage • Peak Forward Blocking Current • Critical Rate of Rise of Off-State Voltage 3.com . Complete the following steps to enter Electrical Characteristics data: 1. 4. 2. Click the Electrical Characteristics.Chapter 6 Component Editing Entering Electrical and Maximum Forward Voltage Data 1. enter the value of the Peak Forward Blocking Voltage field. Look up data information for the SCR in a databook. Locate the “Electrical Characteristics” table—for example: 2. Based on the data in the table. Based on the data provided in this table.05 and enter the value in the 1.05 Peak Reverse Blocking Voltage field. 5. Max Forward Voltage tab. In the databook. NI Multisim User Manual 6-88 ni. Multiply this value by 1. locate the “Maximum Ratings” table.

In the databook. locate the “Instantaneous Forward Current vs. or the end point of the curve. On the curve. Use the coordinates of this point to enter: • Instantaneous Forward Current • Minimum value of instantaneous voltage 3. find the point at the minimum If. Instantaneous Voltage” graph. or the beginning point of the curve. Chapter 6 Component Editing Complete the following steps to enter Maximum Forward Voltage Chart data: 1. use the coordinates of this point to enter: • Instantaneous Forward Current • Maximum value of instantaneous voltage © National Instruments Corporation 6-89 NI Multisim User Manual . For example: 2. and find the If-Vf curve at 25°. Find the point at the maximum If.

For the Reverse Current field. enter the Peak Reverse Blocking Voltage value. For the first Parameter related to “off-state” field. Refer to the “Maximum Ratings” table mentioned in the previous section. 3. find the reverse current (IRC) when the device is in off-state and enter this value. if they are not provided. For the Reverse Voltage field. NI Multisim User Manual 6-90 ni. Locate an intermediate point on the curve corresponding to the transition point. find the reverse voltage (VRC) when the device is in off-state or. Where the curve begins to diverge from your ruler. 4.com . enter 0. if this value is not provided. Since the graph is provided in logarithmic format. For the Identifier field. enter 1 if Reverse Current and Reverse Voltage values are available. Click the Time Data. 5. Use the coordinates of this point to enter: • Instantaneous Forward Current • Intermediate value of instantaneous voltage Entering Time Data and Maximum Ratings Data 1. or. Complete the following steps to enter Maximum Ratings Chart data: 1. if this value is not provided. use this point as your intermediate point. refer to the “Electrical Characteristics” table mentioned in the previous section. 2. 7. enter 0. enter the Forward Current value. and enter data in the Turn-On Time and Turn-Off Time fields. To enter Electrical Characteristics data. you can do this by using a ruler to draw a line starting at the beginning point and following the straight line of the curve in the lower voltage area.Chapter 6 Component Editing 4. Find the Forward Current and enter this value in the Forward Current field. if they are not provided. enter 0 if the Reverse Current and Reverse Voltage values are available. Max Ratings tab. or. enter 0 if the Reverse Current and Reverse Voltage values are available. or 0 if they are unavailable. or. 6. For the second Parameter related to “off-state” field.

2. to continue. Entering Electrical Characteristics Data 1. Click the Electrical Characteristics tab. From the Model Maker list. From the databook. 2.) The Zener Model dialog box appears. Enter values on the Zener Model dialog box as described in the following sections. 5. When all values are entered. (Click Cancel to return to the Model tab. use the information from the table for the following fields: • Nominal Zener Voltage (Vzt) • Zener Test Current (Izt) • Nominal Zener Impedance at Zzt and Izt (Zzt) • Leakage Current (Ir) © National Instruments Corporation 6-91 NI Multisim User Manual . From the Model tab of the Component Properties dialog box. The Select Model Maker dialog box appears. 4. click Accept. 3. locate the “Electrical Characteristics” table—for example: To enter Reverse Characteristics data. click Add/Edit. Chapter 6 Component Editing Zener Model Maker 1. Note The Zener Model dialog box shows preset values for the IN4728A model. 3. select Zener and. The Select a Model dialog box appears. click OK to complete the model. Look up data information for the Zener diode in a databook. Click Start Model Maker.

Use the coordinates of this point to enter: • Forward Current (If1) • Lowest Forward Voltage (Vf1) 3. In the databook. To find the typical value of Zzt.com . Use the coordinates of this point to enter: • Forward Current (If2) • Intermediate Forward Voltage (Vf2) 4. and choose the point which corresponds to the test current given in the table. Find the knee point on the curve. Find the point of maximum forward voltage. locate the If-Vf graph. you can use the Zz-Iz graph. or the point where the slope changes drastically. To find a typical value for Zzk.75 times the maximum value of Zzk. use 0. or the highest point on the curve. Find or estimate a curve at the nominal zener voltage given in the table. Find the point on the curve with the lowest forward voltage. or the beginning point. Use the coordinates of this point to enter: • Highest Forward Current (Ifm) • Highest Forward Voltage (Vfm) NI Multisim User Manual 6-92 ni. Complete the following steps to enter Forward Characteristics data: 1. Use the Zz coordinate of this point to enter as the typical value. and find the maximum curve at 25°—for example: 2.Chapter 6 Component Editing • Reverse Test Voltage (Vr) • Zener Impedance near Breakdown Knee (Zzk) • Zener Current near Breakdown Knee (Izk) Note In the example. the databook only provides the maximum Zener impedance.

Bias Voltage data: 1. estimate its placement. Locate the curve corresponding to the model’s test current as given in the “Electrical Characteristics” table. find the Temperature Coefficient versus Zener Voltage graph—for example: 3. Enter the Temperature Coefficient for this point in the Temperature Coefficient at Zener Nominal Voltage (THETA_vz) field. Complete the following steps to enter Capacitance vs. as provided in the “Electrical Characteristics” table. From the databook. In the databook. Capacitance tab. Chapter 6 Component Editing Entering Temperature Coefficient and Capacitance Data Complete the following steps to enter Temperature Coefficient data: 1. Find the point corresponding to the model’s Vz. locate the “Capacitance versus Nominal Vz” graph—for example: © National Instruments Corporation 6-93 NI Multisim User Manual . 2. (If it is not on the graph. Click the Temperature Coefficient.) 4.

but it is impossible to provide models for every possible device.) Enter the capacitance value for the point you have marked in the Capacitance (CJM) field.1 or greater. 5. NI Multisim User Manual 6-94 ni. What is Code Modeling? Code modeling is the behavioral modeling of devices whose governing equations are known. For the intermediate curve. enter its bias voltage in the Intermediate Bias Voltage field and enter the capacitance value for the point you have marked in the Capacitance (CJ2) field. For the curve with the highest voltage. the behavior of these devices can be modeled using code modeling. behavioral equations. industry-standard programming language: C. However. locate the point corresponding to the Vzt provided in the “Electrical Characteristics” table. Version 4. Creating a Model Using Code Modeling This section explains how to model a component using a high-level. On each of the three curves in the graph. use this point to enter the capacitance value in the Capacitance at 0 Bias Voltage (CJ1) field. As a result. and be familiar with programming and compiling C code. Note This section serves as a basic guide to code modeling and includes helpful examples. The component can then be added to the Multisim database. Multisim has built-in models for most types of devices. code modeling is a complex process. This section is not designed for Multisim users without programming exposure. so be aware that you need time and practice to gain proficiency. but may be easier to describe in terms of high-level. enter its bias voltage in the Highest Voltage field. (In our example. To use code modeling you must have a C compiler such as Microsoft Visual C++. 3. The behavior of some devices may be extremely difficult to model as groups of SPICE components. 4. this value is 50% of the nominal Zener voltage (Vzt) of the model.com . Note Refer to the Editing a Component’s Model section for other useful information.Chapter 6 Component Editing 2. For the curve at zero bias voltage. as provided in the “Electrical Characteristics” table.

2. Create a new interface file inside your model’s subdirectory called Ifspec. one for each of your code models.mod. which is given the same name as the folder containing its source files.mod file include a list of all models in the file in the following format: SPICEdev * FAR DynDEVices[] = { &<function_name>_info }. It is critical that the Cfunc. For best results.1\ codemodl.bat (installed.mod). Navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ Shared Documents\National Instruments\Circuit Design Suite 10. by default. Chapter 6 Component Editing A code model consists of a set of interface definitions and a C function implementation describing the device’s behavior. in the C:/Program Files/Microsoft Visual Studio/Vc98/Bin folder). Create a new implementation file inside your model’s subdirectory called Cfunc. The naming and location of these files is important. © National Instruments Corporation 6-95 NI Multisim User Manual .ifs and Cfunc. You should create new subdirectories inside of USER. Note For systems using the Windows Vista operating system. Complete the following steps to create a code model: 1. The resulting file. Creating a Code Model Refer to the GAINTEST Example section for a specific example of compiling and using a code mode. is placed in the codemodl folder. do all of the following steps from a DOS command window. The model is created by combining two files (Ifspec.1\codemodl. Within this directory is a single subdirectory called USER. This file contains the actual code model. The name of the subdirectory will end up being the name of the code model executable.ifs to set up your model’s basic definitions and interface (i/o ports and parameters). 3. 4. the path is C:\users\ Public\Documents\National Instruments\Circuit Design Suite 10. Set up your environment variables for Microsoft Visual C++ by running VcVars32.

The format should look as follows: . 5. and serves to override any default parameter values defined in Ifspec. and <params> is an optional list of the type “<param_name> = <default value>” separated by spaces (not commas). and select “Load from File”. you will find a new . which is the executable code model. Important: If Multisim is running. 8.dll file into the main codemodl directory in order for Multisim to find it. choose a model in the normal way in the component wizard. you must exit and restart it in order to access new code models. To compile the files into a form that can be used by Multisim.ifs. NI Multisim User Manual 6-96 ni.dll file you just created. the model name and spice model name will be automatically populated from the ifspec. Delete the string “_INSERT_PARAMS” and type in your desired parameters. 6. <name> is the “Spice_Model_Name” from your Ifspec. Select the . go to the codemodl\USER folder and execute the following command: MAKE_DLL <subdirectory> Where <subdirectory> is the directory where you have put your code model files.dll)”. If you have not altered the codemodl directory structure.dll extension).com . 7. This is a special Multisim requirement. and browse to the codemodl directory if necessary.ifs. If the compilation is successful.Chapter 6 Component Editing Where <function_name> is the “C_Function_Name” defined in your Ifspec. 9. Set the file type in the dialog to “Code Model DLL(*. It is recommended that you use a function name beginning with “cm_”. so this line may need to be added to code models used from other sources. In order to use your code model in Multisim.dll file inside the subdirectory. Multisim only loads user code models on startup.dll name of your model (without the .MODEL <DLL> <name>(<params>) where <DLL> is the . or leave the parentheses empty if you wish to use all defaults.ifs file. You must copy or move this .ifs file.

This file contains the actual code model – a simple C language function with the same name defined as C_Function_Name in the Ifspec.mod. gain. 3. 4.1\ codemodl\USER\GAINTEST. you may examine the Cfunc. the default value will be used. Navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ Shared Documents\National Instruments\Circuit Design Suite 10. current. 6. the path is C:\users\ Public\Documents\National Instruments\Circuit Design Suite 10. and AC_GAIN. 2. This example assumes familiarity with the Component Wizard. PARTIAL. Set up your environment variables for Microsoft Visual C++ by running VcVars32. 5.ifs file. differential voltage. 1. Notice that it contains only two files: Ifspec.bat (installed. All three of them have Null_Allowed defined as “yes”. by default.mod file includes the following: SPICEdev * FAR DynDEVices[] = { &cm_gaintest_info }.1\codemodl\USER\GAINTEST. • One output port (same options as the input). or differential current). This defines many of the important characteristics of the GAINTEST model: • The C_Function_Name (cm_gaintest) • The Spice_Model_Name (gaintest) • One input port (analog: voltage. so they are all optional parameters. Chapter 6 Component Editing GAINTEST Example The GAINTEST example is included in the Multisim install. If you wish. © National Instruments Corporation 6-97 NI Multisim User Manual . Note that the GAINTEST Cfunc.ifs and Cfunc. and out_offset). If you wish. Note For systems using the Windows Vista operating system. Note that each parameter is given a plaintext description. as required by Multisim.ifs file. and a default value. OUTPUT.ifs file for the GAINTEST model. Three model parameters (in_offset. If any of these parameters are omitted when calling the model. Note use of XSpice keywords such as INPUT. you may examine the Ifspec. Note also the use of the model parameters defined in the Ifspec. PARAM. in the C:/Program Files/Microsoft Visual Studio/Vc98/Bin folder). a data type.mod file for the GAINTEST model.

click on the “Load from File” button. If you examine this file.mod files. you must exit and restart it so that it may load the new GAINTEST model. expanded into a format understood by the Microsoft Visual C compiler and the Multisim implementation of XSpice. one input and one output. • Select the Gaintest.MODEL GAINTEST gaintest(_INSERT_PARAMS)” • In the “Model Data” section. • On the “Select Simulation Model” step. If you wish. • The model name should change to “GAINTEST” and the model data to “. simulation only. Multisim only recognizes new code models on startup.Chapter 6 Component Editing 7. 11. 9. Create a new circuit and place your new part in series. change _INSERT_PARAMS to gain=2. you may edit the part’s model on the circuit to NI Multisim User Manual 6-98 ni. put this model in some logical place in your User Database.dll: • The Gaintest. • The Gaintest.c and Gaintest.dll)” and browse to the codemodl directory if necessary. Move this Gaintest. To compile the GAINTEST model. change the filter to “Code Model DLL(*. If Multisim is running.dll file contains the compiled code model. you’ll notice that all of the XSpice keywords have been replaced with fairly complex structure and array references. • Finally. You may verify that any voltage applied to the part (DC or AC) will be doubled on output.com . 10.c file contains all the information from the Ifspec. ready for execution.dll file into the main codemodl directory so that Multisim may find it.ifs and Cfunc. In Multisim. note that two new files have been created in the GAINTEST directory: Gaintest.dll file and click “Open”. run the component wizard as follows: • Create an analog component. go to the codemodl\USER folder and execute the following command: MAKE_DLL GAINTEST After successful completion. 8.0 (this creates a part that multiplies the input voltage by two). • Give the part two pins. • In the file-selection dialog that appears.

To reduce the chance of name conflicts. The name table has the following syntax: NAME_TABLE: C_Function_Name:function_name Spice_ModelName:model_name Description: “text” where: function_name is a valid C identifier which is the name of the main entry point (function) for the code model. along with the implementation file. and C implementation function name are defined in the name table. Chapter 6 Component Editing adjust the gain parameter. The model name must be the same as the subdirectory containing the code model files. must be compiled into a DLL to complete the code model. or add in values for the in_offset or out_offset parameters as well. with examples given for each. or use a prefix based on your own initials. we recommend you use the prefix “UCM_” for user code model. The Interface File (Ifspec. description text. The following prefixes are used by the XSPICE simulator core and should not be used for user code models: © National Instruments Corporation 6-99 NI Multisim User Manual . Name Table The model name. the names used by the model. The interface file. and the user-defined variables (parameters) that provide finer control over the behavior of the model. These tables are explained in the following sections. Refer to the Example Interface File section for an example of an interface file. It is recommended that the model name be eight characters. in tables. the electrical connections to the devices (ports).ifs) The interface file sets out. It may or may not be the same as the SPICE model name.

Chapter 6 Component Editing A2VERI D_OPEN_C EW_RES POLY A2VHDL D_OPEN_E EW_SCR POT A_555 D_OR EW_SWTCH PPT ADC_BRDG D_OSC EW_VLT PWL ASRC D_PULLDN FTE R_2_V ASWITCH D_PULLUP GAIN RDELAY BJT D_RAM HLP RES BSIM D_ROM YST RGAIN CAP D_SERIALP ICM S_XFER CCCS RT IDN SCR CCVS D_SOURCE ILIMIT SINE CKT D_SRFF IND SLEW CLIMIT D_SRLATC INDUCTOR SMP CM D_STATE INP SQUARE CMETER D_TFF INT SRC_LVM CORE D_TRISTA IPC SRC_LVM_ CP D_VERI ISRC UR CSW D_VERILOG JFET SRC_TDM D_2_R D_VHDL LCOUPLE SRC_TDM_ D_AND D_WGEN LIMIT UR D_BUFFER D_XNOR LMETER SUMMER D_CHIP D_XOR MES SW D_CPU DAC_BRDG MFB TRA D_CPUPIC DAC_HIZ MIF TRIANGLE D_DFF DEV MOS1 URC D_DLATCH DIO MOS2 VCCS D_DT DIVIDE MOS3 VCVS D_FDIV ENH MULT VERIZA D_INV EVT N1 VHDL2A D_JKFF EW_CAP NCO VHDL2HIZ D_NAND EW_IND NOISE VSRC D_NOR EW_NLA2D ONESHOT XCAP EW_NOISE ZENER model_name is a valid SPICE identifier which will be used on SPICE deck .com . text is a string describing the purpose and function of the code model. It may or may not be the same as the C function name. For example: NAME_TABLE: Spice_Model_Name: capacitor C_Function_Name: cm_capacitor NI Multisim User Manual 6-100 ni.model records to refer to this code model.

g. voltage output) in. default specifies the type used for the port when no type is explicitly specified. Type Name Valid Directions Description d in. Must be one of the items listed in “type”. with names separated by commas or spaces (for example. out h © National Instruments Corporation 6-101 NI Multisim User Manual . [d. Chapter 6 Component Editing Description: “Capacitor with voltage initial condition” Port Table The device ports are defined in the port tables. The port table has the following syntax: PORT_TABLE: Port_Name: name Description: text Default_Type: default Allowed_Type: [type type type] Vector: vector Vector_Bounds: size Direction: dataflow Null_Allowed: null where: name is a valid SPICE identifier giving the name of the port. out digital g in. current output) conductance (voltage input. current output) gd in. out resistance (current input. h]. type lists the allowed types to which the port can be connected. out differential conductance (voltage input. text is a string describing the purpose and function of the port.

voltage output) i in. out current id in.Chapter 6 Component Editing hd in. out differential current v in. Choose from: . use a hyphen (“-”) dataflow specifies the dataflow direction through the port. Lower bound specifies minimum number of elements.this port must be connected For example: PORT_TABLE: Port_Name: cap Description: “capacitor terminals” Direction: inout Default_Type: hd Allowed_Types: [hd] Vector: no Vector_Bounds: - Null_Allowed: no NI Multisim User Manual 6-102 ni.yes .inout null specifies whether or not it is an error to leave the port unconnected. out voltage vd in.this port may be left unconnected .this port is a vector .com . Choose from: . Choose from: .this port is not a vector size for port that are vectors only. For unconstrained range. out differential resistance (current input. upper bound specifies maximum number of elements. or ports that are not a vector. out differential voltage vector specifies whether or not port is a vector and can be considered a bus.no .in .no .yes . specifies upper and lower bounds on vector size.out .

Choose from: . specifies upper and lower bounds on vector size. Chapter 6 Component Editing Parameter Table The device parameters are defined in the parameter tables.boolean (if C data type is “Boolean_t” with valid values MIF_TRUE and MIF_FALSE) . The parameter table has the following syntax: PARAMETER_TABLE: Parameter_Name: name Description: text Data_Type: type Vector: vector Vector_Bounds: size Default_Value: default Limits: range Null_Allowed: null where: name is a valid SPICE identifier which will be used on SPICE deck . use a hyphen (“-”).no . Lower bound specifies minimum number of elements.int (if C data type is “int”) .g. © National Instruments Corporation 6-103 NI Multisim User Manual .g.pointer (if C data type is “void*”) vector specifies whether parameter is vector or scalar. specifies the name of the port whose vector size is to be used for this parameter.model cards to refer to this parameter text is a string describing the purpose and function of the parameter type is the parameter data type. not the conceptual type of the parameter (e. Corresponds to the underlying C data type (e. upper bound specifies maximum number of elements. or parameters that are not a vector. Choose from: .yes . “voltage”).complex (if C data type is “Complex_t” with double members real and imag) .parameter is scalar size for parameters that are vectors only.string (if C data type is “char*”) . For unconstrained range. Alternatively.real (if C data type is “double”) .parameter is vector . “double”).

complex or string literal). a default value to be used if the SPICE deck .no . Georgia 30332 All Rights Reserved PROJECT A-8503 AUTHORS 9/12/91 Bill Kuhn MODIFICATIONS <date> <person name> <nature of modifications> NI Multisim User Manual 6-104 ni. if no default value. range is a limited range of values (for “int” and “real” type parameters only). and the default value will be used or.Chapter 6 Component Editing default if Null_Allowed is “yes”. - Vector: no no Vector_Bounds: .this parameter must have a value.0 Limits: .the corresponding SPICE deck .model line does not supply a value for the parameter. Choose from: . For example: PARAMETER_TABLE: Parameter_Name: c ic Description: “capacitance” “voltage initial condition” Data_Type: real real Default_Value: .yes . XSPICE will flag an error if the corresponding SPICE deck . an undefined value will be passed to the code model . 0.model card may omit a value for this parameter. null specify whether or not parameter is allowed to be null.yes .com .ifs MEMBER OF process XSPICE Copyright 1991 Georgia Tech Research Corporation Atlanta.model card omits a value for this parameter. boolean. Value must correspond to Data_Type (numeric. - Null_Allowed: no no Example Interface File Here is an example interface file: /* ==================================================== FILE ifspec.no .

Chapter 6 Component Editing SUMMARY This file contains the definition of a capacitor code model with voltage type initial conditions. REFERENCED FILES None. 0. NON-STANDARD FEATURES None. - Vector: no no Vector_Bounds: .0 Limits: . INTERFACES None. - Null_Allowed: no no © National Instruments Corporation 6-105 NI Multisim User Manual . ==================================================== */ NAME_TABLE: Spice_Model_Name: capacitor C_Function_Name: cm_capacitor Description: “Capacitor with voltage initial condition” PORT_TABLE: Port_Name: cap Description: “capacitor terminals” Direction: inout Default_Type: hd Allowed_Types: [hd] Vector: no Vector_Bounds: - Null_Allowed: no PARAMETER_TABLE: Parameter_Name: c ic Description: “capacitance” “voltage initial condition” Data_Type: real real Default_Value: .

• The state of the model. The implementation file includes one or more of the macros. Implementation File C Macros AC_GAIN(outputname.mod) At each simulation iteration for a circuit using the code model. The implementation file. along with the interface file. along with the interface file. shown in the Implementation File C Macros section.com . which is stored and returned by XSpice. The implementation file. needs to be coupled into a DLL to complete the code model. x[i] Applies to Analog code models only (event-driven or digital code models should do nothing during AC analysis). This section lists the macros from which you can select. The code model function is called once for each frequency point simulated. The example file shown in the Example Implementation File section gives an example of how to implement a macro. This output is based on the following: • The input that XSpice presents to the code model function. needs to be compiled into a DLL to complete the code model. The code model function then generates the code-modeled device’s output. ANALYSIS Type enum Args none NI Multisim User Manual 6-106 ni.Chapter 6 Component Editing The Implementation File (Cfunc. Multisim’s XSpice simulation engine calls the implementation file. that provide the API (Application Programming Interface) between XSpice and the code model. inputname) Type Complex_t Args y[i]. An example of an implementation file is shown in the Example Implementation File section. Description Assigns a value to this macro to specify the gain from outputname to inputname at the current frequency.

and this macro can be used to specify appropriate output macros. INIT Type Boolean_t Args none Applies to All code models. set to MIF_TRUE. Needed if a code model’s computation effort can be reduced based on the type of call made. set to MIF_EVENT. Otherwise. set to MIF_ANALOG. Description If the analog portion of the simulator requested the code model call. If the digital portion of the simulator requested the code model call. Needed to let the code model perform startup activities (for example. Chapter 6 Component Editing Applies to All code models. since their behavior typically changes depending on the type of analysis being performed. allocated memory) at the start of simulation only. Description The code model function’s parameter list. Description Returns the type of analysis being performed: MIF_AC for AC MIF_DC for DC operating point MID_TRAN for transient ARGS Type Mif_Private_t Args none Applies to All code models. © National Instruments Corporation 6-107 NI Multisim User Manual . Description If this is the first call to the code model function during the current analysis or batch of analyses. CALL_TYPE Type enum Args none Applies to Only code models that are mixed-mode (analog and event-driven or digital). Must be present and should not be modified. set to MIF_FALSE.

INPUT_STATE(inputname) Type enum Args name [i] Applies to Digital/mixed-mode code models.com . conflict resolution is performed. this will equal the value of the last output event. use INPUT). this will equal the strength of the last output event. Description Only analog inputs are allowed (for event-driven.Ifs file. conflict resolution is performed. Returns the digital strength (STRONG. Returns the digital value (ZERO. When a single output is connected to that node.Chapter 6 Component Editing INPUT(inputname) Type double or void * Args name [i] Applies to Analog/mixed-mode code models. When a single output is connected to that node. Type/units of input value is specified when input type is specified in the Ifspec. INPUT_STRENGTH(inputname) Type enum Args name [i] Applies to Digital/mixed-mode code models. ONE or UNKNOWN) at node at inputname. Description Only event-driven/digital inputs are allowed (for analog. use INPUT_STATE and INPUT_STRENGTH). When multiple outputs are connected. When multiple outputs are connected. Returns the value on the node or branch connected to inputname. Description Only event-driven/digital inputs are allowed (for analog. INPUT_TYPE(inputname) Type char * Args name [i] NI Multisim User Manual 6-108 ni. HI_IMPEDANCE or UNDETERMINED) of node at inputname. RESISTIVE. use INPUT).

MESSAGE(outputname) Type char * Args name [i] Applies to Digital/mixed-mode code models. Needed to distinguish between “simulation time” usage of an input or output with more than one allowed type. Allows a code model to issue a message associated with a node. © National Instruments Corporation 6-109 NI Multisim User Manual . used for an input which has allowed types [v. Chapter 6 Component Editing Applies to All code models. LOAD(inputname) Type double Args name [i] Applies to Digital/mixed-mode code models. i] and behaves differently when the input is voltage vs. Description Any inputs allowed.: “v” for voltage. Description Only event-driven/digital outputs are allowed. OUTPUT(outputname) Type double or void * Args name [i] Applies to Analog/mixed-mode code models. The load is given as a capacitance (normalized to 1ohm resistance) which is summed with all the other loads on the event-driven node to yield the total delay of the node. A message string to be placed on an event-driven node can be assigned to MESSAGE. Description Only event-driven/digital inputs are allowed.) which describes the current usage of inputname. For example. “i” for digital.e. Assign a value to LOAD to set the input load due to inputname on the connected node. etc. current. “hd” for differential conductance. Returns the type string (i.

NI Multisim User Manual 6-110 ni. ONE or UNKNOWN) to node at outputname by creating an event which is a transition to that value. OUTPUT_STATE(outputname) Type none Args Digital_State_t Applies to Digital/mixed-mode code models. Sets the delay after which the transition event specified by OUTPUT_STATE occurs. conflict resolution is performed.Chapter 6 Component Editing Description Only analog outputs are allowed (for event-driven. use OUTPUT).Ifs file. Allows the code model to specify that the event-driven output did not change and thereby speed up simulation. use OUTPUT). Assign MIF_FALSE to indicate no change on that output. Assigns the digital value (ZERO. use OUTPUT_STATE and OUTPUT_STRENGTH and OUTPUT_DELAY). OUTPUT_CHANGED(outputname) Type Boolean_t Args name [i] Applies to Digital/mixed-mode code models. Set to MIF_TRUE by default. OUTPUT_DELAY(outputname) Type none Args double Applies to Digital/mixed-mode code models. this will equal the value of the last output event. When multiple outputs are connected. Assigns a value to the node or branch connected to outputname. Description Only event-driven/digital inputs are allowed. Description Only event-driven/digital inputs are allowed (for analog. Description Only event-driven/digital outputs are allowed (for analog.com . Type/units of output value specified when output type is specified in the Ifspec. When a single output is connected to that node.

used for an input which has allowed types [v. RESISTIVE. Description Any output allowed. PARAM_NULL(paramname) Type Boolean_t Args name [i] © National Instruments Corporation 6-111 NI Multisim User Manual . Returns the value paramname. i] and behaves differently when the input is voltage vs. use OUTPUT).: “v” for voltage. this will equal the strength of the last output event. “i” for digital. etc.e. Chapter 6 Component Editing OUTPUT_STRENGTH(outputname) Type none Args Digital_State_t Applies to Digital/mixed-mode code models. Assigns the digital strength (STRONG. Returns the type string (i. “hd” for differential conductance. Description Only event-driven/digital outputs are allowed (for analog. conflict resolution is performed. PARAM(paramname) Type CD Args name [i] Applies to Any code model. When a single output is connected to that node.) which describes the current usage of outputname. HI_IMPEDANCE or UNDETERMINED) at node at outputname. When multiple outputs are connected. Needed to distinguish between “simulation time” usage of an input or output with more than one allowed type. OUTPUT_TYPE(inputname) Type char * Args name [i] Applies to Digital/mixed-mode code models. Description Applies to all parameters. For example. current. Needed to access model parameters specified in the netlist.

PARAM_SIZE(paramname) Type int Args name Applies to Vector type parameters only.com . Needed to iterate over the vector parameter if the number of vector elements is not fixed.Ifs file is yes). Allows the code model to tell if a parameter value equals its default because the default value was actually specified. PARTIAL Type double Args y[i]. PORT_NULL Type Boolean_t Args name[i] Applies to Any code model. Description Partial derivative of output y with respect to input x. Description Size of port vector. Description Returns MIF_TRUE if paramname was not specified in the netlist and MIF_FALSE if it was specified. Description Returns the number of elements in a vector type parameter. Description Has this port been specified as unconnected? PORT_SIZE Type int Args name Applies to Any code model.Chapter 6 Component Editing Applies to Only parameters allowed to be unspecified (Null allowed in the param table of the Ifspec. x[i] Applies to Analog/mixed-mode code models. NI Multisim User Manual 6-112 ni.

Georgia 30332 All Rights Reserved © National Instruments Corporation 6-113 NI Multisim User Manual .mod MEMBER OF process XSPICE Copyright 1991 Georgia Tech Research Corporation Atlanta. Description History of the previous nth analysis time (TIME = T[0]). Description Current analysis frequency in radians per second. Example Implementation File Here is an example implementation file: /* ==================================================== FILE cfunc. TIME Type double Args <none> Applies to All code models. Description Current analysis temperature. Chapter 6 Component Editing RAD_FREQ Type double Args <none> Applies to Analog/mixed-mode code models. Description Current analysis time (same as T[0]). TEMPERATURE Type double Args <none> Applies to All code models. Maximum of 8. T (<n>) Type double Args <none> Applies to All code models.

VC. INTERFACES cm_capacitor() REFERENCED FILES None. 0). sizeof(double)). vc = cm_analog_get_ptr(MIF_INSTANCE. } else { NI Multisim User Manual 6-114 ni. /* Get the ramp factor from the . double partial.Chapter 6 Component Editing PROJECT A-8503 AUTHORS 9/12/91 Bill Kuhn MODIFICATIONS <date> <person name> <nature of modifications> SUMMARY This file contains the definition of a capacitor code model with voltage type initial conditions.com .VC. double *vc. *vc = PARAM(ic) * cm_analog_ramp_factor(MIF_INSTANCE). ==================================================== */ #define VC 0 void cm_capacitor (ARGS) { Complex_t ac_gain.option ramptime */ ramp_factor = cm_analog_ramp_factor(MIF_INSTANCE). /* Initialize/access instance specific storage for capacitor volt age */ if(INIT) { cm_analog_alloc(MIF_INSTANCE. double ramp_factor. NON-STANDARD FEATURES None.

cap) = partial. } else if(ANALYSIS == AC) { ac_gain. AC_GAIN(cap. OUTPUT(cap) = *vc. cap) = ac_gain. OUTPUT(cap) = *vc. cap) = 0. } } } © National Instruments Corporation 6-115 NI Multisim User Manual .VC. vc. PARTIAL(cap. } /* Compute the output */ if(ANALYSIS == DC) { OUTPUT(cap) = PARAM(ic) * ramp_factor.imag = -1. partial /= PARAM(c).0.0 / RAD_FREQ / PARAM(c). Chapter 6 Component Editing vc = cm_analog_get_ptr(MIF_INSTANCE.0.0. 0). } else { cm_analog_integrate(MIF_INSTANCE. } else if(ANALYSIS == TRANSIENT) { if(ramp_factor < 1. PARTIAL(cap. PARTIAL(cap.0) { *vc = PARAM(ic) * ramp_factor. ac_gain. cap) = 0.real = 0.INPUT(cap) / PARAM(c). &partial).

ISBN-13: 978-0-471-60926-1.. 1993. Documentation Conventions This specification uses the following conventions: • Text enclosed in <> is optional. Note Since the simulation engine is case insensitive. Giuseppe Massobrio and Paolo Antognetti. device name. • Red text is a variable. The sections describe general purpose syntax used for such operations as device declaration. or Semiconductor Device Modeling with SPICE. • Orange text is a mathematical expression or numeric constant. For more information about SPICE. © National Instruments Corporation 7-1 NI Multisim User Manual . you may wish to consult The SPICE Book. John Wiley & Sons Inc. • Green text is a model identifier. the use of both upper and lower case characters in this document is done strictly for clarity. a function. or subckt name. • Blue italic text is an example. or an instance name. ISBN-13: 978-0070024694. 1994. and device-specific syntax used to parameterize primitive devices such as MOSFETs. Second Edition. Andrei Vladimirescu. The scope of this section is to serve as a reference guide. • Blue text is a node identifier.Multisim SPICE Reference 7 The following sections document SPICE-based circuit syntax that is supported by Multisim’s simulation engine. McGraw-Hill. • Brown text is an XSPICE terminal type specifier.

. Node names may contain any characters except for white space and the following: \ {} () [] : # " ' . This section looks at how a primitive device is declared and used in a circuit. Multisim supports many such devices. The instance declaration has the following general format: PREFIX_anyname node1 <node2 <…>> my_ModelNAME Instance_line_parameters Identifier Description PREFIX Device specific character. nodeN The name of the Nth node that the device is where N=1. Primitive Device Declarations SPICE Subcircuits Circuit Parameters Number Format Comments and Line Continuation Primitive Device Declarations A primitive device is the lowest level model that can be used in a circuit and is a building block for macromodels and entire circuits. Instance Declaration The instance declaration places a primitive device between circuit nodes. Refer to the Analog Devices section for more information.com .3… connected to.Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference General Purpose Syntax This section describes the overall syntax and building blocks of SPICE models. specifies device parameters. % < > ` & = * NI Multisim User Manual 7-2 ni. Primitive devices are comprised of either just an instance declaration or an instance declaration with an associated model definition.2. _anyname Arbitrary instance name suffix. and links the instance to a model definition (where needed).

Model Definition Required for some primitive devices and optional for others. All device-specific information regarding prefix characters. Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Identifier Description my_ModelNAME Arbitrary name that links the instance declaration to a model definition.model my_ModelNAME <AKO:akomodelname> devicename(<Model_Parameters>) Identifier Description my_ModelNAME Arbitrary model identifier that links the model definition to one or more instance declarations. Model_Parameters List of device-specific model parameter assignments. model definition requirements. Assignments made in the Model_Parameters block overwrite these defaults. The model line has the following format: . the model line allows users to specify additional parameters for a device. number of circuit nodes. Note that every model parameter of every device has a default value. devicename Device-specific identifier. and device parameters is contained in the Analog Devices section. parameters some of which are mandatory and some optional. © National Instruments Corporation 7-3 NI Multisim User Manual . akomodelname Model identifier from which specified model parameters will be inherited. Instance_line_ A list of device specific instance parameters. It is optional for some devices is and mandatory for others.

model myMOS1 AKO:myMOS2 nmos(vto=1.model BJTer npn(is=1e-12 bf=140 rc=3 tf=3n) *MOSFET M1 will inherit *kp=1e-3 phi=0.1u M1 1 4 9 9 myMOS1 . forming the basis of any modular or hierarchical design.model myResmodel res(rmult=5) *A BJT with area factor of 8 *and BJT with an area factor 4 Q54 99 b 0 BJTer area=8 Q55 e b 0 BJTer area=4 .Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Examples *Resistor device without its optional model line R88 1 0 10k tc1=0.44 ld=0.44 ld=0. thus internal devices and node names with the same names as those external to the subcircuit are neither conflicting nor shorted. Subcircuit Definition .1u) SPICE Subcircuits A SPICE subcircuit wraps around a block of circuit text and allows external connections to this circuitry only through the subcircuit’s port.com . A subcircuit is an extremely useful concept. The benefit of this is that the internal circuitry is isolated from external circuitry.76 mj=0. subcircuits can accept circuit parameters which can be used to assign values to internal devices or nested subcircuits. In addition.model myMOS2 nmos(kp=1e-3 phi=0.4) .ENDS NI Multisim User Manual 7-4 ni.SUBCKT mysubcktname node1 <node2 <…>> <OPTIONAL: optionalnode1=defaultnode1 <optionalnode2=defaultnode2 <…>>> <PARAMS: param1=default1 <param2=default2 <…>>> <Subcircuit Contents> .1 tc2=5 *Resistor device with its optional model line R15 in8 out myResmodel 10k .76 mj=0.

optionalnodeN The name of the Nth optional node for the where N=1. This can be done as a top level model of a component on a schematic or by declaring an instance of the subcircuit within a model.2. A subcircuit definition is only useful if it is referenced by one or more instance declarations inside a circuit. Optional nodes are not available on Multisim components and thus they are not useful on the top level models of a component. paramN A default value for the Nth input parameter if where N=1. These nodes are optionally included on the instance line and if they are not provided then they will be connected to optionalnodeN.3… subcircuit port. Refer to the Advanced Pin Mapping Dialog section of Chapter 6.3… port.2.3… for the subcircuit. This node should be a valid node from outside this subcircuit declaration.2.2. © National Instruments Corporation 7-5 NI Multisim User Manual . These are the nodes that Multisim’s component symbol pins would be mapped to.2.3… PARAMN is not specified on the subcircuit instance declaration. nodeN The name of the Nth node for the subcircuit where N=1. paramN The name of the Nth input circuit parameter where N=1. defaultnodeN The default node to connect to for where N=1. Component Editing for more information.3… optionalnodeN if that node is not provided on the instance line. Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Identifier Description mysubcktname Arbitrary subcircuit identifier that links the subcircuit to an instance declaration.

regardless of circuit or subcircuit hierarchy.2. Examples *A resistive voltage divider circuit that uses a resistor subcircuit model. • Node “0” is a global node .2. The nodes do not have to be in the same order as the subcircuit definition and do not all need to be present. where N=1. The upper resistor is 10k and the lower is 47k V1 in 0 10 X1 in mid res_block params: res_val=10k X2 mid 0 res_block . the entire circuit parameters portion must be enclosed by round “( )” or curly “{ }” parenthesis. If any particular PARAMN is omitted then the subcircuit will use defaultN.3… nodes must match the number of nodes in the subcircuit definition.Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Instance Declaration Xanyname node1 <node2 <…>> mysubcktName <PARAMS: PARAM1=expression1 <PARAM2=expression2 <…>>> Identifier Description nodeN The Nth node for the subckt.3… See the expression section for details regarding expressions. Additional Notes • This SPICE-based subcircuit should not be confused with a Multisim schematic capture Subcircuit which is used to created hierarchy with schematic symbols. paramN The name of the input parameter for the where N=1. mysubcktName An arbitrary subcircuit identifier linking the instance declaration to a subcircuit.2.subckt res_block 1 2 params: res_val=47k NI Multisim User Manual 7-6 ni. The number of where N=1. expressionN The expression for the Nth input parameter.com .3… subckt. • If the “PARAMS:” keyword is omitted within the circuit parameters portion of the declaration. all nodes with the name “0” are connected together.

and thus may not contain any circuit variables such as node voltages or branch currents. if it is defined in a SPICE subckt. expression Arbitrary expression operating on numerical constants or other circuit parameters. Circuit variables (node voltage and device current) are not permitted.subckt AMP in out PARAMS: ampgain=90 E1 out 0 in 0 {ampgain} . so if a parameter is defined in the main circuit it can also be used in the SPICE subckts. Additional Notes • Circuit parameters are constants. • Circuit parameters take precedence over predefined constants. R2’s value is 2. Expressions always use the most locally defined value. In the example below. the resistor R1’s value is 3.ends Circuit Parameters Circuit parameters allow flexibility in assigning device parameters. If you define a variable called pi it will be used in place of the normal built-in constant.ends *expression usage . it must not start with a number. © National Instruments Corporation 7-7 NI Multisim User Manual . 80)} .PARAM my_parameter_name = expression Identifier Description my_parameter_ Arbitrary parameter name. Refer to the Mathematical Expressions section for more details regarding expressions. • Parameter variables exist at the level of the circuit they are defined at.param gain=100 V1 5 0 3. In addition. and underscores but not any other symbols. and R4’s value is 4. then that parameter will be meaningless in the circuit levels above. The general format for defining a circuit parameter is as follows: . It may contain name numbers. Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference R1 1 2 {res_val} .14. 200. letters.3 X1 5 8 AMP PARAMS: ampgain={limit(gain. However. R3’s value is 3.

U micro 1e-6 m.ENDS .PARAM pi = 2 R2 node1 node2 { pi } X2 node3 node2 mysub2 . P pico 1e-12 n.PARAM varb = 4 .Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference R1 51 0 {pi} X1 1 2 mysub .model mydiode d(n={n+0. K Kilo 1e3 meg.PARAM pi = 3 R3 node1 node2 { pi } R4 node1 node2 {varb} . F fento 1e-15 p. Any characters that follow directly.PARAM n = {0.ENDS Examples .PARAM maxV = a+10 V1 in 0 {maxV} D1 in 3 mydiode .PARAM a = 6 . MEG Mega 1e6 NI Multisim User Manual 7-8 ni.SUBCKT mysub node1 node2 .01}) Number Format Numbers are standard floating point or integer numbers with optional suffixes.com . M milli 1e-3 k. N nano 1e-9 u.5} . are ignored.SUBCKT mysub2 node1 node2 . Number suffixes: Suffix Meaning Multiplier f. unless they are mathematical operators.

21e-6+5uV} Comments and Line Continuation The asterisk (*) and the semicolon (. but this is just a comment R1 1 2 10k *Below.2 +rs=3. G Giga 1e9 t.) is used within a line of text to comment out everything to the right. we only eliminate the 'n' parameter from the multiline SPICE statement D1 2 0 myDiode . Examples *This example shows how comments work V1 1 0 10 .model myDiode d(Is=1e-12 *+n=1.V1 is in the circuit. The semicolon (.7) © National Instruments Corporation 7-9 NI Multisim User Manual . A plus (+) is used to continue a SPICE statement from the previous line. The comment works on a per line basis—a single asterisk does not comment out an entire SPICE statement spread over multiple lines. Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Suffix Meaning Multiplier g.) characters can be used to comment out individual line of circuit text. Resistor R2 is taken out of the circuit *R2 1 2 10k *In the following. T Tera 1e12 Examples R1 1 2 10mohm *the following voltage source has a DC value of 0.00000521 V1 4 0 {0.

Refer to the Arbitrary Source section for more information. • I(deviceX) references the current through the device with the instance name deviceX. Operators and Constants User-Defined Functions Introduction Mathematical expressions allow the user to create arbitrary mathematical expressions consisting of various functions and operators and apply the results to device parameters. this is not required for simulation. and. Within the Arbitrary Source device. Additional Notes • We recommend that expressions be enclosed in {} to avoid ambiguous syntax. However.node-).com . Expressions are very useful modeling tools when used within the Arbitrary Source devices. special functions V(nodeabs). V(node+. • V(node+. and inductor devices are supported. operators and pre-defined constants. Refer to the Supported Mathematical Functions. Currently only the Independent Voltage source.node-) references the difference between node+ and node-. on live circuit variables. dependent voltage sources. NI Multisim User Manual 7-10 ni.Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Mathematical Expressions Introduction Supported Mathematical Functions. on circuit parameters. • V(nodeabs) references the voltage at node nodeabs relative to ground. • Portions of expressions that are not enclosed in {} or () should not contain any spaces. when used within the Arbitrary Source device. and I(deviceX) can be used to reference the circuit voltages and currents. Operators and Constants section for a list of supported mathematical functions. The functions and operators in the expression can operate on numerical constants.

returns b.b) If-else function. 0)} sin sine ( x ) Sine function. tan — ( x ) Tangent function. — tanh — ( x ) Hyperbolic tangent — function. acosh arccosh ( x ) Arc-hyperbolic cosine — function. cos — ( x ) Cosine function.param pole=1k . asinh arcsinh ( x ) Arc-hyperbolic sine — function.025)-1 ) } Supported Mathematical Functions. — cosh — ( x ) Hyperbolic cosine — function. If the Example: test returns true. — asin arcsin ( x ) Arc-sine function. Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Examples *High-level filter specification . © National Instruments Corporation 7-11 NI Multisim User Manual . — sinh — ( x ) Hyperbolic sine — function. the B1 out 0 result is a.C)/0. — acos arccos ( x ) Arc-cosine function. else it V={if(v(1)>5. v(1)**2.param res_val=1k R1 in out {res_val} C1 out 0 {1/(2*pi*res_val*pole)} *A very simple diode modeled using an expression in an Arbitrary source G1 A C value={1e-12*(e^(V(A.a. Operators and Constants Mathematical functions: Function Alternate Name Name Parameters Description Notes if — (test.

sgn sign ( x ) Sign or signum if (x < 0) function. same as ln(x) except in ‘B’ arbitrary sources This function is where it is log10(x). recommended. ln — ( x ) The natural logarithm — function. y ) Atan 2 function. y ) Calculates the Same as: exponential with a min (exp (x). exp1 — ( x.SYNTAX statements. Same as: atan (x/y) exp — ( x ) Calculates the — exponential ex. sqrt — ( x ) Square root function.Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Function Alternate Name Name Parameters Description Notes atan arctan ( x ) Arc-tangent function. — atanh arctanh ( x ) Arc-hyperbolic — tangent function. — abs — ( x ) Absolute value — function.com . NI Multisim User Manual 7-12 ni. atan2 — ( x. log ( x ) The generic logarithm Normally this is the function. y) maximum value. y ) Returns the maximum — of x and y. log10 ( x ) The base-10 logarithm function. included for legacy This behavior is also compatibility and its changed by the use is not . sgn(x) ==–1 if (x > 0) sgn(x) == 1 if (x == 0) sgn(x) == 0 max — ( x.

pwr — ( x. step ( x ) Step function. © National Instruments Corporation 7-13 NI Multisim User Manual . y ) Returns the minimum — of x and y. if (x < 0) pwrs(x) == –(x**y) if (x >= 0) pwrs(x) == (x**y) V — (node) Voltage of a node. limit — ( x.5 table — (expr. the function version of Source section for <x2. if (x < 0) u(x) == 0 if (x > 0) u(x) == 1 if (x == 0) u(x) == 0. uramp — ( x ) Ramp function. Same as: abs(x)^y pwrs — ( x.y1. Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Function Alternate Name Name Parameters Description Notes min — ( x. clips if (x < 0) the value against a uramp(x) == 0 minimum of 0. This is Refer to the Arbitrary x1. <…>>) Arbitrary source device. Can only be used in non-linear controlled source expressions. y ) The pwr function. Table function. y ) The pwrs function.y2 the TABLE based more information. if (x >= 0) uramp = x u stp. b ) Clips the input value x — to the range (A.B). a.

nonpos(x) = 0 else nonpos(x) = x nonneg — ( x ) Ensure not-negative if (x < 0) function.2)*15} I — (voltage Current through a Can only be used in source) or voltage source or an non-linear controlled (inductor) inductor. source expressions. negative(x) =–d else negative(x) = x where d is 1. Example: E1 out 0 value={I(Vsense)**2 + I(E99)} positive — ( x ) Ensure positive if (x < d) function.0p nonpos — ( x ) Ensure not-positive if (x > 0) function. positive(x) = d else positive(x) = x where d is 1. non-linear controlled source expressions.com .0p negative — ( x ) Ensure negative if (x >–d) function. Voltage difference of Can only be used in node2) two nodes. Same as: V(node1)-V(node2) Example: E1 out 0 value={V(1.Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Function Alternate Name Name Parameters Description Notes V — (node1. nonneg(x) = 0 else nonneg(x) = x NI Multisim User Manual 7-14 ni.

A*B ** ^ Exponentiation (power).y1. A/B * Multiplication. A ** B or A ^ B This can be interpreted differently in other simulators.0p zero — ( x ) Evaluates x but always — returns a value of 0. A+B . Schedule function. <x2. A>B © National Instruments Corporation 7-15 NI Multisim User Manual . Mathematical operators: Alternate Symbol Symbol Description Usage + Addition. Subtraction. Refer to the Compatibility Modes section for more information. Gives a value of yN time. A <= B > Greater than. schedule — (expr. one — ( x ) Evaluates x but always — returns a value of 1.y2 for when time between <…>>) xN and xN+1.0.0. Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Function Alternate Name Name Parameters Description Notes nonzero — ( x ) Ensure non-zero if (x < d) & (x >= 0) function. nonzero(x) = d if (x >–d) & (x <= 0) nonzero(x) =–d else nonzero(x) = x where d is 1. A–B / Division. A<B <= Less than or equal to. < Less than. Time is simulation x1.

62606896e-34 NI Multisim User Manual 7-16 ni. A&B | Logical OR. echarge Electron charge.0 Kelvin and Celsius. A == B != Not equal to. This operator has A?B:C two symbols and three This is the same as IF(A. 2.B. A XOR B ?: Ternary if.14159265358979323846 e The constant e.com .Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Alternate Symbol Symbol Description Usage >= Greater than or equal to. 1. A != B & Logical AND. operands. 3. 1. 1. and vice versa.0 false Boolean false value.602176487e-19 boltz Boltzmann’s constant. 1. 2. 6.71828182844590452353 c Speed of light. pi The constant pi.3806503e-23 planck Planck’s constant.0 value.0 yes Alternate form of boolean true value.C). A >= B == Equal to.0 no Alternate form of boolean false 0. A|B xor Logical XOR. 0. Built-in constants: Symbol Description Value true Boolean true value.99792458e8 kelvin Constant to convert between degrees –273.

Additional Notes • IMPORTANT! Unlike most mathematical languages. but it can be simulation in degrees Celsius. Use brackets to ensure logical.Arg2 <…> > ) = valueexpression Identifier Description my_function_name Arbitrary function name. Although this is unintuitive. it is standard among SPICE simulators. only the Arbitrary Source device can call a function with circuit variables (node voltages and device currents) in the arguments. © National Instruments Corporation 7-17 NI Multisim User Manual . readable expressions in this case. User-Defined Functions Similar to the way subcircuits provide modularity to connecting together blocks of circuits.2. However. time Current time of the simulation in Current time of the simulation in seconds. user-defined functions provide modularity for using mathematical expressions. where N=1. This means that {–5**2} is +25 while {0–5**2} is –25. Declaration . changed from the simulation options. Multisim considers the exponentiation (power) operators ** and ^ to be of higher precedence than unary minus.3 valueexpression Mathematical Expression operating on the arguments Additional Notes • User-defined functions can be called from any field where a mathematical expression is used. ArgN List of arguments used by the function. seconds (it is constant with respect to circuit variables).FUNC my_function_name( Arg1 <. Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Symbol Description Value temp Current temperature of the The default is 27.

but this is not mandatory.c)=a+sinplusn(b**c.FUNC sinplusn ( angle. • The value expression may be enclosed in {} for clarity.com .FUNC myfunc(a.3*v(3). • User-defined functions take precedence over predefined functions. Line (Lumped-approximation R.C.param foo=myfunc(1. n ) = {sin(angle) + n} .0.Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference • Function names may contain numbers. if you define a function called sin it will take the place of the standard sin function within that context.9)} G1 0 88 value={myfunc(I(Vref).3) E1 60 59 value={5+myfunc(v(2). Examples .2.C.1) . 2} Analog Devices Resistor Capacitor Inductor Coupled (Mutual) Inductor Diode Lossless Transmission Line Lossy Transmission Line Uniform R. letters and underscores but must not start with a number and may not contain any other symbols. 1.b. line) JFET MESFET Voltage-Controlled Switch Current-Controlled Switch BJT MOSFET Independent Voltage Source Independent Current Source Arbitrary Source Voltage Controlled Voltage Source Current Controlled Voltage Source Voltage Controlled Current Source Current Controlled Current Source NI Multisim User Manual 7-18 ni.

TC2 Alternate way of specifying 2nd-order temperature coefficient. This is a two element vector for specifying TC1 and TC2.MODEL mymodelname RES ( <TC1=tc1 < TC2=tc2>> <Other_Model_Parameters…> ) © National Instruments Corporation 7-19 NI Multisim User Manual . TC1 Alternate way of specifying 1st-order temperature coefficient. TC Instance temperature coefficients. The following only applies if a model has been specified in the instance declaration as it is not mandatory for resistors.tc2> > <TEMP=temp> Rxxxx node1 node2 resistance <TC1=tc1> <TC2=tc2> <TEMP=temp> Rxxxx node1 node2 <resistance> <Model> <L=l> <W=w> Resistor instance declaration parameters: Parameter Name Parameter Description resistance Device resistance. W Device width. L Device length. Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Resistor Resistor instance declaration syntax: Rxxxx node1 node2 resistance <TC=tc1 <. Resistor model definition syntax: .MODEL mymodelname R ( <TC1=tc1 <TC2=tc2>> <Other_Model_Parameters…> ) . TEMP Instance operating temperature. SENS_RESIST [FLAG] Flag to request sensitivity with respect to resistance.

tc2> > Cxxxx node1 node2 capacitance <Model> <L=L> <W=W> <IC=vc0> NI Multisim User Manual 7-20 ni. — 1. ºC — T_MEASURED Temperature at which model parameters ºC — were measured. 1/ºC 0. Examples R1 1 0 4.0 RMULT Resistance multiplier.com . 1/(ºC2) 0.0 TC1 Instance 1st-order temperature coefficient. 0. T_REL_LOCAL Temperature delta relative to AKO model ºC — temperature. T_REL_GLOBAL Temperature delta relative to global ºC — temperature. T_ABS Absolute temperature. m 1 × 10-6 NARROW Narrowing due to side etching. Ω/sq. — 1. m 0.7k R2 1 0 10k myRes .0 R Resistance multiplier (same as RMULT). %/(ºC2) 0.0 TNOM Temperature at which model parameters ºC — were measured.0 TCE Exponential temperature coefficient.0 RSH Sheet resistance.model myRes r(tc1=1e-4) Capacitor Capacitor instance declaration syntax: Cxxxx node1 node2 capacitance <IC=vc0> <TC=tc1 <.0 TC2 Instance 2nd-order temperature coefficient.Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Parameter Name Parameter Description Units Default DEFW Default device width.

MODEL mymodelname C ( <TC1=tc1 <TC2=tc2>> <VC1=vc1 <VC2=vc2>> + <Other_Model_Parameters…> ) Capacitor model definition parameters: Parameter Name Parameter Description Units Default CJ Junction bottom capacitance per area. ºC — © National Instruments Corporation 7-21 NI Multisim User Manual . This is a two element vector for specifying TC1 and TC2. L Device length.0 CJSW Junction sidewall capacitance per meter. TEMP Instance temperature.0 CMULT Capacitance multiplier. Capacitor model definition syntax: . IC Initial capacitor voltage. F/m 0. m 1x10-6 NARROW Narrowing due to side etching.0 TNOM Temperature at which model parameters ºC — were measured. — 1. F/(m2) 0. W Device width.0 DEFW Default width. TC Instance temperature coefficients. The following only applies if a model has been specified in the instance declaration as it is not mandatory for capacitors. T_ABS Absolute temperature. m 0. SENS_CAP [FLAG] Flag to request sensitivity with respect to capacitance. Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Capacitance instance declaration parameters: Parameter Name Parameter Description capacitance Device capacitance.

1/ºC 0. NI Multisim User Manual 7-22 ni. The following only applies if a model has been specified in the instance declaration as it is not mandatory for inductor. SENS_IND [FLAG] Flag to request sensitivity with respect to inductance. 1/(ºC2) 0.0 VC1 1st-order voltage coefficient.0 VC2 2nd-order voltage coefficient. 1/V 0. TEMP Instance temperature.Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Parameter Name Parameter Description Units Default T_MEASURED Temperature at which model parameters ºC — were measured.0 Examples c1 1 0 1u C2 1 0 1e-12 myCap . 1/(V2) 0.com .model myCap C(tc1=1e-4) Inductor Inductor instance declaration syntax: Lxxxx node1 node2 <Model> inductance <IC=iL0> Inductor instance declaration parameters: Parameter Name Parameter Description inductance Device inductance. T_REL_LOCAL Temperature delta relative to AKO model ºC — temperature. TC1 1st-order temperature coefficient.0 TC2 2nd-order temperature coefficient. T_REL_GLOBAL Temperature delta relative to global ºC — temperature. IC Initial current through inductor.

1/(A2) 0.0 LMULT Inductance multiplier.MODEL mymodelname IND ( <Other_Model_Parameters…> ) Inductor model definition parameters: Parameter Name Parameter Description Units Default IL1 1st-order current coefficient. 1/ºC 0. TC1 1st-order temperature coefficient. T_REL_LOCAL Temperature delta relative to AKO model ºC — temperature. Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Inductor model definition syntax: . 1/(ºC2) 0.model myCap C(tc1=1e-4) Coupled (Mutual) Inductor Coupled inductor instance declaration syntax: Kxxxx Lname1 Lname2 k © National Instruments Corporation 7-23 NI Multisim User Manual . — 1.0 TNOM Temperature at which model parameters ºC — were measured.0 IL2 2nd-order current coefficient.0 TC2 2nd-order temperature coefficient. T_REL_GLOBAL Temperature delta relative to global ºC — temperature.MODEL mymodelname L ( <Other_Model_Parameters…> ) .0 Examples L1 1 0 1m l2 1 0 1e-12 myCap . T_ABS Absolute temperature. 1/A 0. ºC — T_MEASURED Temperature at which model parameters ºC — were measured.

99 Diode Diode instance declaration syntax: Dxxx nodeN+ nodeN.MODEL mymodelname D ( <Other_Model_Parameters…> ) NI Multisim User Manual 7-24 ni.0 to 1. IC Initial device voltage. Diode model definition syntax: .com . Lname1 Name of first coupled inductor.0).Model <area> <OFF> <IC=Vd0> <TEMP=temp> Diode instance declaration parameters: Parameter Name Parameter Description area Area factor.Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Coupled inductor instance declaration parameters: Parameter Name Parameter Description k Mutual inductance coefficient (0. Examples L1 1 0 1m L2 77 0 1m L3 88 0 1m K1 L1 L2 0. TEMP Instance temperature.99 K2 L1 L3 0.99 K3 L2 L3 0. Lname2 Name of second coupled inductor. OFF Initially off.

s 0. ºC — TRS1 Linear RS temperature coefficient. A 1 × 10-10 IBVL Low-level reverse breakdown knee current. 1/ºC 0.0 KF Flicker noise coefficient. — 1. A infinite IS Saturation current. — 1.0 M Grading coefficient. 1/ºC 0. — 0. Ω 0. A 1 × 10-14 ISR Recombination currrent parameter. 1/(ºC2) 0. — 1. 1/ºC 0. eV 1.0 TBV2 Quadratic BV temperature coefficient. F 0.0 NBV Reverse breakdown ideality factor.0 TIKF Linear IKF temperature coefficient.0 RS Ohmic resistance.0 IKF High-injection knee current. — 2.0 BV Reverse breakdown voltage.5 IBV Current at reverse breakdown voltage.0 EG Bandgap voltage. — 0. A 0. A 0.11 FC Forward bias junction fit parameter.0 TNOM Parameter measurement temperature.5 N Emission coefficient.0 TT Transit time. V infinite CJO Junction capacitance. 1/(ºC2) 0.0 NR Emission coefficient for ISR.0 © National Instruments Corporation 7-25 NI Multisim User Manual . Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Diode model definition parameters: Parameter Name Parameter Description Units Default AF Flicker noise exponent. — 1.0 TRS2 Quadratic RS temperature coefficient. — 0.0 TBV1 Linear BV temperature coefficient.0 NBVL Low-level reverse breakdown ideality factor.

Chapter 7 Multisim SPICE Reference Parameter Name Parameter Description Units Default VJ Junction potential.1p) Lossless Transmission Line Lossless transmission line instance declaration syntax: Txxx nodeP1+ nodeP1. i1 Initial current i1. v1 Initial voltage v1.v2 <. REL Relative rate of change of derivative for breakpoint. v2 Initial voltage v2.0 Examples *diode with area scale of 2 d1 1 0 myDiode 2 .nodeP2+ nodeP2. — 3.nodeP2+ nodeP2. F Frequency. TD Transmission delay. V 1.Z0=z0 <TD=td> <F=freq <NL=nl> <V1=v1> <I1=i1> <V2=v2> <I2=i2> <REL=rel> <ABS=abs> Lossless Transmission Line instance declaration parameters: Parameter Name Parameter Description ZO Characteristic impedance.com .Z0=z0 <TD=td> <F=freq <NL=nl> <IC=v1 <.i1 <. NI Multisim User Manual 7-26 ni. ABS Absolute rate of change of derivative for breakpoint. i2 Initial current i2.i2>>>> <REL=rel> <ABS=abs> Txxx nodeP1+ nodeP1.0 XTI Saturation current temperature exponent.model myDiode d(is=1. NL